Repository Guide

Informatica® PowerCenter®
(Version 8.6.1)
Informatica PowerCenter Repository Guide

Version 8.6.1
December 2008
Copyright (c) 1998–2008 Informatica Corporation. All rights reserved.

This software and documentation contain proprietary information of Informatica Corporation and are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are also
protected by copyright law. Reverse engineering of the software is prohibited. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, by any means (electronic, photocopying,
recording or otherwise) without prior consent of Informatica Corporation. This Software may be protected by U.S. and/or international Patents and other Patents Pending.

Use, duplication, or disclosure of the Software by the U.S. Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in the applicable software license agreement and as provided in DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and
227.7702-3(a) (1995), DFARS 252.227-7013(c)(1)(ii) (OCT 1988), FAR 12.212(a) (1995), FAR 52.227-19, or FAR 52.227-14 (ALT III), as applicable.

The information in this product or documentation is subject to change without notice. If you find any problems in this product or documentation, please report them to us in writing.

Informatica, PowerCenter, PowerCenterRT, PowerCenter Connect, PowerCenter Data Analyzer, PowerExchange, PowerMart, Metadata Manager, Informatica Data Quality, Informatica Data
Explorer, Informatica B2B Data Exchange and Informatica On Demand are trademarks or registered trademarks of Informatica Corporation in the United States and in jurisdictions throughout the
world. All other company and product names may be trade names or trademarks of their respective owners.

Portions of this software and/or documentation are subject to copyright held by third parties, including without limitation: Copyright DataDirect Technologies. All rights reserved. Copyright © 2007
Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Copyright © Sun Microsystems. All rights reserved. Copyright © RSA Security Inc. All Rights Reserved. Copyright © Ordinal Technology Corp. All
rights reserved. Copyright © Platon Data Technology GmbH. All rights reserved. Copyright © Melissa Data Corporation. All rights reserved. Copyright © Aandacht c.v. All rights reserved. Copyright
1996-2007 ComponentSource®. All rights reserved. Copyright Genivia, Inc. All rights reserved. Copyright 2007 Isomorphic Software. All rights reserved. Copyright © Meta Integration Technology,
Inc. All rights reserved. Copyright © Microsoft. All rights reserved. Copyright © Oracle. All rights reserved. Copyright © AKS-Labs. All rights reserved. Copyright © Quovadx, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright © SAP. All rights reserved. Copyright 2003, 2007 Instantiations, Inc. All rights reserved. Copyright © Intalio. All rights reserved.

This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/), software copyright 2004-2005 Open Symphony (all rights reserved) and other software which
is licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”). You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to
in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for
the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.

This product includes software which was developed by Mozilla (http://www.mozilla.org/), software copyright The JBoss Group, LLC, all rights reserved; software copyright, Red Hat Middleware,
LLC, all rights reserved; software copyright © 1999-2006 by Bruno Lowagie and Paulo Soares and other software which is licensed under the GNU Lesser General Public License Agreement, which may
be found at http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl.html. The materials are provided free of charge by Informatica, “as-is”, without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including but not limited
to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.

The product includes ACE(TM) and TAO(TM) software copyrighted by Douglas C. Schmidt and his research group at Washington University, University of California, Irvine, and Vanderbilt
University, Copyright (c) 1993-2006, all rights reserved.

This product includes software copyright (c) 2003-2007, Terence Parr. All rights reserved. Your right to use such materials is set forth in the license which may be found at http://www.antlr.org/
license.html. The materials are provided free of charge by Informatica, “as-is”, without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including but not limited to the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (copyright The OpenSSL Project. All Rights Reserved) and redistribution of this software is subject
to terms available at http://www.openssl.org.

This product includes Curl software which is Copyright 1996-2007, Daniel Stenberg, <[email protected]>. All Rights Reserved. Permissions and limitations regarding this software are subject to terms
available at http://curl.haxx.se/docs/copyright.html. Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.

The product includes software copyright 2001-2005 (C) MetaStuff, Ltd. All Rights Reserved. Permissions and limitations regarding this software are subject to terms available at http://www.dom4j.org/
license.html.

The product includes software copyright (c) 2004-2007, The Dojo Foundation. All Rights Reserved. Permissions and limitations regarding this software are subject to terms available at http://
svn.dojotoolkit.org/dojo/trunk/LICENSE.

This product includes ICU software which is copyright (c) 1995-2003 International Business Machines Corporation and others. All rights reserved. Permissions and limitations regarding this software
are subject to terms available at http://www-306.ibm.com/software/globalization/icu/license.jsp

This product includes software copyright (C) 1996-2006 Per Bothner. All rights reserved. Your right to use such materials is set forth in the license which may be found at http://www.gnu.org/software/
kawa/Software-License.html.

This product includes OSSP UUID software which is Copyright (c) 2002 Ralf S. Engelschall, Copyright (c) 2002 The OSSP Project Copyright (c) 2002 Cable & Wireless Deutschland. Permissions
and limitations regarding this software are subject to terms available at http://www.opensource.org/licenses/mit-license.php.

This product includes software developed by Boost (http://www.boost.org/) or under the Boost software license. Permissions and limitations regarding this software are subject to terms available at
http://www.boost.org/LICENSE_1_0.txt.

This product includes software copyright © 1997-2007 University of Cambridge. Permissions and limitations regarding this software are subject to terms available at http://www.pcre.org/license.txt.

This product includes software copyright (c) 2007 The Eclipse Foundation. All Rights Reserved. Permissions and limitations regarding this software are subject to terms available at http://
www.eclipse.org/org/documents/epl-v10.php.

The product includes the zlib library copyright (c) 1995-2005 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler.

This product includes software licensed under the terms at http://www.tcl.tk/software/tcltk/license.html.

This product includes software licensed under the terms at http://www.bosrup.com/web/overlib/?License.
This product includes software licensed under the terms at http://www.stlport.org/doc/license.html.

This product includes software licensed under the Academic Free License (http://www.opensource.org/licenses/afl-3.0.php). This product includes software copyright © 2003-2006 Joe WaInes, 2006-
2007 XStream Committers. All rights reserved. Permissions and limitations regarding this software are subject to terms available at http://xstream.codehaus.org/license.html. This product includes
software developed by the Indiana University Extreme! Lab. For further information please visit http://www.extreme.indiana.edu/.

This Software is protected by U.S. Patent Numbers 6,208,990; 6,044,374; 6,014,670; 6,032,158; 5,794,246; 6,339,775; 6,850,947; 6,895,471; 7,254,590 and other U.S. Patents Pending.
DISCLAIMER: Informatica Corporation provides this documentation “as is” without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of non-
infringement, merchantability, or use for a particular purpose. Informatica Corporation does not warrant that this software or documentation is error free. The information provided in this software or
documentation may include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. The information in this software and documentation is subject to change at any time without notice.

Part Number: PC-REG-86100-0001

Table of Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Informatica Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Informatica Customer Portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Informatica Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Informatica Web Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Informatica How-To Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Informatica Knowledge Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Informatica Global Customer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii

Chapter 1: Understanding the Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Repository Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Repository Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Understanding Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Objects Created in the Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Objects Created in the Workflow Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Objects Created in the Repository Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Global Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Dependent Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Modifying Dependent Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Rules and Guidelines for Object Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Administering Repositories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Creating the Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Creating Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
PowerCenter Repository Domains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Reusing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Reusing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Version Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Chapter 2: Using the Repository Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Repository Manager Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Repository Manager Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Understanding the Repository Manager Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Displaying Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Navigator Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Dependency Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Output Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Configuring Repository Manager Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

iii
 Connecting to Domains and Repositories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Configuring a Domain Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Adding a Repository to the Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Connecting to a Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Reconnecting to a Repository and Canceling Auto-Reconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Managing Domain and Repository Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Editing a Domain Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Removing a Domain Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Exporting and Importing Repository Connection Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Removing a Repository from the Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Changing Your Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Searching for Repository Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Performing Keyword Searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Searching All Repository Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Viewing Object Dependencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Validating Multiple Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Comparing Repository Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Truncating Workflow and Session Log Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Chapter 3: Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Managing Folder Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Operating System Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Shortcuts and Shared Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Steps to Manage Folder Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Comparing Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Compared Attributes and Object Differentiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
One-Way and Two-Way Comparisons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Editing and Saving Results Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Steps to Compare Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Chapter 4: Managing Object Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Assigned Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Accessing Object Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Managing Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Maintaining the User List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Adding Users and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Removing Users and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Assigning Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Changing the Object Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Chapter 5: Local and Global Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Shortcuts Versus Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

iv Table of Contents
Understanding Shortcut Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Default Shortcut Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Describing the Object and the Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Locating the Referenced Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Creating a Local Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Creating a Global Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Working with Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Refreshing Shortcut Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Copying a Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Renaming Source Qualifiers to Shortcut Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Chapter 6: Working with Versioned Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Sample Scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Viewing Results View Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Customizing Results View Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Working with Version Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Viewing Version Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Object Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Version Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Labels Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Object Status Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Changing Object Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Changing Folder Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Tracking Changes to Versioned Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Viewing Object History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Comparing Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Checking Out and Checking In Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Checking Out Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Viewing Checked-Out Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Undoing a Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Checking In Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Checking Out and Checking In Composite Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Deleting and Recovering Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Deleting a Versioned Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Recovering a Deleted Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Purging Versions of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Purging Individual Object Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Purging Versions Based on Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Purging Composite Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Rules and Guidelines for Purging Versions of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Chapter 7: Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Table of Contents v
 Creating and Editing Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Creating a Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Editing a Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Applying Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Applying Labels to Groups of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Chapter 8: Object Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Object Queries Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Using the Query Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Configuring Query Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Query Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Validating and Saving a Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Running a Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Viewing Query Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Sample Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Finding Object Dependencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Finding Impacted Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Finding Invalid Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Finding the Used Status of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Finding Recently Deployed Versioned Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Finding Recently Checked-Out Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Finding Older Versions of Versioned Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Finding Versioned Objects Older than a Specified Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Chapter 9: Deployment Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Deployment Group Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Configuring Privileges and Permissions for a Deployment Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Adding or Removing Objects in Static Deployment Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Using Queries in Dynamic Deployment Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Viewing Deployment History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Validating the Target Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Rolling Back a Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Creating and Editing Deployment Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Creating a Deployment Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Editing a Deployment Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Viewing the Objects in a Deployment Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Chapter 10: Copying Folders and Deployment Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Copying or Replacing Running Workflows, Sessions, and Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Using the Copy Wizards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Copy Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Associated Integration Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

vi Table of Contents
 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Metadata Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Copying Plug-in Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Copying or Replacing a Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Locking and Checkouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Folder Permissions and Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Copying Within a Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Copying Folders Between Versioned and Non-Versioned Repositories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Copying from Local Repositories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Steps to Copy or Replace a Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Copying a Deployment Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Copying to Repository Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Copying Object Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Locking and Checkouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Copying Composite Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Copying Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Object Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Object Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Steps to Copy a Deployment Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Chapter 11: Exporting and Importing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Working with Objects and Object Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
The XML and DTD Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
CRCVALUE Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Exporting and Importing Multiple Objects and Object Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Working with Dependent Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Exporting and Importing Parent Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Working with Object Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Working with Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Shortcut Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Importing Shortcuts to Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Exporting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Modifying an Exported XML File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Modifiable Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Importing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Validating XML Files Against the DTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Validating Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Resolving Object Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Steps to Export Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Steps to Import Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Table of Contents vii

 Chapter 12: Exchanging Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Working with Column Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Rules and Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Working with Metadata Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Working with Star Schemas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Steps to Export Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Steps to Import Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Exchanging Metadata with Business Objects Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Metadata and Datatype Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Exporting Metadata to Business Objects Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Chapter 13: Copying Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Copy Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Resolving Copy Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Steps to Copy Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Copying Dependent Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Copying Workflow Manager Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Copying Workflows and Worklets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Copying Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Copying Workflow Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Copying Designer Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Copying Mapping and Mapplets Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Chapter 14: Metadata Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Working with Metadata Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Creating Reusable Metadata Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Editing Reusable Metadata Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Deleting Reusable Metadata Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Viewing the Repository Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
MX View Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Using PowerCenter Repository Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
SQL Definition of Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Integrating MX Views with Third-Party Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Database Definition View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
REP_DATABASE_DEFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Source Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
REP_ALL_SOURCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
REP_ALL_SOURCE_FLDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

viii Table of Contents

 REP_SRC_FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
REP_SRC_TBLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
REP_SRC_FILE_FLDS and REP_SEG_FLDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
REP_SRC_TBL_FLDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Target Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
REP_ALL_TARGETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
REP_ALL_TARGET_FLDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
REP_TARG_TBLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
REP_TARG_TBL_COLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Mapping and Mapplet Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
REP_ALL_MAPPINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
REP_ALL_MAPPLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
REP_TARG_MAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
REP_TARG_FLD_MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
REP_FLD_MAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
REP_SRC_MAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
REP_SRC_FLD_MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
REP_TBL_MAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
REP_TARG_TBL_JOINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
REP_MAPPING_CONN_PORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
REP_MAPPING_UNCONN_PORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Metadata Extension Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
REP_METADATA_EXTNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
REP_METADATA_EXTN_DEFINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Transformation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
REP_ALL_TRANSFORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
REP_WIDGET_INST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
REP_WIDGET_DEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
REP_WIDGET_ATTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
REP_WIDGET_FIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Workflow, Worklet, and Task Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
REP_WORKFLOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
REP_ALL_TASKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
REP_ALL_SCHEDULERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
REP_WFLOW_VAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
REP_EVENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
REP_TASK_INST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
REP_WORKFLOW_DEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
REP_TASK_INST_RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
REP_WFLOW_RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
REP_LOAD_SESSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
REP_SESSION_CNXS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
REP_SESSION_INSTANCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
REP_SESSION_FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
REP_SESSION_INST_FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
REP_SESS_WIDGET_CNXS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Table of Contents ix
 REP_COMPONENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
REP_SESS_PARTITION_DEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
REP_SESS_CONFIG_PARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
REP_TASK_ATTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
REP_SESS_LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
REP_SESS_TBL_LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Security Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Deployment Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
REP_DEPLOY_GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
REP_DEPLOY_GROUP_DETAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Repository View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
REP_REPOSIT_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Integration Service Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
REP_SERVER_NET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
REP_SERVER_NET_REF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Change Management Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
REP_VERSION_PROPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
REP_LABEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
REP_LABEL_REF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Folder View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
REP_SUBJECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

x Table of Contents
Preface
The PowerCenter Repository Guide is written for database administrators and developers who manage
repositories. This guide assumes you have knowledge of relational database concepts, and the database engines,
flat files, or mainframe systems in your environment. You should also be familiar with the interface
requirements of your supporting applications. For additional information on related database connectivity
issues not covered by this guide, refer to the documentation accompanying your database products.

Informatica Resources
Informatica Customer Portal
As an Informatica customer, you can access the Informatica Customer Portal site at http://my.informatica.com.
The site contains product information, user group information, newsletters, access to the Informatica customer
support case management system (ATLAS), the Informatica How-To Library, the Informatica Knowledge Base,
Informatica Documentation Center, and access to the Informatica user community.

Informatica Documentation
The Informatica Documentation team takes every effort to create accurate, usable documentation. If you have
questions, comments, or ideas about this documentation, contact the Informatica Documentation team
through email at [email protected]. We will use your feedback to improve our
documentation. Let us know if we can contact you regarding your comments.

Informatica Web Site

You can access the Informatica corporate web site at http://www.informatica.com. The site contains
information about Informatica, its background, upcoming events, and sales offices. You will also find product
and partner information. The services area of the site includes important information about technical support,
training and education, and implementation services.

Informatica How-To Library

As an Informatica customer, you can access the Informatica How-To Library at http://my.informatica.com.
The How-To Library is a collection of resources to help you learn more about Informatica products and
features. It includes articles and interactive demonstrations that provide solutions to common problems,
compare features and behaviors, and guide you through performing specific real-world tasks.

xi
 Informatica Knowledge Base
As an Informatica customer, you can access the Informatica Knowledge Base at http://my.informatica.com. Use
the Knowledge Base to search for documented solutions to known technical issues about Informatica products.
You can also find answers to frequently asked questions, technical white papers, and technical tips.

Informatica Global Customer Support

There are many ways to access Informatica Global Customer Support. You can contact a Customer Support
Center through telephone, email, or the WebSupport Service.
Use the following email addresses to contact Informatica Global Customer Support:
♦ [email protected] for technical inquiries
♦ [email protected] for general customer service requests
WebSupport requires a user name and password. You can request a user name and password at
http://my.informatica.com.
Use the following telephone numbers to contact Informatica Global Customer Support:

North America / South America Europe / Middle East / Africa Asia / Australia

Informatica Corporation Informatica Software Ltd. Informatica Business

Headquarters 6 Waltham Park Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
100 Cardinal Way Waltham Road, White Waltham Diamond District
Redwood City, California Maidenhead, Berkshire Tower B, 3rd Floor
94063 SL6 3TN 150 Airport Road
United States United Kingdom Bangalore 560 008
India

Toll Free Toll Free Toll Free

+1 877 463 2435 00 800 4632 4357 Australia: 1 800 151 830
Singapore: 001 800 4632
4357
Standard Rate Standard Rate
Brazil: +55 11 3523 7761 Belgium: +32 15 281 702 Standard Rate
Mexico: +52 55 1168 9763 France: +33 1 41 38 92 26 India: +91 80 4112 5738
United States: +1 650 385 5800 Germany: +49 1805 702 702
Netherlands: +31 306 022 797
Spain and Portugal: +34 93 480 3760
United Kingdom: +44 1628 511 445

xii Preface
CHAPTER 1

Understanding the Repository

This chapter includes the following topics:
♦ Overview, 1
♦ Repository Architecture, 2
♦ Repository Connectivity, 2
♦ Understanding Metadata, 3
♦ Modifying Dependent Objects, 6
♦ Administering Repositories, 7
♦ PowerCenter Repository Domains, 9
♦ Version Control, 10

Overview
The PowerCenter repository is a relational database managed by the Repository Service.
The repository consists of database tables that store metadata. Metadata describes different types of objects,
such as mappings and transformations, that you can create or modify using the PowerCenter Client tools. The
Integration Service uses repository objects to extract, transform, and load data. The repository also stores
information such as permissions for users.
All repository clients access the repository database tables through the Repository Service. The Repository
Service protects metadata in the repository by managing repository connections and using object-locking to
ensure object consistency. The Repository Service also notifies you when another user modifies or deletes
repository objects that you are using.
Each Repository Service manages a single repository database. You can configure a Repository Service to run on
multiple machines, or nodes, in the domain. Each instance running on a node is called a Repository Service
process. This process accesses the database tables and performs most repository-related tasks.
The Repository Service uses native drivers to communicate with the repository database. PowerCenter Client
tools and the Integration Service communicate with the Repository Service over TCP/IP. When a repository
client connects to the repository, it connects directly to the Repository Service process.
You administer the repository using the Repository Manager client tool, the PowerCenter Administration
Console, and the pmrep and infacmd command line programs.
You can connect to and manage multiple repositories. A repository domain is a group of repositories in the
PowerCenter Client. Repository domains share metadata through a special type of repository called a global

1
 repository. When you configure shared folders in a repository, you can share the objects in the folder with other
repositories in the repository domain. You share objects to reuse metadata.
Note: A repository domain is different from a PowerCenter domain, which is the primary unit of administration
for the PowerCenter environment. For more information about repository domains, see “PowerCenter
Repository Domains” on page 9. For more information about PowerCenter domains, see the PowerCenter
Administrator Guide.
If you have the team-based development option, you can enable the repository for version control. You can
store multiple versions of objects in a versioned repository. You can also perform change-management tasks
such as version comparison, change tracking, labeling, and deployment.

Repository Architecture
The PowerCenter repository resides in a relational database. The repository database tables contain the
instructions required to extract, transform, and load data. Repository clients access the repository database
tables through the Repository Service. A repository client is any PowerCenter component that connects to the
repository.
The Repository Service manages repository metadata transaction requests from repository clients. Each
Repository Service manages a single repository. The Repository Service uses object-locking to ensure the
consistency of metadata in the repository.
A Repository Service process is a multi-threaded process that fetches, inserts, and updates metadata in the
repository database tables. A Repository Service process is an instance of the Repository Service that runs on a
particular machine, or node.
The Repository Service accepts client metadata transaction requests from the following PowerCenter
components:
♦ PowerCenter Client tools. Use the Designer to create and store mapping metadata in the repository. Use
the Workflow Manager to store workflow metadata and connection object information in the repository.
Use the Workflow Monitor to retrieve workflow run status information and session logs written by the
Integration Service. Use the Repository Manager to organize and secure metadata by creating folders. You
can manage the repository from the PowerCenter Administration Console.
♦ pmrep and infacmd. Use pmrep to perform repository metadata administration tasks, such as listing
repository objects. Use infacmd to perform service-related functions, such as creating or removing a
Repository Service.
♦ Integration Service. When you start the Integration Service, it connects to the repository to schedule
workflows. When you run a workflow, the Integration Service retrieves workflow task and mapping
metadata from the repository. During the workflow run, the Integration Service writes workflow status
information to the repository.

Repository Connectivity
Repository clients such as the PowerCenter Client, the Integration Service, pmrep, and infacmd connect to the
repository through the Repository Service.
Repository clients communicate with the Repository Service through a specified port over a TCP/IP
connection. You configure the TCP/IP port number when you install the Repository Service.
Because PowerCenter services can reside on multiple nodes in the domain, the Repository Service relies on
another service called the Service Manager to direct client requests to the appropriate Repository Service
process.

2 Chapter 1: Understanding the Repository

 The following figure shows a request process when you use a repository client, such as the Repository Manager
or the Integration Service, to update the repository database.

1
Repository Client
Node A Node B (Gateway)

Service Manager Service Manager

Application Services Application Services

Repository Service
3

Repository
4 Database

The following process describes how a repository client connects to the repository database:
1. The repository client sends a repository connection request to the master gateway node, which is the entry
point to the domain. This is node B in the diagram.
2. The Service Manager sends back the host name and port number of the node running the Repository
Service. In the diagram, the Repository Service is running on node A. If you have the high availability
option, you can configure the Repository Service to run on a backup node.
3. The repository client establishes a link with the Repository Service process on node A. This
communication occurs over TCP/IP.
4. The Repository Service process communicates with the repository database and performs repository
metadata transactions for the client.

Understanding Metadata
The repository stores metadata that describes how to extract, transform, and load source and target data.
PowerCenter metadata describes different kinds of repository objects. You use different PowerCenter Client
tools to develop each kind of object.
If you enable version control, you can store multiple versions of metadata objects in the repository.
You can also extend the metadata stored in the repository by associating information with repository objects.
For example, when someone in your organization creates a source definition, you may want to store the name of
that person with the source definition. You associate information with repository metadata using metadata
extensions.

RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “Version Control” on page 10

♦ “Metadata Extensions” on page 145

Understanding Metadata 3
 Objects Created in the Designer
Use the Designer to create and edit the following repository objects:
♦ Source definitions. Detailed descriptions of database objects (tables, views, and synonyms), flat files, XML
files, or COBOL files that provide source data. For example, a source definition might be the complete
structure of the EMPLOYEES table, including the table name, column names and datatypes, and any
constraints applied to these columns, such as NOT NULL or PRIMARY KEY. Use the Source Analyzer tool
to import and create source definitions.
♦ Target definitions. Detailed descriptions for database objects, flat files, or XML files to receive transformed
data. During a session, the Integration Service writes the transformed data to targets. Use the Target
Designer tool to import or create target definitions.
♦ Transformations. A transformation generates, modifies, or passes data through ports that you connect in a
mapping or mapplet. When you build a mapping or mapplet, you add transformations and configure them
to handle data according to your business purpose.
♦ Reusable transformations. You can design a transformation that you can reuse in multiple mappings or
mapplets within a folder, a repository, or a repository domain. Rather than recreate the same transformation
each time, you can make the transformation reusable and add instances of the transformation to individual
mappings or mapplets. Use the Transformation Developer tool to create reusable transformations.
♦ Mappings. A mapping specifies how to move and transform data from sources to targets. Mappings include
source and target definitions and transformations. Transformations describe how the Integration Service
transforms data. Mappings can also include shortcuts, reusable transformations, and mapplets. Use the
Mapping Designer tool to create mappings.
♦ Mapplets. You can design a mapplet to contain sets of transformation logic to be reused in multiple
mappings within a folder, a repository, or a repository domain. Rather than recreate the same set of
transformations each time, you can create a mapplet containing the transformations and then add instances
of the mapplet to individual mappings. Use the Mapplet Designer tool to create mapplets.
♦ User-defined functions. You can create user-defined functions using the PowerCenter transformation
language. Create user-defined functions to reuse expression logic and build complex expressions. User-
defined functions are available to other users in a repository.
♦ Multi-dimensional metadata. Multi-dimensional metadata refers to the logical organization of data used for
analysis in OLAP applications. Dimensions and cubes are most often used by end users of OLAP
applications. Use the Target Designer tool to create dimensions and cubes.
You can also create shortcuts to metadata in shared folders. Use shortcuts to repository objects in shared folders.
You can create local shortcuts to shared folders within the same repository and global shortcuts to shared folders
in the global repository of the repository domain. Use the Designer to create shortcuts.

Objects Created in the Workflow Manager

Use the Workflow Manager to create and edit the following repository objects:
♦ Database connections. The Integration Service uses database connections to connect to the source and
target databases.
♦ Sessions. Sessions are workflow tasks that contain information about how the Integration Service moves
data through mappings. You create a session for each mapping you want to run. To run the session, place it
in a workflow. Use the Workflow Designer to create sessions.
♦ Workflows. A workflow is a set of instructions, divided into tasks, the Integration Service uses to extract,
transform, and load data.
♦ Workflow tasks. Workflow tasks are instructions the Integration Service executes when running a workflow.
Workflow tasks perform functions supplementary to extracting, transforming, and loading data. Workflow
tasks include commands, decisions, timers, and email notification.
♦ Worklets. Worklets are objects that represent a set of workflow tasks that allow you to reuse a set of
workflow logic in several workflows. You can run worklets in workflows and nest worklets in other worklets.

4 Chapter 1: Understanding the Repository

Objects Created in the Repository Manager
Use the Repository Manager to create, edit, and delete folders. Folders organize and store metadata in the
repository. You can control access to a folder by configuring folder permissions. You can also configure a folder
to share stored metadata with other users.

Global Objects
When you edit a global object, the Repository Service applies the changes at the repository level. You use
different PowerCenter Client tools to develop each kind of global object. You can create the following global
objects:
♦ Labels. You can associate labels with any versioned object or group of versioned objects in a repository. Use
labels to track versioned objects during development, mark development milestones, improve query results,
and organize groups of objects for deployment or import and export. Use the Repository Manager to create
and edit labels.
♦ Deployment groups. A deployment group is a set of objects that you copy to a repository. You can create a
deployment group that contains references to objects from multiple folders across the repository. You can
create a static deployment group that you manually add objects to or create a dynamic deployment group
that uses a query to populate the group. Use the Repository Manager to create and edit deployment groups.
♦ Object queries. Use an object query to search for versioned and non-versioned objects in the repository that
meet specified conditions. You can save object queries for later use. You can create a private object query, or
you can share it with all users in the repository. Use the Designer, Workflow Manager, or Repository
Manager to create and run an object query.
♦ Connection objects. You create connection objects in the repository when you define database, FTP, and
external loader connections in the Workflow Manager. You can configure and manage permissions within
each connection object. Use the Workflow Manager to create and edit connection objects.
Labels, deployment groups, and object queries help you perform version control by grouping versioned objects.

RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “Version Control” on page 10

Dependent Objects
A dependent object is an object used by another object. For example, a source definition referenced by a
mapping is a dependent object of that mapping. You can perform the following tasks on dependent objects:
♦ Copy. You can copy dependent objects with the Copy Wizard in the Workflow Manager, Designer, and
Repository Manager. When you copy an object, the Copy Wizard also copies all dependent objects. For
more information about copying dependent objects, see “Copying Dependent Objects” on page 141.
♦ Deploy. You can add dependent objects to a static deployment group. You use a deployment group to copy
objects to another folder or repository. For more information about deploying dependent objects to a
deployment group, see “Deleting and Recovering Objects” on page 64.
♦ View. You can view dependent objects before modifying or deleting parent objects in the Repository
Manager, Designer, and Workflow Manager. For more information about viewing dependent objects, see
“Viewing Object Dependencies” on page 24.
♦ Modify or validate. When you modify a dependent object, you may cause the parent object to become
invalid. For example, if you modify a mapping by updating a port datatype to an incompatible dataype, the
session may become invalid. For more information about modifying dependent objects, see “Modifying
Dependent Objects” on page 6.
♦ Import or export. You can choose to import or export a parent object with or without its dependent child
objects. You might want to export and import an object without its dependent objects if you change a
workflow property, such as a workflow variable, but you did not change any task in the workflow. For more
information about importing and exporting dependent objects, see “Working with Dependent Objects” on
page 115.

Understanding Metadata 5
Modifying Dependent Objects
When you modify a child object, you may cause a parent object to become invalid. For example, if you modify
a mapping by changing a port datatype to an incompatible datatype, the session may become invalid.
A repository object can have a valid, invalid, or impacted state. The Repository Service assigns valid and invalid
states when you save an object or when you validate an object. The Repository Service assigns an impacted state
when it fetches a parent object of a child object modified in a way that may cause invalidation. The impacted
state is an indeterminate state that is resolved when you validate or save an object.
When you modify repository objects, the Repository Service assigns one of three states to the modified object
and dependent parent object.
The following table describes the object validation states:

Object State Assigned Running the Workflow

Valid When you save or validate an object. The object is valid, and workflows run. You do
not need to modify the state.

Invalid When you save or validate an object. The object is invalid, and workflows will not
run. Use the message displayed by the
PowerCenter Client to determine the cause of
the invalidation. Modify and validate the
object again.

Impacted If you modify a child object in such a way The object is impacted, and you can perform
that it may cause the parent object to validation or configure the Integration Service
become invalid, the Repository Service to run the impacted session.
marks parent objects as impacted. The
Repository Service marks the object as
impacted when it fetches the parent
object.

The Repository Service marks dependent objects and shortcuts to parent objects in other folders with warnings
to denote the impacted status. A question mark icon denotes impacted status in the Navigator. The Repository
Service marks the most immediate parent object as impacted, but it does not mark all related objects as
impacted. For example, if you modify a mapping, the Repository Service marks the session as impacted, but it
does not mark the workflow as impacted.
The following figure shows invalid and impacted objects:

Invalid Object

Impacted Object

You can validate impacted sessions, or you can choose to ignore the warning and run the session. To ignore the
warning, you must configure the Integration Service to run impacted sessions. At run time, the Integration
Service validates the session and determines if the session is valid or invalid. The Integration Service will not
run an impacted session if it detects that the session is invalid.

6 Chapter 1: Understanding the Repository

 Example
For example, a mapping in Folder A contains a shortcut to an Expression transformation in Folder B. In Folder
B, you update the Expression transformation in a way that causes invalidation. The Repository Service marks
the parent mappings in Folder B that use the Expression transformation. The Repository Service also marks the
mappings in Folder A that use the shortcut to the Expression transformation with a warning. When you run a
session that uses the impacted mappings, the Integration Service validates the mappings. If the mappings are
valid, the Integration Service runs the session. If the mappings are invalid, the Integration Service marks the
session as invalid and it does not run the session.

Rules and Guidelines for Object Compatibility

The Repository Service treats modified dependent objects as compatible when you perform the following tasks:
♦ Change datatypes in a source, target, or transformation to a compatible datatype. The Repository Service
marks objects as impacted only when you change the datatypes to incompatible datatypes.
♦ Rename ports in a reusable transformation.
♦ Add a port in a source, target, or transformation.
♦ Replace objects such as sources, targets, mapplets, and mappings with compatible objects.
When you replace a repository object with another object, the following conditions must be true for the
Repository Service to treat the objects as compatible:

Repository Object Compatibility Requirements

Source, Target, Transformation - Name of the replacement object must match the original object.
- All port names in the original object must be represented in the
replacement object.
- Datatypes must be compatible.

Mapping Name and number of the following objects must match the original object:
- Targets
- Mapplets
- Sources
- Source Qualifiers
- Joiner transformations
- Update Strategy transformations
- Custom transformations

Mapplet Name and number of the following objects must match the original object:
- Sources
- Source Qualifiers
- Joiner transformations
- Update Strategy transformations
- Custom transformations

Administering Repositories
Use the PowerCenter Administration Console and the pmrep and infacmd command line programs to
administer repositories. Use the Repository Manager and the pmrep command line program to manage folders
and to manage permissions for folders and global objects.
The Repository Service creates and updates the repository tables. These tables store metadata that the
Integration Service and the PowerCenter Client use.
Warning: The PowerCenter repository tables have an open architecture. Although you can view the repository
tables, never manually edit them through other utilities. Informatica is not responsible for corrupted data that is
caused by customer alteration of the repository tables or data within those tables.

Administering Repositories 7
 Use the PowerCenter Administration Console to configure security and to copy, back up, delete, and restore
repository content. You can back up the repository to a binary file. You can restore the entire repository from a
binary file. You can also copy all the repository tables from another database.

Creating the Repository

Before you create a repository, you need a database for the repository tables. You use the database management
system client to create the database. The repository database name must be unique.
After you create a database for the repository, you can use the Administration Console to create a Repository
Service to manage the repository. When you create the Repository Service, you can create the database tables for
the repository. Alternatively, you can create the Repository Service without creating any database tables. You
can create the repository tables later or use existing database tables for the repository. The repository name is
the same as the name of the Repository Service.

Creating Folders
After you create the repository, you can add folders to it in the Repository Manager. Use folders to organize
repository objects. You can separate different types of metadata and projects into easily identifiable areas. You
can configure a folder to be shared so that its content is available to all other folders in the same repository. If
you plan to use the same object in several projects, store it in a shared folder.
For example, you use a shared folder to store a definition of the CUSTOMERS table, which provides data for a
variety of projects. You make shortcuts to the table in other folders in the same repository. If you are working in
a repository domain, you can also make shortcuts to the CUSTOMER table in folders in local repositories that
are registered with the repository domain.

RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “PowerCenter Repository Domains” on page 9

♦ “Steps to Manage Folder Properties” on page 34

Security
You manage users, groups, privileges, and roles on the Security page of the Administration Console. The
Service Manager stores users and groups in the domain configuration database and copies the list of users and
groups to the PowerCenter repository. The Service Manager periodically synchronizes the list of users and
groups in the repository with the users and groups in the domain configuration database.
When you assign privileges and roles to users and groups for the Repository Service in the Administration
Console or when you assign permissions to users and groups in the PowerCenter Client, the Repository Service
stores the privilege, role, and permission assignments with the list of users and groups in the repository.
You manage permissions for repository objects in the PowerCenter Client. Permissions control access to folders
and objects in the repository. Even if a user has the privilege to perform certain actions, the user may also
require permission to perform the action on a particular object. If the Integration Service uses operating system
profiles, the user that runs the workflow must have permission on the operating system profile that is assigned
to the workflow or folder that contains the workflow.
To secure data in the repository, you can create folders in the Repository Manager and assign permissions to
them. When you create a folder, you are the owner of the folder by default. The owner has all permissions,
which you cannot change. The owner can assign permissions to users, groups, operating system profiles, and
others in the repository. If the Integration Service uses operating system profiles, an operating system profile
must be assigned to the folder to run workflows.

RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “Managing Object Permissions” on page 39

8 Chapter 1: Understanding the Repository

PowerCenter Repository Domains
You can organize, simplify, and manage the process of developing and maintaining multiple data warehouses
and other integration projects by using a repository domain. You connect repositories within the repository
domain.
A repository domain consists of a single global repository and any number of local repositories. The global
repository is used for storing and reusing shared metadata.
You can save any metadata that you plan to share across repositories in the global repository. Local repositories
can then use shortcuts to objects in the global repository shared folders, or you can create copies of objects in
unshared folders. You can also copy objects in shared folders.
You can share data and metadata between global and local repositories by copying individual repository objects
and entire folders within and between repositories. You can also use the Designer to create shortcuts to
reference objects in other repositories.

Reusing Metadata
In a repository domain, you frequently need to share metadata across repositories. PowerCenter provides a
mechanism for sharing metadata among multiple repositories.
Sharing metadata can help you save time and reduce work by reusing metadata. It also helps enforce standards
for the design of transformations at the enterprise level. For example, a sales division develops a standard
calculation for the profitability of each product. This calculation is complex. It is based on variables such as
production costs and marketing expenses. Because profitability is important information when investing in
product development and building a sales strategy, you need everyone in the organization to use the same
calculation. If you share the profitability calculation, you ensure that everyone views the value of each product
the same way.
When you develop the component of a mapping that performs this calculation, you might want to reuse it in
other mappings, even in other repositories. The profitability calculation might appear in several mappings in
the sales division repository. The production, marketing, and accounting divisions might also need to use the
same calculation in mappings in their repositories.

Shared Folders
You can configure folders in global and local repositories to be shared. After you designate a folder as shared,
you can create shortcuts to objects in that folder. Use shortcuts in any other folder in the repository. If the
shared folder is in a global repository, use shortcuts to that folder in any repository in the repository domain.
If a folder is not shared, you cannot create shortcuts to objects in the folder. However, you can still create copies
of objects in non-shared folders.
Shared folders are useful when you want to use the same repository objects in several projects within the same
repository. For example, each folder within a repository might represent a different development project.
However, every project in the repository needs to store bug reports in a consistent format, so you might put the
source definition for the BUG_REPORTS table in a shared folder.

Reusing Data
The need to share data is just as important as the need to share metadata. Often, several departments in the
same organization need the same information. For example, each department may need to read the same
product data from operational sources, perform the same profitability calculations, and format this information
to make it easy to review.
If each department reads, transforms, and writes this product data separately, the throughput for the entire
organization is lower than it could be. A more efficient approach is to read, transform, and write the data to one
central data store shared by all users.

PowerCenter Repository Domains 9

 A central data store improves throughput at the level of the entire enterprise. To improve performance further,
you might want to capture incremental changes to sources. For example, rather than reading all the product
data each time you update the central data store, you can improve performance by capturing the inserts, deletes,
and updates that have occurred in the PRODUCTS table since the last time you updated the central data store.
You can format data in a standard fashion with the central data store. For example, you can filter employee data
that should remain confidential. You can also display date and time values in a standard format. You can
perform these and other data cleansing tasks when you move data into the central data store instead of
performing them repeatedly.

Version Control
If you have the team-based development option, you can enable version control for the repository. A versioned
repository stores multiple versions of an object. Each version is a separate object with unique properties.
PowerCenter version control features allow you to efficiently develop, test, and deploy metadata into
production.
During development, you can perform the following change management tasks to create and manage multiple
versions of objects in the repository:
♦ Check out and check in versioned objects. You can check out and reserve an object you want to edit, and
check in the object when you are ready to create a new version of the object in the repository.
♦ Compare objects. The Repository Manager, Workflow Manager, and Designer allow you to compare two
repository objects of the same type to identify differences between them. The PowerCenter Client tools
allow you to compare objects across open folders and repositories. You can also compare different versions of
the same object.
♦ Track changes to an object. You can view an object history that includes all versions of the object. You can
also compare any version of the object in the history to any other version. You can see the changes made to
an object over time.
♦ Delete or purge a version. You can delete an object so that it no long appears in the PowerCenter Client.
However, you continue to store deleted objects in the repository. If you decide later that you need a deleted
object, you can recover it from the repository. When you purge an object version, you permanently remove
it from the repository.
♦ Use global objects such as queries, deployment groups, and labels to group versioned objects. Object
queries, deployment groups, and labels are global objects that exist at the repository level. When you group
versioned objects, you can associate multiple objects into logical categories. For example, you can create a
deployment group that contains references to objects from multiple folders across the repository.

RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “Working with Versioned Objects” on page 55

10 Chapter 1: Understanding the Repository

CHAPTER 2

Using the Repository Manager

This chapter includes the following topics:
♦ Overview, 11
♦ Understanding the Repository Manager Windows, 12
♦ Configuring Repository Manager Options, 17
♦ Connecting to Domains and Repositories, 18
♦ Managing Domain and Repository Connections, 21
♦ Changing Your Password, 22
♦ Searching for Repository Objects, 23
♦ Viewing Object Dependencies, 24
♦ Validating Multiple Objects, 28
♦ Comparing Repository Objects, 29
♦ Truncating Workflow and Session Log Entries, 31

Overview
You can navigate through multiple folders and repositories and perform basic repository tasks with the
Repository Manager. Menu items in the Repository Manager are enabled or disabled according to the privileges
and permissions you have.

Repository Manager Windows

The Repository Manager can display four main windows: the Navigator window, the Main window, the
Dependency window, and the Output window. You can dock and undock the Navigator, Dependency, and
Output windows. You can also hide and display the Navigator, Dependency, and Output windows.
In the Navigator window, you can connect to a repository, navigate through the folders, and browse repository
objects. The Navigator window organizes the repository objects of the same type in each folder in groups called
nodes. When you select an object in a node, you can view details for the object in the Main window.
If you configure the Repository Manager to display object dependencies, the Dependency window displays the
dependency details when you select an object in the Navigator window. You can view dependency information
for sources, targets, mappings, and shortcuts.
The Output window displays detailed information for complex repository operations, such as copying folders.
The Output window also displays Repository Service notification messages.

11
 Note: Because the status of the repository changes as users access it, refresh the view of the repository before
performing tasks, such as deleting a folder or unlocking an object.

Repository Manager Tasks

Use the Repository Manager to complete the following tasks:
♦ Add domain connection information. You can configure domain connection information. For more
information, see “Configuring a Domain Connection” on page 18.
♦ Add and connect to a repository. You can add repositories to the Navigator window and client registry and
then connect to the repositories. For more information, see “Connecting to a Repository” on page 20.
♦ Work with PowerCenter domain and repository connections. You can edit or remove domain connection
information. You can connect to one repository or multiple repositories. You can export repository
connection information from the client registry to a file. You can import the file on a different machine and
add the repository connection information to the client registry. For more information, see “Managing
Domain and Repository Connections” on page 21.
♦ Change your password. You can change the password for your user account. For more information, see
“Changing Your Password” on page 22.
♦ Search for repository objects or keywords. You can search for repository objects containing specified text. If
you add keywords to target definitions, use a keyword to search for a target definition. For more
information, see “Searching for Repository Objects” on page 23.
♦ View object dependencies. Before you remove or change an object, you can view dependencies to see the
impact on other objects. For more information, see “Viewing Object Dependencies” on page 24.
♦ Compare repository objects. In the Repository Manager, you can compare two repository objects of the
same type to identify differences between the objects. For more information, see “Comparing Repository
Objects” on page 29.
♦ Truncate session and workflow log entries. You can truncate the list of session and workflow logs that the
Integration Service writes to the repository. You can truncate all logs, or truncate all logs older than a
specified date. For more information, see “Truncating Workflow and Session Log Entries” on page 31.
♦ Exchange metadata with other business intelligence tools. You can export metadata to and import
metadata from other business intelligence tools, such as Cognos ReportNet Framework Manager. For more
information, see “Exchanging Metadata” on page 129.

Understanding the Repository Manager Windows

The Repository Manager has a main window and a status bar for information about the operation you are
performing. The Repository Manager can display the following windows:
♦ Navigator
♦ Main
♦ Dependency
♦ Output

12 Chapter 2: Using the Repository Manager

 The following figure shows the Repository Manager components:

Navigator
Window

Dependency
Window

Output
Window

Status Bar

Main Window

When the Repository Manager accesses the repository, the status bar reflects the connection in progress with a
progress indicator.

Displaying Windows
You can dock and undock the following windows in the Repository Manager:
♦ Navigator
♦ Dependency
♦ Output

To dock or undock a window:

X Double-click the title bar.

-or-
Drag the title bar toward the Main window.
The windows that the Repository Manager displays depend on the tasks you perform. When you launch the
Repository Manager, the Navigator and the Main windows appear. The Dependency window appears when you
want to view dependencies, and the Output window appears when the Repository Manager displays status
messages. You can configure the Repository Manager to display or hide any window.

To display a window:

1. Double-click the title bar.

2. From the menu, choose View. Then select the window you want to open.

To close a window:

X Click the small x in the upper-right corner of the window.

Understanding the Repository Manager Windows 13

 Navigator Window
Use the Navigator window to connect to a repository and navigate through the folders and objects in the
repository. The Navigator window displays the following types of objects:
♦ Repositories. PowerCenter repositories can be standalone, local, or global.
♦ Deployment groups. Deployment groups contain collections of objects for deployment to another
repository in the repository domain.
♦ Folders. Folders can be shared or not shared.
♦ Nodes. Nodes contain sessions, sources, targets, transformations, mapplets, workflows, tasks, worklets, and
mappings.
♦ Repository objects. Repository objects displayed in the Navigator can include sources, targets,
transformations, mappings, mapplets, sessions, tasks, workflows, worklets, workflow logs, and session logs.
The following figure shows the Navigator components:

Repositories

Deployment
Groups

Shared Folder

Node for
Sources

Mappings

Workflows
Node for Session
Configurations

Viewing Properties
You can view object properties in the navigator. You can also view license and repository version information.

To view object properties:

1. Connect to a repository.
2. Click on an object in the Navigator.
3. Click the Properties button in the toolbar.
-or-
Right-click the object in the Navigator and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
4. If the object is a repository, click the General tab to view repository version and license information.
Note: If you enable versioning when you create the repository, you can view all tabs on the Properties dialog
box.

14 Chapter 2: Using the Repository Manager

 RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “Viewing Version Properties” on page 59

Main Window
The Main window of the Repository Manager displays information about the object selected in the Navigator.
For example, if you select a repository in the Navigator, the Main window displays all the folders in the
repository along with additional folder information, such as whether the folder is shared or in use.

Sorting and Organizing

You can sort items in the Main window by each of the columns. For example, to sort mappings by validity,
select the mappings node, and then click the Valid column heading. Click the heading again to reverse the
order in which the mappings are sorted.
You can also change the order in which the columns appear. For example, you might want the Valid column to
appear first, on the left side of the Main window. To do this, drag the Valid column heading to the location.
The Repository Manager displays the columns in the new order until you change the display.
Note: You can double-click an object in the Main window to view its properties.

Viewing Object Details

To view information about repository objects, select a node in the Navigator. Or, to view detailed information
about a particular repository object, drill down on a node and select the object.
The following table describes the object details displayed in the Main window:

Node Information Displayed

Repository Node Displays properties for each folder in the selected repository.

Deployment Displays properties for each deployment group in the selected repository. Select a static
Groups Node deployment group to view details for deployment group objects.

Sources Node Displays the properties for each source within the selected node. Select a source
definition to view details for each port in the selected source definition.

Targets Node Displays the properties for each target within the selected node. Select a target
definition to view details for each target definition port.

Transformations Displays the properties for each reusable transformation in the selected node. Select a
Node transformation to view details for the specified transformation ports.

Mapplets Node Displays the properties for each mapplet in the selected node. Select a mapplet to view
the Transformations node containing the mapplet.

Mappings Node Displays the properties for each mapping in the node. Select a mapping to view
Sources, Targets, and Transformations nodes that contain the sources, targets, and
transformations used in the mapping. Select a target in a mapping to view details for
each port in the selected target definition.

Tasks Node Displays properties for each task in the selected node. Select a task to view the task
details.

Sessions Node Displays properties for each session in the folder. Select a session to view Session
Logs, Source Connections, and Target Connections nodes for the selected session. The
Main window also displays information about pre- and post-session email and
commands.

Worklets Node Displays properties for each worklet in the folder. Select a worklet to view the nodes for
sessions, tasks, and other objects associated with the worklet.

Workflows Node Displays properties for each workflow in the folder. Select a workflow to view
information for tasks and objects associated with the selected workflow.

Workflow Logs Displays workflow log information for the selected workflow. The Workflow Logs node
Node appears under each workflow in the Workflows node.

Understanding the Repository Manager Windows 15

 Node Information Displayed

Session Logs Node Displays session log information for the selected session. The Session Logs node
appears under each session in the Sessions node.

Source Displays connection properties for each source connection associated with the session.
Connections Node The Source Connections node appears under each session in the Sessions node and
under each session associated with a workflow under the Workflows node.

Source File Displays properties for each source file associated with the session. The Source File
Connections Node Connections node appears under each session in the Sessions node and under each
session associated with a workflow under the Workflows node.

Target Displays connection properties for each target connection associated with the session.
Connections Node The Target Connections node appears under each session in the Sessions node and
under each session associated with a workflow under the Workflows node.

Target File Displays properties for each target file associated with the session. The Target File
Connections Node Connections node appears under each session in the Sessions node and under each
session associated with a workflow under the Workflows node.

Transformation Displays log details for each transformation in the session when you select the
Logs Node Transformation Logs node.

Dependency Window
The Dependency window appears when you configure the Repository Manager to display dependencies. You
can view dependencies by using the menu items or the dependency buttons on the toolbar. You can also view
dependencies using the Dependency dialog box.
When you view dependencies, the left pane of the Dependency window lists the object that has dependency
information, and the dependency information appears in the right pane.
The following figure shows the Dependency window:

Selected Object Dependencies

The Dependency window can display the following types of dependencies:

♦ Source-target dependencies. When you view source-target dependencies, the Dependency window lists all
sources or targets related to the selected object, including relevant information about those sources or
targets. For example, if you select a target, you view all sources that provide data for that target, along with
information about each source.
♦ Mapping dependencies. When you view mapping dependencies, the Dependency window lists all mappings
containing the selected object, and relevant information about those mappings. For example, if you select a
reusable transformation, you view all mappings using that transformation and information about each
mapping.
♦ Shortcut dependencies. When you view shortcut dependencies, the Dependency window lists all shortcuts
to the selected object and relevant details, such as the repository and folder in which the shortcut exists.
When you edit an object referenced by shortcuts, use the Repository Manager to see which folders contain
the shortcut.
When you open the Dependency window, it displays dependencies for the object selected in the Navigator.
You can also view mapping object dependencies in the Designer. You can view dependencies for sources,
targets, transformations, mappings, mapplets, and shortcuts in the Designer.

16 Chapter 2: Using the Repository Manager

 RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “Viewing Object Dependencies” on page 24

Output Window
The Repository Manager displays status messages in the status bar. For complex operations, the Repository
Manager displays detailed information in the Output window.
For example, when you connect to a repository, the status bar displays the following message:
Accessing the repository...

After you connect to the repository, the status bar displays the word Ready.
When you perform a complex operation, such as copying a folder, the Repository Manager displays details
about the operation in the Output window.
The following figure shows the Output window:

The Repository Manager receives notifications when folders are created, modified, or deleted. You must be
connected to the repository to receive notifications about folders.
You can change the font type and size displayed in the output window by right-clicking the window and
selecting Change Font.

Configuring Repository Manager Options

Use the Options dialog box of the Repository Manager to configure general options. Click Tools > Options to
access the general options, which relate to saving Metadata Exchange (MX) data and adding to deployment
groups.
The following table describes the general options:

Option Description

Prompt User While Displays the Dependency for Deployment Group dialog box when you add
Adding to Deployment objects to a static deployment group. If you clear this check box, the Repository
Group Manager adds all child objects when you add an object to a static deployment
group. For more information about adding to static deployment groups, see
“Adding or Removing Objects in Static Deployment Groups” on page 88.

Save All MX Data Saves all MX data when you use the Repository Manager to import mappings.
You can then access the data in MX views to analyze repository metadata or to
integrate with third-party repository tools. Default is disabled. For more
information about MX views, see “Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views” on
page 149.

Save Only Source/Target Saves only the MX data related to source/target dependencies when you use the
Dependencies Repository Manager to import mappings. Select this option if you use the
Repository Manager to view source/target dependencies, but you do not need to
view expressions of fields in MX views. Default is disabled.

Note: Saving MX data can impact performance. Select this option only if you intend to use MX views.

Configuring Repository Manager Options 17

 You can also configure the Designer to save MX data when you save mappings in the Designer. The MX data
option in the Repository Manager controls the behavior of mapping imports in the Repository Manager only. It
does not affect the behavior of the Designer.
When you save MX data for mappings, PowerCenter creates a field expression for each target field in the
mappings. The field expression describes the source definition and transformation expression corresponding to
the target field. In addition to viewing the MX data in MX views, you can view the field expressions in the
Main window of the Repository Manager when you analyze source-target dependencies.

Connecting to Domains and Repositories

Each repository belongs to a PowerCenter domain. You connect to a repository through the domain. Before
you can initially connect to a repository, you must provide connection information for the domain. You also
need to add the repository to the Navigator in the PowerCenter Client.
Complete one the following tasks before initially connecting to a repository:
♦ Configure the domain connection information first, and then add a repository. For more information, see
“Configuring a Domain Connection” on page 18.
-or-
♦ Add a repository to the Navigator, and then configure the domain connection information when you
connect to the repository. For more information, see “Adding a Repository to the Navigator” on page 19.
Configure the domain connection information first if you need to add multiple repositories to the Navigator.
After you create a domain connection, you may need to update or remove it. For information about updating
domain connections, see “Editing a Domain Connection” on page 21. For information about deleting domain
connections, see “Removing a Domain Connection” on page 21.
You manage PowerCenter domains and repositories in the PowerCenter Administration Console.

Configuring a Domain Connection

You add domain connection information to the PowerCenter Client so that you can connect to repositories in
the domain. After you add a domain connection, you can select from a list of associated repositories to add to
the Navigator.
Note: You can also enter domain connection information when you connect to a repository.

18 Chapter 2: Using the Repository Manager

 To configure a domain connection and add repositories to the Navigator:

1. In a PowerCenter Client tool, select the Repositories node in the Navigator.

2. Click Repository > Configure Domains to open the Configure Domains dialog box.

Add a
domain.
Remove a
domain.
Edit domain
connection
information.

3. Click the Add button.

The Add Domain dialog box appears.
4. Enter the domain name, gateway host name, and gateway port number.
Note: Use the gateway HTTP port number to connect to the domain from the PowerCenter Client. You
cannot connect to the domain using the HTTPS port number.
5. Click OK to add the domain connection.
After you add a domain connection, you can add repositories to the Navigator by selecting them in the list
of associated repositories.
Note: The list of associated repositories might change if a user adds or deletes a Repository Service in the
Administration Console while you are working in the PowerCenter Client. You refresh the list of associated
repositories each time you click a domain other than the currently selected domain in the left panel. Click
Refresh to update the list of associated repositories for the currently selected domain.
6. If you need to add repositories to the Navigator, complete the following steps:
♦ Click a domain name in the left panel of the Configure Domains dialog box.
♦ In the right panel, select the repositories to add to the Navigator.
♦ Click OK.

RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “Connecting to a Repository” on page 20

Adding a Repository to the Navigator

Add a repository when a repository exists but does not appear in the Navigator. You can add a repository in the
Repository Manager, the Designer, the Workflow Manager, or the Workflow Monitor. After you add a
repository in one of the PowerCenter Client tools, it appears in the Navigator window of all the tools.

To add a repository to the Navigator:

1. In any of the PowerCenter Client tools, click Repository > Add.

2. Enter the name of the repository and a valid user name.
3. Click OK.

Connecting to Domains and Repositories 19

 The repository appears in the Navigator of the PowerCenter Client tools. Before you can connect to the
repository for the first time, you must configure the connection information for the domain that the
repository belongs to.

Connecting to a Repository
Before you can connect to a repository, you must first add the repository to the Navigator.

To connect to a repository:

1. Launch a PowerCenter Client tool.

2. Select the repository in the Navigator and click Repository > Connect, or double-click the repository.
The Connect to Repository dialog box appears.
3. Enter the user name and password.
4. Select Native or the name of a specific security domain.
The Security Domain field appears when the PowerCenter domain contains an LDAP security domain. If
you do not know the security domain that your user account belongs to, contact the PowerCenter domain
administrator.
5. To connect to a repository that you have connected to before, go to step 12.
To select an existing domain connection for the repository, go to step 10.
To enter the domain connection information for the repository, complete steps 6 through 9.
6. If the Connect to Repository dialog box is not expanded, click More to view the connection settings.
7. Click Add.
The Add Domain dialog box appears.
8. Enter the domain name, gateway host name, and gateway port number.
Note: Use the gateway HTTP port number to connect to the domain from the PowerCenter Client. You
cannot connect to the domain using the HTTPS port number.
9. Click OK.
10. If the connection settings of the Connect to Repository dialog box are hidden, click More to view the
connection settings.
11. In the connection settings, select the appropriate domain connection from the list.
12. Click Connect.

Reconnecting to a Repository and Canceling Auto-Reconnect

After you connect to a repository, the PowerCenter Client can maintain the connection when a temporary
network or hardware failure occurs. The ability to maintain the connection is called resilience.
If you perform a PowerCenter Client action that requires a connection to the repository while the PowerCenter
Client is trying to reestablish the connection, the PowerCenter Client prompts you to try the operation again
after it reestablishes the connection. If the PowerCenter Client is unable to reestablish the connection during
the resilience timeout period, the PowerCenter Client prompts you to reconnect to the repository manually.
The PowerCenter Client resilience timeout controls how long the client attempts to reconnect to the repository
after the connection is interrupted. The PowerCenter Client resilience timeout is 180 seconds and is not
configurable.
In the Designer, Workflow Manager, and Repository Manager, you can temporarily disable PowerCenter
Client resilience to prevent the client from attempting to reestablish a repository connection during the
resilience timeout period. If you do not want to wait for the resilience timeout to expire, cancel the automatic
reconnection. Then, you need to manually connect to the repository again.

20 Chapter 2: Using the Repository Manager

 After the resilience timeout expires or you cancel the automatic reconnection, you must reconnect to the
repository to save changes that you made before the repository connection failed.

To cancel automatic reconnection:

1. Verify that the PowerCenter Client is attempting to reestablish the repository connection.
Execute an operation that requires a repository connection. If the resilience timeout has not expired, the
PowerCenter Client prompts you to retry the operation after the connection is reestablished.
2. Click Repository > Cancel Auto-Reconnect.
The PowerCenter Client stops attempting to reconnect. To perform actions that require a repository
connection, you must manually connect to the repository.

Managing Domain and Repository Connections

You may need to modify or remove domain connection information that is outdated. Similarly, you may need
to manage connections to individual repositories. You can connect to multiple repositories at one time. You can
perform the following tasks to manage domain and repository connections:
♦ Edit domain connection information.
♦ Remove domain connection information.
♦ Export and import repository connection information.
♦ Remove a repository from the Navigator.

Editing a Domain Connection

Edit domain connection information when you need to change a gateway host name or gateway port number
for a domain connection.

To edit a domain connection:

1. Click Repository > Configure Domains.

2. In the Configure Domains dialog box, select a domain and click the Edit button.
The Edit Domain dialog box appears.
3. Enter a new gateway host name and gateway port number, if necessary.
4. Click OK.
Note: You can also edit a domain connection when you connect to a repository.

Removing a Domain Connection

You can remove a domain connection from the PowerCenter Client.

To remove a domain connection:

1. Click Repository > Configure Domain.

2. In the Configure Domains dialog box, select the domain connection that you want to delete.
3. Click the Remove button.
4. In the warning message that appears, click Yes.
Note: When you remove a domain connection, you terminate connectivity between the PowerCenter Client and
all services in the domain. To restore connectivity, add the domain connection, and then add repositories.

Managing Domain and Repository Connections 21

 Exporting and Importing Repository Connection Information
The Repository Manager saves repository connection information in the registry. To simplify the process of
setting up client machines, you can export that information and then import it to a different client machine.
Both machine must use the same operating system. The section of the registry you can import and export
contains the following repository connection information:
♦ Repository name
♦ User name and 7-bit ASCII password
♦ Security domain
♦ Gateway host name and port number

To export the repository connection information from the registry:

1. In the Repository Manager, click Tools > Export Registry.

2. Enter the name of the export file.
To identify the file, use a file name with the extension.reg, such as MySources.reg.
3. Click OK.
A dialog box appears, informing you that the Repository Manager successfully exported the repository
registry file.
You import this file on other client machines with the same operating systems.

To import the repository connection information to the registry:

1. In the Repository Manager, click Tools > Import Registry.

2. Navigate to the directory containing the import file and select it.
3. Click Open.

Removing a Repository from the Navigator

You can remove a repository from the Navigator of the PowerCenter Client. You might need to remove a
repository from the Navigator if the repository no longer exists or if you no longer use the repository.

To remove a repository from the Navigator:

1. In the Navigator of a PowerCenter Client tool, select the repository you want to remove.
2. Press Delete.
After you remove a repository from the Navigator, you can also remove it from the PowerCenter Client registry.

To remove a repository from the PowerCenter Client registry:

1. In the Navigator of the Repository Manager, click Tools > Remove Repository.
2. Select the repository you want to remove from the registry, and click Delete.
3. In the message box that appears, click OK to remove the repository.

Changing Your Password

If you are a native user, you can change the password for your user account.
Note: If you change your password, you must update environment variables or pmcmd or pmrep script files that
use the password. Replace the existing password with the new password.

22 Chapter 2: Using the Repository Manager

 You can change the password for another native user on the Security page of the Administration Console.

To change your password:

1. In the Repository Manager, connect to the repository.

2. Click Security > Change Current Password.
3. Enter the old password.
4. Enter the new password twice to confirm it.
The password can be between 1 and 80 characters long.
5. Click OK.

Searching for Repository Objects

In the Repository Manager, you can search for repository objects using the following methods:
♦ Keyword search
♦ Search text
Perform a keyword search when you have associated a keyword with a target definition. Use Search All when
you want to search through text in object names and comments associated with the repository object.

Performing Keyword Searches

After you add keywords to target definitions, use them to perform searches in the Repository Manager.

To search for targets containing a keyword:

1. In the Repository Manager, connect to a repository.

2. Click Analyze > Search by Target Keyword.
The Search Target Tables For Keyword dialog box appears.
You can enter a keyword, or you can select one from the list of all keywords applied to target definitions in
the repository.
3. If you want to select a keyword, click List Keywords, select a keyword, and then click OK.
-or-
Enter a keyword in the Keyword field.
4. Select the options you want to use in the search:

Option Description

Exact Match If selected, the Repository Manager looks for the entire keyword entered. If cleared,
the Repository Manager looks for keywords that contain the keyword entered. For
example, if you enter REPOS without selecting the Exact Match option, the search
would return a keyword match for REPOSITORY.

Ignore Case If selected, the Repository Manager does not try to match the case of the keyword
entered. Otherwise, the keyword search is case sensitive.

5. Click OK.
The Repository Manager searches for matching keywords in all target definitions in the repository. A list of
matching keywords appears at the bottom of the Repository Manager window.

Searching for Repository Objects 23

 Searching All Repository Objects
Use Search All to search for text in the object name, comments, group name, and owner name associated with
repository objects. You can search for text in the repository objects such as transformations, source and target
fields, and tasks.

To search for text in all repositor y objects:

1. In the Repository Manager, connect to the repository.

2. Click Analyze > Search All.
The Search All dialog box appears.
3. Enter the text you want to find.
4. Select Match Case if you want to perform a case-sensitive search.
5. In the item list, select the repository objects in which you want to search for the text. The Repository
Manager selects all objects by default.
6. Select the repository object attributes in which you want to search for the text. The Repository Manager
selects all attributes by default.
7. Click Find Next.
The Repository Manager displays the first repository object matching the search text in the Main window.
8. Click Find Next to find the next repository object matching the search text.
9. Click Close to close the Search All dialog box.

Viewing Object Dependencies

Before you change or delete repository objects, you can view dependencies to see the impact on other objects.
For example, before you remove a session, you can find out which workflows use the session. You can view
dependencies for repository objects in the Repository Manager, Workflow Manager, and Designer tools.
In the Repository Manager, Workflow Manager, and Designer, you can view dependencies when you perform
the following tasks:
♦ View object history. You can view dependencies from the View History window when you view the history
of an object.
♦ View checkouts. You can view dependencies from the View Checkouts window when you search for
persistent checkouts.

24 Chapter 2: Using the Repository Manager

♦ View query results. You can view dependencies from the Query Results window when you search for object
dependencies or run an object query.
Note: You can check in objects from the View Dependencies dialog box, but you cannot check in original
objects for global shortcuts.
In addition, you can view dependencies from the tools in the Workflow Manager and Designer. For user-
defined functions, you can right-click the function or click Tools > User-Defined Functions > Dependencies to
view dependencies in the Designer.
The following table lists the tools used to display dependencies and the objects that View Dependencies displays
when you view dependencies:

Parent Object Tool Types of Child Objects Displayed

Mappings Mapping Designer - Global and local shortcuts to the mapping.

- Sources the mapping uses.
- Targets the mapping uses.
- Transformations the mapping uses.

Mapplets Mapping Designer - Global and local shortcuts to the mapplet.

Mapplet Designer - Sources the mapplet uses.
- Targets the mapplet uses.
- Transformations the mapplet uses.

Sources Mapplet Designer - Sources within the same folder that reference or are
Mapping Designer referenced by the source through a foreign key
Source Analyzer relationship.
- Global and local shortcuts to the source.

Targets Mapping Designer - Targets within the same folder that reference or are
Target Designer referenced by the target through a foreign key
relationship.
- Global and local shortcuts to the target.

Transformations Mapplet Designer - Global and local shortcuts to the transformation.

Mapping Designer
Transformation Developer

User-Defined n/a - User-defined functions that use the user-defined function.

Functions - Transformations that use the user-defined function.
- Mappings with transformations that use the user-defined
function
- Workflow tasks that use the user-defined function.
- Worklets that use the user-defined function.
- Workflows that use the user-defined function.

Sessions Task Developer - Sources the session uses.

Worklet Designer - Targets the session uses.
Workflow Designer - Mappings the session uses.
- Mapplets the session uses.
- Transformations the session uses.
- Tasks the session uses.
- Mapping the session uses.
- Session configuration the session uses.

Workflows Workflow Designer - Sources the workflow uses.

- Targets the workflow uses.
- Mappings the workflow uses.
- Mapplets the workflow uses.
- Transformations the workflow uses.
- Sessions the workflow uses.
- Tasks the workflow uses.
- Schedulers the workflow uses.
- Session configuration the workflow uses.
- Worklet the workflow uses.

Viewing Object Dependencies 25

 Parent Object Tool Types of Child Objects Displayed

Worklets Worklet Designer - Sources the worklet uses.

Workflow Designer - Targets the worklet uses.
- Mappings the worklet uses.
- Mapplets the worklet uses.
- Transformations the worklet uses.
- Sessions the worklet uses.
- Tasks the worklet uses.
- Schedulers the worklet uses.
- Session configuration the worklet uses.
Note: You can perform all searches in this table from the Repository Manager.

You can view object dependencies when you open objects in the following tools:
♦ Mapping Designer
♦ Mapplet Designer
♦ Workflow Designer
♦ Worklet Designer
The Dependencies dialog box displays the object name, the object type, and a list of dependent objects and
their properties.
The following figure shows the Dependencies dialog box:

Search for
Select dependencies.
options.

Filter by object type

when you search
for parent or child
dependencies.

When you search for dependencies, you can filter the results by selecting options and object types.
The following table shows the options you can select when you search for dependencies:

Option Description

Primary/Foreign Key View primary and source object dependencies where there is a primary key-
Dependencies foreign key relationship.

Global Shortcut View global shortcuts across repositories. You can select this option when you
Dependencies search for parents, children, or primary key-foreign key dependencies.

All Children View the objects that the selected object uses. For example, if you search for the
child objects for a workflow, the results might include sessions and worklets.

All Parents View the objects that use the selected object. For example, if you search for the
parent objects for a session, the results might include a workflow or worklet.

When you search for dependencies, the View Dependencies window displays the properties for each dependent
object.

26 Chapter 2: Using the Repository Manager

The following figure shows the View Dependencies window:

Object
Properties

Output
Window
Comments
Window

Labels
Window

The following table describes the object properties that appear in the View Dependencies window:

Properties Description

Object Name Name of the dependent object.

Group Name DBD associated with the source of the object. For example, the
group type can be Oracle, DB2, or XML.

Object Type The type of dependent object. Dependent objects can be any of the
following types:
- Foreign key dependency
- Shortcuts
- Mappings
- Mapplets
- Sessions
- Workflows
- Worklets
- Target definition
- Source definition

Version Version number of the dependent object.

Time Stamp Time the object was created or saved.

Status Status of the object, Active or Deleted.

Version Comments Comments associated with the dependent object.

Folder Name Folder name where the dependent object resides.

User Name User who created the object.

Host Name Host name for the machine hosting the object.

Checkout Type Type of checkout for object, Persistent or Non-Persistent.

Purged by User Name of the user who purged the object.

Is Reusable Status of object as reusable, Yes or No.

Is Deleted Status of object deletion, Yes or No.

Repository Repository hosting the object.

The View Dependencies window also displays output, comments, and label information associated with the
object. The Output window displays validation information, and the Comments window displays text entered

Viewing Object Dependencies 27

 during object check in or check out. The Labels window displays labels associated with the object and
information associated with the label object.
To save the list of dependent objects as an HTML file, click File > Save to File.

Validating Multiple Objects

You can validate multiple objects in the repository without fetching them into the workspace. You can save and
optionally check in objects that change from invalid to valid status as a result of the validation. You can validate
sessions, mappings, mapplets, workflows, and worklets.
You can select objects to validate from the Navigator window of the Repository Manager. You can also select
objects from query results or an object dependencies list. If you select objects from the Navigator, you must
select objects of the same type in the same folder. If you select objects from query results or an object
dependencies list, you can choose different types of objects to validate.

To validate multiple objects:

1. Select the objects you want to validate.

2. Initiate the validation.
If you select objects from query results or a list view, you must right-click one of the selected objects and
select Validate. If you are selecting objects from the Navigator, you can also click Tools > Validate to
initiate a validation. The Validate Objects dialog box appears.
3. Select validation options from the Validate Objects dialog box:
♦ Save validated objects. If you do not choose to save the objects in the repository, the validation just
provides a report.
♦ Choose whether to check in validated objects. You can check in valid objects. You can select this option
if you have selected the Save Objects that Are Successfully Made Valid option and versioning is enabled
in the repository.
♦ Check in comments. If you are checking in validated objects, you must enter check-in comments.
Otherwise, this option is disabled.
4. Click Validate.
The validation displays status in a progress dialog box. The output window shows the status of each object
being validated. You can cancel the validation from the progress dialog box. If you cancel, you do not
cancel the current operation, but you cancel the remaining operations in the validation.
The following figure shows the Validate Objects results box. The results box appears when validation
completes. Use the results box to determine how many objects were validated and saved. To view the objects in
each total, click the link.

Links to view the objects in the group.

28 Chapter 2: Using the Repository Manager

 The following table describes the information that appears in the Validate Objects window:

Properties Description

Objects Provided for Total number of objects that you selected to validate. The total includes
Validation skipped objects.

Skipped Objects Number of the following types of objects:

- Objects that do not require validation, such as sources, targets,
transformations, and shortcuts.
- Objects that cannot be fetched, such as a deleted mapping associated
with a session being validated.

Objects that Were Invalid Number of invalid objects provided for validation.
Before the Validation

Objects Successfully Number of selected objects that are valid.

Validated

Objects Still Invalid Number of objects that require fixing or editing.

Saved/Checked In Total number of objects saved. If you do not choose the Save Objects or
Check In Objects options, this number is zero.

Cannot Save Objects Number of validated objects you cannot save because someone has them
Due to Lock Conflict locked.

5. Click a link to view the objects in the results group. Validation results that include objects provide links to
the object details. When you click the link, a window displays each object in the results group you select.

Comparing Repository Objects

You can compare two repository objects of the same type to identify differences between the objects. For
example, you can compare two sessions to check for differences. When you compare two objects, the Repository
Manager displays their attributes.
You can compare objects across folders and repositories. To do this, you must have both the folders open. You
can compare a reusable object with a non-reusable object. You can also compare different versions of the same
object.
You can compare the following types of objects:
♦ Designer objects. You can compare Designer objects, such as sources, targets, transformations, mapplets and
mappings.

Comparing Repository Objects 29

 ♦ Workflow Manager objects. You can compare Workflow Manager objects, such as tasks, sessions, worklets,
and workflows. You can compare schedulers and session configuration objects in the Repository Manager,
but not in the Workflow Manager.
You can compare instances of the same type in detail. For example, if the workflows you compare contain
worklet instances with the same name, you can compare the instances to see if they differ. You can compare
instances of sessions and tasks in a workflow or worklet comparison. You can compare instances of mappings
and transformations in a session comparison. Further, you can compare instances of the same type within a
mapping or mapplet comparison.
You cannot compare objects of different types. For example, you cannot compare a source definition with a
target definition.

To compare repository objects:

1. In the Repository Manager, connect to the repository.

2. In the Navigator, select the object you want to compare.
Tip: To compare the first two objects in a node, select the node.

3. Click Edit > Compare Objects.

The Mappings dialog box appears.
4. Click Compare.
If you choose a Designer object, a window shows the result of comparing the objects. For example, the Sources
window shows the result of comparing two sources:

View Object
Differences.

30 Chapter 2: Using the Repository Manager

 If you choose a Workflow Manager object, such as a session, the Diff Tool window shows the result of
comparing two sessions:
Filter nodes
that have
same attribute
values.

Compare
object
instances.

Differences
between
objects are
highlighted
and the
nodes are
flagged.
Differences
between
object
properties are
marked.

Displays the
properties of
the node you
select.

Truncating Workflow and Session Log Entries

When you configure a session or workflow to archive session logs or workflow logs, the Integration Service saves
those logs in local directories. The repository also creates an entry for each saved workflow log and session log.
If you move or delete a session log or workflow log from the workflow log directory or session log directory, you
can remove the entries from the repository.
Use the Repository Manager to truncate the list of workflow logs for workflows that have completed. You can
also use the pmrep TruncateLog command to truncate workflow logs.
You can truncate all log entries for a workflow or log entries that were created before a specified date. You
cannot truncate a workflow log for a workflow that is still running. The Repository Service truncates the
workflow log list and the session log list at the same time.
When the Repository Service truncates log entries for sessions and workflows, it also deletes the following run-
time information for the sessions and workflows:
♦ Workflow details
♦ Session statistics
♦ Task details
♦ Source and target statistics
♦ Partition details
♦ Performance details
Tip: You can truncate log entries to reduce the size of the repository in the database. The log entries can use a
significant amount of space in the repository.

Truncating Workflow and Session Log Entries 31

 To truncate workflow and session log entries:

1. In the Repository Manager, select the workflow in the Navigator window or in the Main window.
2. Choose Edit > Truncate Log.
The Truncate Workflow Log dialog box appears.
3. Choose to delete all workflow and session log entries or to delete all workflow and session log entries with
an end time before a particular date.
4. If you want to delete all entries older than a certain date, enter the date and time.
5. Click OK.
The Repository Service deletes the workflow and session log entries from the repository.

32 Chapter 2: Using the Repository Manager

CHAPTER 3

Folders
This chapter includes the following topics:
♦ Overview, 33
♦ Managing Folder Properties, 33
♦ Comparing Folders, 35

Overview
Folders provide a way to organize and store metadata in the repository, including mappings, schemas, and
sessions. Folders help you logically organize the repository. Each folder has a set of properties that you can
configure to define how users access the folder. You can verify folder content by comparing folders.
You can perform the following tasks when you work with folders:
♦ Configure folder properties. When you create a folder, you can configure properties such as name,
description, and owner. For more information, see “Managing Folder Properties” on page 33.
♦ Compare folders. You can compare the contents of a folder with other folders to verify content. You can
compare objects between two folders in the same repository or in different repositories. You can perform
folder comparisions before copying or replacing a folder. For more information, see “Comparing Folders” on
page 35.
♦ Manage permissions. A permission is the level of access a user has to an object. A user with the privilege to
perform certain actions can require permissions to perform the action on a particular object. For more
information about permissions, see “Managing Object Permissions” on page 39.
♦ Copy folders. You can copy a folder and all of its contents within a repository or to another repository. For
more information, see “Copying Folders and Deployment Groups” on page 93.

Managing Folder Properties

When you create a folder, you can configure folder properties and permissions on the folder. For example, you
can create a folder and share the objects within the folder with other users in the repository. You can create
shared and non-shared folders.

33
 The following table describes the properties that you can configure for each folder:

Required/
Folder Properties Description
Optional

Name Required Folder name. Do not use the period character (.) in folder names. Folder
names with periods can cause errors when you run sessions.

Description Optional Description of the folder that appears in the Repository Manager.

Owner n/a Owner of the folder. By default, the folder owner is the user who creates
the folder. This field is read-only. You can change the owner on the
Permissions tab.

OS Profile Optional Operating system profile name. If the Integration Service uses operating
system profiles, specify an operating system profile for the Integration
Service to use.

Allow Shortcut Optional Makes the folder shared.

Status Conditional Applies the status applied to all objects in the folder. Required for
versioned repositories.

Operating System Profile

If the Integration Service uses operating system profiles, specify an operating system profile for the Integration
Service to use. The Integration Service uses the operating system profile to run workflows in the folder.
Operating system profiles allow the Integration Service to run a workflow and write output files using the
setting of the operating system profile. You can use the Start Workflow Advanced option in the Workflow
Manager to override the operating system profile assigned to the folder.
When you copy a folder or back up a repository, the operating system profile assignment is not copied. After
you copy a folder or restore a repository, you must assign an operating system profile to the folder.

Shortcuts and Shared Folders

You can designate a folder to be shared. In the Designer, shared folders allow users to create shortcuts to objects
in the folder. If you have an object that you want to use in several mappings or across multiple folders, you can
place the object in a shared folder. You can access the object from other folders by creating shortcuts to the
object.
Shortcuts inherit changes to the original object. To use an object in a shared folder without inheriting future
changes, you can copy the existing object.
When you create a shared folder, the folder icon in the Navigator displays an open hand icon.
Note: After you make a folder shared, you cannot reverse the change.

Shared Folders in Global Repositories

Shared folders in global repositories can be used by any folder in the domain. For example, if you are working
in a folder in a local repository, you can select the global repository and create a shortcut to a shared folder. As
with local shared folders, if the original object is changed, all shortcuts reflect those changes.

Steps to Manage Folder Properties

You can perform the following tasks to manage folder properties:
♦ Create a folder. When you create a folder, you become the folder owner by default.
♦ Edit a folder. When you edit a folder, you can edit the properties, change the owner, and configure the
permissions.
♦ Delete a folder. If a folder becomes obsolete, you can delete that folder from the repository.

34 Chapter 3: Folders
 To create a folder:

1. In the Repository Manager, connect to the repository.

2. Click Folder > Create.
The Create Folder dialog box appears.
3. Enter the information for folder properties.
4. Click the Permissions tab.
Assign permissions on the folder to users and groups.
5. Click OK.

To edit a folder:

1. In the Repository Manager, connect to a repository and select a folder.

2. Click Folder > Edit.
3. Enter the changes, and click OK.

To delete a folder:

1. In the Repository Manager, connect to a repository and select a folder.

2. Click Folder > Delete.
3. In the confirmation message that appears, click OK.

Comparing Folders
Before you copy or replace a folder in a repository, you might want to verify the contents of a folder or compare
it with other folders. The Repository Manager lets you quickly and accurately compare the objects in different
folders using the Compare Folders Wizard.
If you use a versioned repository, the Repository Manager uses the latest checked in version of an object for
comparison.
In the Compare Folders Wizard, you can complete the following comparisons:
♦ Compare objects between two folders in the same repository.
♦ Compare objects between two folders in different repositories.
You can specify the following comparison criteria for each comparison:
♦ Object types to compare. You can specify the object types to compare and display between folders. The
wizard compares objects based on specific object attributes. For a list of compared attributes for object types,
see Table 3-1 on page 36.
♦ Direction of comparison. The wizard performs directional comparisons. A directional comparison checks
the contents of one folder against the contents of the other. You can specify either one-way or two-way
comparisons.
The wizard displays the following information:
♦ Similarities between objects
♦ Differences between objects
♦ Outdated objects
You can edit and save the result of the comparison.

Comparing Folders 35
 Compared Attributes and Object Differentiation
The Compare Folders Wizard compares objects based on specific object attributes.
Table 3-1 lists the object types and attributes you can compare:

Table 3-1. Compared Object Types and Attributes

Object Type Compared Attribute

Sources Source name and database name

Targets Target name and database name

Reusable transformations Transformation name and type

Mappings Mapping name

Mapplets Mapplet name

Source fields Column names

Target fields Column names

Reusable transformation fields Port names

Sessions Session name

Session components Component value

Tasks Task name

Task instances Task instance name

Workflows Workflow name

Workflow events Workflow event name

Workflow variables Workflow variable name

Worklets Worklet name

Shortcuts Shortcut name and object type

Transformation instances Transformation instance name and type

Mapping variables Mapping variable name

External procedure initialization Property name

properties

Schedulers Scheduler name

Configurations Configuration name

Some objects you choose to compare also cause the wizard to compare other objects, regardless of whether you
select the other objects to compare.
The following table lists objects the wizard compares by default when you select certain objects to compare:

Selected Object Compared Object

Source field Source

Target field Target

Reusable transformation field Reusable transformation

Mapping variable Mapping

External procedure initialization Transformation instance

properties

Session component Session

Task Instance Workflow and worklet

36 Chapter 3: Folders
 Selected Object Compared Object

Workflow event Workflow and worklet

Workflow variable Workflow and worklet

The wizard compares the attribute of each object in the source folder with the attribute of each object in the
target folder. You can choose to compare based on the following criteria:
♦ Different objects. Object name and type exist in one folder but not the other.
♦ Similar objects. Object name, type, and modification date are the same in both folders.
♦ Outdated objects. Object modification date is older than objects with the same name.
The wizard does not compare the field attributes of the objects in the folders when performing the comparison.
For example, if two folders have matching source names and column or port names but differing port or
column attributes, such as precision or datatype, the wizard does not note these as different.

One-Way and Two-Way Comparisons

Comparison results depend on the direction of the comparison. One-way comparisons check the selected
objects of Folder1 against the objects in Folder2. Two-way comparisons check objects in Folder1 against those
in Folder2 and also check objects in Folder2 against those in Folder1.
A two-way comparison can sometimes reveal information a one-way comparison cannot. A one-way comparison
does not note a difference if an object is present in the target folder but not in the source folder.
The following figure shows two folders, ADS1 and ADS2, in the same repository. If you compare the folders
using a one-way comparison, the source definition ORDER_ITEMS, present in ADS2 but not in ADS1, is not
noted as a comparison. If you compare the folders using a two-way comparison, the absence of
ORDER_ITEMS in ADS1 is noted as a difference.

A one-way comparison does not

A two-way comparison
note the presence of
notes the absence of
ORDER_ITEMS in ADS2 as a
ORDER_ITEMS in
difference.
ADS1 as a difference.

Editing and Saving Results Files

You can edit and save the result of a folder comparison. The Compare Folders wizard displays similar objects in
green text, unmatched objects denoting a difference in red text, and outdated objects in blue text. The Compare
Folders Wizard always displays the total number of differences, similarities, and outdated objects found during
the comparison, even if you do not choose to display differences or similarities in the edit field.
You can save the results of the comparison in the edit field to an .rtf or a .txt file. To retain the color and font
attributes of the result, save it as an .rtf file. By default the results file is saved in the My Documents directory.

Steps to Compare Folders

Before comparing folders, verify that you have Read permission for each folder you want to compare. Connect
to the repositories containing the folders in the wizard.

Comparing Folders 37
 To compare folders:

1. In the Repository Manager, click Folder > Compare.

2. Click Next.
3. Connect to the repositories containing the folders you want to compare and select the folders for
comparison.
4. Click Next.
5. Select the object types you want to compare.
6. Click Next.
7. Select the display options.
8. Click Next.
The wizard always displays the number of differences, similarities, and outdated objects.
9. View the results of the comparison.
10. If you want to save the comparison results to a file, select Save results to file.
11. Click Finish.
12. If you chose to save the results to a file, specify the file type, name, and directory.
13. Click Save.

38 Chapter 3: Folders
CHAPTER 4

Managing Object Permissions

This chapter includes the following topics:
♦ Overview, 39
♦ Maintaining the User List, 40
♦ Assigning Permissions, 42
♦ Changing the Object Owner, 42

Overview
Permissions control the level of access a user has to an object. In the PowerCenter Client, you can assign
permissions on folders and global objects. Global objects include object queries, deployment groups, labels, and
connection objects. You can assign the following permissions to users and groups in the repository:
♦ Read permission. You can view the folder and objects.
♦ Write permission. You can create or edit objects in a folder, maintain object queries or labels, or add or
delete objects from deployment groups.
♦ Execute permission. You can run or schedule a workflow in the folder, run object queries, apply labels, or
copy deployment groups.
When you create a folder or global object, it is created with one user and one default group:
♦ The user who creates the object is the owner and has read, write, and execute permissions. You can change
the owner, but you cannot change the permissions for the owner.
♦ The default group represents the minimum level of permissions you can assign to any user or group. It
displays as “Others” and is created with read permissions. You can grant write and execute permission to the
default group. The permissions assigned to the default group are the default permissions that each user and
group receives when added to the object user list.
Note: Permissions work in conjunction with privileges. Privileges are actions that a user performs in
PowerCenter applications. A user with the privilege to perform certain actions can require permissions to
perform the action on a particular object.

Assigned Permissions
Users and groups receive permissions based on the following conditions:
♦ When you add a user or group to the object list, the user or group receives default permissions. You can
increase the level of permissions, but you cannot decrease the level of permissions beyond the level of default
permissions.

39
 For example, the default group has read and write permissions. When you add a user to the object user list,
the user receives read and write permissions. You can grant execute permission to the user, but you cannot
remove write permission. To remove write permission, you must remove it from the default group.
♦ Users and groups that are assigned to a group inherit permission of the parent group. Users and groups that
inherit permissions from the parent group do not appear in the object user list.
♦ Users and groups that are assigned the Administrator role for the Repository Service inherit read, write, and
execute permissions. You cannot change the permissions for the administrators. Users and groups that
inherit permissions from the Administrator role do not appear in the object user list.
♦ All users and groups that you do not add to the object user list and who do not have the Administrator role
for the Repository Service inherit default permissions.

Accessing Object Permissions

Configure permissions for an object in the tool where you create the object. The following table shows where
you configure permissions for folders and global objects:

Object Configure Permissions

Folders Repository Manager

Labels Repository Manager

Deployment Groups Repository Manager

Object Queries Repository Manager, Designer, Workflow Manager

Connection Objects Workflow Manager

You access folder permissions on the Permissions tab. You access permissions for global objects from the object
browser.

Managing Permissions
When you manage permissions, you can perform the following tasks:
♦ Maintain the object user list. The user list for an object is the list of users or groups that have permission on
the object. You can add and remove users and groups from the list. For more information, see “Maintaining
the User List” on page 40.
♦ Assign permissions. Assign permissions on objects to users, groups, and all others in the repository. You can
assign read, write, and execute permissions. For more information, see “Assigning Permissions” on page 42.
♦ Change the object owner. Change the object owner to any user in the object user list. For more
information, see “Changing the Object Owner” on page 42.

Maintaining the User List

Add users and groups to the user list of an object when you want to assign permissions or change ownership.
You can also remove users from the user list.

Adding Users and Groups

When you add a user or group to the object user list, you can use the following search filters:
♦ Security domain. Enter the security domain to search for users or groups.

40 Chapter 4: Managing Object Permissions

 ♦ Pattern string. Enter a string to search for users or groups. The PowerCenter Client returns all names that
contain the search string. The string is not case sensitive. For example, the string “DA” can return
“iasdaemon,” “daphne,” and “DA_AdminGroup.”
When you add a user or group to the object user list, the user or group receives default permissions. After you
add a user to the object user list, you can grant permissions or change the ownership. After you add a group to
the object user list, you can grant permissions.
The following figure shows the Add Users or Groups dialog box where you can choose users and groups to add
to the list:

Filter by security domain and by

search string.

List the search results by user,

group, or all.

Choose a user or group.

Add the selected user or group.

To add users and groups:

1. On the Permissions tab of the folder, click Add.

-or-
In the global object browser, click Permissions, and then click Add.
2. Enter the filter conditions to search for users and groups, and click Go.
3. Choose to list users, groups, or all users and groups.
4. Select a user or group, and click Add.
You can use Ctrl-click to select multiple users or group, or you can use Shift-click to select a range of users
and groups.

Removing Users and Groups

When you remove users and groups, you can choose to remove one user or group at a time, or you can remove
all users and groups. When you remove all users and groups, you cannot remove the object owner or the default
object group.

To remove users and groups:

1. Select a user or group in the user list of the object.

2. To remove a user or group, select the user or group, and click Remove.
3. To remove all users and groups, click Remove All.
4. Click OK.

Maintaining the User List 41

Assigning Permissions
When you assign permissions to a user or group, you can assign permissions to any user or group in the list. You
can filter the list to show users, groups, or users and groups.
Use the following rules and guidelines when you assign permissions:
♦ You can increase the level of permission for any user or group.
♦ You cannot revoke default permissions from any user or group. For example, if default permissions are read
and write, you cannot remove write permission from any user or group. To reduce the level of permissions,
you must change permissions assigned to the default user group, “Others.”
Note: When you change the permissions for a user that is connected to the repository, the permissions take effect
the next time the user connects to the repository.
Assign permissions for a folder on the Permissions tab of the folder. Assign permissions for global objects in the
global object.

To assign permissions:

1. Select a user or group in the user list of the object.

2. Select the permissions to assign to the user or group.
-or-
If the user or group is not in the list, click Add to add the user or group to the list.
3. Click OK.

Changing the Object Owner

When you change the owner of a folder or global object, you choose from the list of users associated with the
object. Use the same filters to search for users that you use to search for users and groups when you add users
and groups to the list. If the user does not appear in the list, you can add the user to the list for the object.
The following figure shows the Select Owner dialog box where you can change the object owner:

Filter by security domain and by

search string.

Select a user to change ownership.

Add a user that does not appear

in the list.

42 Chapter 4: Managing Object Permissions

To change the object owner:

1. On the Permissions tab of the folder, click Change Owner.

-or-
In the object, click Change Owner.
2. In the Select Owner dialog box, enter the filter conditions to search for users and groups, and click Go.
3. Select a user.
-or-
If the user does not appear in the list to select, use a different filter condition, or click Select Other User to
add a user to the list of object users.
4. Click OK.

Changing the Object Owner 43

44 Chapter 4: Managing Object Permissions
CHAPTER 5

Local and Global Shortcuts

This chapter includes the following topics:
♦ Overview, 45
♦ Shortcuts Versus Copies, 46
♦ Understanding Shortcut Properties, 46
♦ Creating a Local Shortcut, 48
♦ Creating a Global Shortcut, 50
♦ Working with Shortcuts, 51
♦ Tips, 54
♦ Troubleshooting, 54

Overview
Shortcuts allow you to use metadata across folders without making copies. This helps to ensure uniform
metadata. A shortcut inherits all properties of the object to which it points. After you create a shortcut, you can
configure the shortcut name and description.
When the original object changes, the shortcut inherits those changes. By using a shortcut instead of a copy,
you ensure each use of the shortcut matches the original object. For example, if you have a shortcut to a target
definition and you add a column to the definition, the shortcut inherits the additional column.
Shortcuts allow you to reuse an object without creating multiple objects in the repository. For example, you use
a source definition in 10 mappings in 10 different folders. Instead of creating 10 copies of the same source
definition, one in each folder, you can create 10 shortcuts to the original source definition.
Note: In a versioned repository, a shortcut inherits the properties of the latest version of the object that it
references.
You can create shortcuts to objects in shared folders. If you try to create a shortcut to an object in a non-shared
folder, the Designer creates a copy of the object instead.
You can create shortcuts to the following repository objects:
♦ Source definitions
♦ Reusable transformations
♦ Mapplets
♦ Mappings
♦ Target definitions

45
 ♦ Business components
You can create the following types of shortcuts:
♦ Local shortcut. A shortcut created in the same repository as the original object.
♦ Global shortcut. A shortcut created in a local repository that references an object in a global repository.

Shortcuts Versus Copies

One of the primary advantages of using a shortcut is maintenance. If you need to change all instances of an
object, you can edit the original repository object. All shortcuts accessing the object inherit the changes. In
contrast, if you have multiple copies of an object, you need to edit each copy of the object, or recopy the object,
to obtain the same results.
However, some changes can invalidate mappings and sessions. For example, if you use a shortcut to a reusable
transformation and then change a port datatype, you can invalidate all mappings with shortcuts to the
transformation and all sessions using those mappings.
Therefore, if you want the object to inherit changes immediately, create a shortcut. Otherwise, create a copy.
Shortcuts have the following advantages over copied repository objects:
♦ You can maintain a common repository object in a single location. If you need to edit the object, all
shortcuts immediately inherit the changes you make.
♦ You can restrict users to a set of predefined metadata by asking users to incorporate the shortcuts into their
work instead of developing repository objects independently.
♦ You can develop complex mappings, mapplets, or reusable transformations and then reuse them easily in
other folders.
♦ You can save space in the repository by keeping a single repository object and using shortcuts to that object,
instead of creating copies of the object in multiple folders or multiple repositories.
For information about exporting and importing objects to makes copies, see “Exporting and Importing
Objects” on page 111.

Understanding Shortcut Properties

When you create a shortcut to a repository object, the shortcut inherits the attributes of the object. The
shortcut inherits the following properties that cannot be edited in the shortcut object:
♦ Object business name and owner name
♦ Port attributes, including datatype, precision, scale, default value, and port description
♦ Object properties
The shortcut also inherits a name and description which you can edit in the shortcut.

Default Shortcut Name

The Designer names a shortcut after the original object based on the original object name as it appears in the
Navigator when you create the shortcut. The Designer uses the following naming convention:
Shortcut_To_DisplayedName.
By default, the Designer displays all objects in the Navigator by object name. If you create a shortcut while
using the default display option, the Designer names the shortcut Shortcut_To_ObjectName.

46 Chapter 5: Local and Global Shortcuts

 Alternatively, you can enable the Designer tools to display sources and targets by business name. When you
enable this option, the Designer displays sources and targets by business names if they exist. If you create a
shortcut to a source or target when this option is enabled, the Designer names the shortcut
Shortcut_To_BusinessName.
Note: If the business name contains characters that are not allowed as in the object name, the Designer replaces
the character with an underscore (_).
You can edit the default shortcut name at any time.

Describing the Object and the Shortcut

Shortcuts inherit the description associated with the referenced object when you first create the shortcut.
Afterwards, you can add object descriptions for each shortcut. Since the description is unique to the shortcut, if
the description of the referenced object subsequently changes, shortcuts do not inherit those changes.
The following figure shows the shortcut with a description inherited from the original object:

Description from the

original object

Description added to
the shortcut

Shortcuts do not inherit edits to the description of the referenced object. However, any shortcuts created after
the change contain the latest description.

Locating the Referenced Object

Each shortcut tracks the location of the object it references and displays it in the transformation property sheet.
The shortcut object displays the following details about the referenced object:
♦ Repository name
♦ Folder name
♦ Table or transformation name

Understanding Shortcut Properties 47

 The following figure shows the referenced shortcut objects:

Original
Object
Location

Note: If you move or delete an object referenced by a shortcut, the shortcut becomes invalid.

Creating a Local Shortcut

You can reuse metadata within a single repository by creating a local shortcut. You can create a local shortcut to
objects in a shared folder in the same repository. If an object is in a non-shared folder, you can make a copy of
the object.
You can create a local shortcut in any folder in the repository. After you create a local shortcut, you can reuse it
within the same folder. After you create a shortcut, it appears in the Navigator as an available repository object
with the shortcut icon. When you drag the resulting shortcut into the workspace, the same shortcut icon
appears. The Designer names shortcuts after the original object by default, Shortcut_To_ObjectName.
For example, when you create a shortcut to the DetectChanges reusable Expression transformation, the
shortcut, named Shortcut_To_DetectChanges appears in the Transformations node of the folder. When you
drag it into the workspace, the shortcut icon indicates the transformation is a shortcut.

48 Chapter 5: Local and Global Shortcuts

The following figure shows shortcut icons in the Navigator and Workspace windows:

Shared Original Object Shortcut Shortcut Icon

Folder

Note: When you drag an object from a shared folder to a business component directory, the Designer creates a
shortcut if the object does not exist in the destination folder.
You can create a local shortcut in the Navigator or in the workspace.

To create a local shortcut in the Navigator:

1. In the Navigator, expand the shared folder containing the object you want to use and drill down to locate
the object.
2. Open the destination folder, the folder in which you want the shortcut.
3. Drag the object from the shared folder to the destination folder.
After you drop the object, the Designer displays the following message:
Create a shortcut to <object type> <object name>?

Note: If the object is not saved in the repository, the Designer displays a message asking if you want to
create a copy of the object. To create a shortcut, cancel the operation, save the object, and then create the
shortcut.
4. When prompted for confirmation, click OK to create a shortcut.
The shortcut now appears in the Navigator.
5. Click Repository > Save.
You can now use the shortcut in this folder.

Creating a Local Shortcut 49

 To create a local shortcut in the workspace:

1. In the Navigator, expand the shared folder containing the object you want to use and drill down to locate
the object.
2. Open the destination folder, the folder in which you want the shortcut.
3. Select the appropriate Designer tool for the shortcut.
For example, to create a shortcut for a source, choose the Source Analyzer or Mapping Designer tool. To
create a shortcut for a target, choose the Target Designer or Mapping Designer tool.
4. Drag the object from the shared folder into the workspace.
After you drop the object, the Designer displays the following message:
Create a shortcut to <object type> <object name>?

Note: If the object is not saved in the repository, the Designer displays a message asking if you want to
create a copy of the object. To create a shortcut, cancel the operation, save the object, and then create the
shortcut.
5. When prompted for confirmation, click OK to create a shortcut, or click Cancel to cancel the operation.
The shortcut now appears in the workspace and in the Navigator.
6. Click Repository > Save.
You can now use the shortcut in this folder.

Creating a Global Shortcut

You can reuse metadata between repositories by creating a global shortcut. A global shortcut is a shortcut in a
local repository that references an object in a global repository.
You can create a global shortcut in any folder in the local repository. After you create the global shortcut in a
folder, you can reuse it in the folder as you would any other repository object.
You can create a global shortcut to any object in a shared folder in a global repository. If a folder is not shared,
you can make a copy of these objects if the global and local repository have compatible code pages.
To create a global shortcut, you must be able to connect to the global repository through the local repository.
That is, if you connect to the local repository directly, the global repository must appear in the local repository.
Similarly, if you connect to the global repository directly, the local repository must appear in the global
repository.
You can use the Designer to connect to both the local and the global repositories individually. However, to
create a global shortcut, you must connect to one repository through the other. You can connect to the global
repository first and then connect to the local repository directly below it to create a global shortcut. Or, you can
connect to the local repository and then connect to the global repository that appears below it.
You can create a global shortcut in the Navigator or in the workspace.

To create a global shortcut in the Navigator:

1. In the Designer, connect to the local repository and open the folder in which you want a shortcut.
The global repository appears in the Navigator below the local repository. If it does not, the repository to
which you are connected is not registered with the global repository.
2. In the Navigator, connect to the global repository appearing below the local repository.
The Designer expands the global repository, displaying folders for which you have permission.
If the Designer does not allow you to connect to the global repository, you might need to reconfigure
aspects of the repository domain.

50 Chapter 5: Local and Global Shortcuts

 3. In the global repository, drill down through the shared folder until you locate the object you want to use.
4. Drag the object into the destination folder in the local repository.
After you drop the object, the Designer displays the following message:
Create a shortcut to <object type> <object name>?

Note: If the object is not saved in the repository, the Designer displays a message asking if you want to
create a copy of the object. To create a shortcut, cancel the operation, save the object, and then create the
shortcut.
5. When prompted for confirmation, click OK to create a global shortcut, or click Cancel to cancel the
operation.
The shortcut now appears in the Navigator.
6. Click Repository > Save.
You can now use the shortcut in this folder.

To create a global shortcut in the workspace:

1. In the Designer, connect to the local repository and open the folder in which you want a shortcut.
The global repository appears in the Navigator below the local repository. If it does not, the repository to
which you are connected is not registered with the global repository.
2. Select the appropriate Designer tool for the shortcut.
For example, to create a shortcut for a source, choose the Source Analyzer or Mapping Designer tool. To
create a shortcut for a target, choose the Target Designer or Mapping Designer tool.
3. In the Navigator, connect to the global repository appearing below the local repository.
The Designer expands the global repository, displaying folders for which you have permission.
If the Designer does not allow you to connect to the global repository, you might need to reconfigure
aspects of the repository domain.
4. In the global repository, drill down through the shared folder until you locate the object you want to use.
5. Drag the object from the shared folder into the workspace.
After you drop the object, the Designer displays the following message:
Create a shortcut to <object type> <object name>?

Note: If the object is not saved in the repository, the Designer displays a message asking if you want to
create a copy of the object. To create a shortcut, cancel the operation, save the object, and then create the
shortcut.
6. When prompted for confirmation, click OK to create a global shortcut, or click Cancel to cancel the
operation.
The shortcut now appears in the workspace and in the Navigator.
7. Click Repository > Save.
You can now use the shortcut in this folder.

Working with Shortcuts

After you create a shortcut, you can reuse it in the folder.

Working with Shortcuts 51

 When you edit an object referenced by a shortcut, the Designer does not validate mappings using shortcuts to
the object. Some changes might invalidate mappings, such as deleting a port or changing the port datatype,
precision, or scale. When a mapping is invalid, the Integration Service cannot run the session.
When editing a referenced object, use the View Dependencies features in the Repository Manager to determine
which mappings contain shortcuts to the object. To ensure mappings are valid, open and validate the mapping.
When validating a mapping, make sure you have the most recent version of the mapping. For information
about viewing dependencies in the Repository Manager, see “Viewing Object Dependencies” on page 24.
You can also view object dependencies in the Designer. For information about viewing dependencies in the
Designer, see the PowerCenter Designer Guide.

Refreshing Shortcut Properties

When working with shortcuts, ensure you have the most recent version of the local or global shortcut in the
workspace.
If you launch the Designer and then drag into the workspace a shortcut or a mapping or mapplet that uses a
shortcut, you view the current version of the object that the shortcut references. However, if another user then
edits and saves changes to the referenced object, the shortcut displayed in the workspace is no longer an
accurate description of the referenced object. When you work in this type of environment, verify that you have
updated the view of local and global shortcuts.
The Integration Service always uses the latest version of a referenced object. When the Integration Service starts
a session containing a shortcut, it accesses the repository to retrieve the mapping. If the mapping contains a
shortcut, the Integration Service accesses the repository for details about the original object.

Updating Views of Global and Local Shortcuts

The Designer updates properties for a global or local shortcut when it retrieves object information from the
repository. If you think the original object referenced by a global or local shortcut has changed, you can refresh
the view of the shortcut by performing one of the following:
♦ Open metadata. When you drag an object into the Designer workspace, the Designer retrieves the object
from the repository. If the object is a shortcut or contains a shortcut, the Designer retrieves and displays the
most recent version of the shortcut.
For example, if you open a folder to view a shortcut to a source or a mapping using that shortcut, the
Designer displays the most recent version of the source.
Note: When possible, the Designer uses information in memory. If the mapping was open on the client
machine, the Designer might display the version in memory rather than accessing the repository for the
latest version. To ensure you have the most recent version, perform one of the following tasks in addition to
opening metadata.
♦ Revert to saved. When you use the Designer menu command, Edit > Revert To Saved, the Designer accesses
the repository to retrieve the last-saved version of the object. If you select a shortcut or a mapping using a
shortcut and then click Edit > Revert To Saved, the Designer displays the last-saved version of the object in
the workspace.
♦ Close the folder or close all tools. To ensure you have correct shortcut information, you can clear the
Designer memory by closing the folder or closing all tools (Repository > Close All Tools) then reopening the
folder or tool.
For example, a mapping includes a shortcut named Shortcut_To_FIL_InsertChanged. This shortcut points to a
reusable transformation named FIL_InsertChanged. Another user edits the filter condition in the original
transformation, FIL_InsertChanged, and saves changes to the repository. When you open the mapping in the
Designer, it retrieves the mapping from the repository. It also retrieves information for
Shortcut_To_FIL_InsertChanged (and any other shortcuts used in the mapping). To validate the mapping,
click Mappings > Validate.
However, if the mapping is in memory, the Designer uses the version in memory. To ensure you have the
correct version, click Edit > Revert to Saved. Designer displays the mapping with the latest shortcut properties.
To validate the mapping, click Mappings > Validate.

52 Chapter 5: Local and Global Shortcuts

Copying a Shortcut
You can copy a shortcut to other folders. When the Designer copies a shortcut, it creates another shortcut in the
new folder. The new shortcut points to the original object used by the original shortcut.
The Designer cannot copy a shortcut when it cannot find the object that the shortcut references. This might
occur if, for example, you copy a local shortcut from one repository to an unrelated repository.
When the Designer cannot successfully copy a shortcut, it creates a copy of the shortcut object. The copy of the
shortcut object is identical to the original object the shortcut references. Unlike an actual shortcut, the copy
will not inherit any changes to the original object. Use the copy of the shortcut as you would the original
object. However, if the object is a source definition, you might need to rename the source definition.
The following table lists the results of copying global and local shortcuts to different repositories:

Shortcut
Shortcut Type Copied to Designer Creates...
Location

Local shortcut Standalone Another folder, Local shortcut to original object

repository same repository

Local shortcut Local repository Another folder, Local shortcut to original object
same repository

Local shortcut Local repository Different local repository, Copy of the shortcut object
same domain*

Global shortcut Local repository Different local repository, Global shortcut to original
same domain* object

Global shortcut Local repository Different repository, Copy of the shortcut object
different domain*

Local shortcut Global repository Local repository, Global shortcut to original

same domain object

Local shortcut Global repository Different repository, Copy of the shortcut object
different domain*
* To avoid losing metadata during the copy, the code pages of both repositories must be compatible.

For example, if you copy a shortcut named Shortcut_to_Employees from one standalone repository to another,
the Designer creates a new source definition in the destination folder named Shortcut_to_Employees. This
source definition is a copy of the original shortcut, but is not a shortcut. When you use the source definition in
a mapping, the default SQL used to extract data from the source defines the source as Shortcut_to_Employees.
If the source table is named Employees in the source database, you must rename the source definition
(Employees) or enter an SQL override for the source qualifier connected to the source definition (renaming the
source table Employees) for the Integration Service to extract source data.
For example, the fourth row of the table indicates when you copy a global shortcut (a shortcut to an object in a
global repository) from one local repository to another local repository in the same domain, the Designer
creates a global shortcut to the object in the global repository.

Renaming Source Qualifiers to Shortcut Sources

By default, shortcuts are named after their original object, Shortcut_To_ObjectName. If you create a shortcut to
a source and you have enabled the Mapping Designer option to create source qualifiers, the Mapping Designer
creates a source qualifier based on the source name. If you do not change the name of the source shortcut, the
resulting source qualifier is named SQ/ESQ/NRM_Shortcut_To_SourceName. Despite the name, however, the
source qualifier is not a shortcut.
Tip: If names of source qualifiers created for shortcut sources cause confusion, you might want to rename those
source qualifiers.

Working with Shortcuts 53

Tips
Keep shared objects in centralized folders.
This keeps maintenance simple. This also simplifies the process of copying folders into a production repository.

Create shortcuts to finalized objects.

Changes to an object referenced by shortcuts can invalidate the mappings or mapplets using the shortcut and
any sessions using these objects. To avoid invalidating repository objects, create shortcuts objects in their
finalized version.

After editing a referenced object, make sure affected mappings are still valid.
If you need to edit an object referenced by a shortcut, use the Analyze Dependencies feature in the Repository
Manager to view affected mappings. After editing the object, see if the changes invalidate the listed mappings.
To ensure a mapping is valid, open and validate it in the Designer.

Refresh views of shortcuts when working in a multiuser environment.

To refresh a shortcut in the workspace, click Edit > Revert To Saved. You can also use Repository > Close All
Tools in the destination folder then reopen the workspace.

Troubleshooting
The following message appears in the Designer status bar when I try to create a shortcut: “The selected folder is not
open.”
You try to create a shortcut from a shared folder to a folder that is not open. Open the destination folder by
opening at least one tool in the folder or by clicking Folder > Open before creating the shortcut.

When I try to create a shortcut, the Designer creates a copy instead.

This can occur when one of the following is true:
♦ The object is not saved in the repository. You can create shortcuts to objects that are in the repository. Save
the object to the repository, and then try creating the shortcut again.
♦ You try to create a shortcut for an object in a non-shared folder. You can create shortcuts to objects in shared
folders.
♦ You hold down the Ctrl key when dragging the object. To create a shortcut, drag the object without holding
down any additional keys.
♦ You try to create a shortcut between two local repositories, or between two repositories that are not in the
same domain. You can create a shortcut between repositories in the same domain. In addition, you can
create a shortcut in a local repository, referencing an object in a global repository. You cannot create a
shortcut in a global repository that references an object in the local repository.
♦ You drag an object from a shared folder in the global repository to a folder in the local repository, but you
are connecting to the repositories separately. To create a global shortcut, you must connect to one repository
and then connect to the second repository through the first repository.

54 Chapter 5: Local and Global Shortcuts

CHAPTER 6

Working with Versioned Objects

This chapter includes the following topics:
♦ Overview, 55
♦ Working with Version Properties, 58
♦ Tracking Changes to Versioned Objects, 60
♦ Checking Out and Checking In Objects, 62
♦ Deleting and Recovering Objects, 64
♦ Purging Versions of Objects, 65

Overview
If you have the team-based development option, you can configure the repository to store multiple versions of
objects. You can configure a repository for versioning when you create it, or you can upgrade an existing
repository to support versioned objects. With object versioning, you can store copies of previous versions of
objects in development, track changes to those objects, and prepare them for deployment to a production
environment.
A versioned repository assigns multiple version numbers to versions of the same object. Each time you check in
an object, the repository increments the version number by one and stores a new version of the object in the
repository database. A repository enabled for versioning can store multiple versions of the following objects:
♦ Sources
♦ Targets
♦ Transformations
♦ Mappings
♦ Mapplets
♦ Sessions
♦ Tasks
♦ Workflows
♦ Worklets
♦ User-defined functions
♦ Session configurations
♦ Schedulers
♦ Cubes

55
 ♦ Dimensions
You can complete the following tasks when you work with a versioned object:
♦ View object version properties. Each versioned object has a set of version properties and a status. You can
also configure the status of a folder to freeze all objects it contains or make them active for editing.
♦ Track changes to an object. You can view a history that includes all versions of a given object, and compare
any version of the object in the history to any other version. With the history, you can determine changes
made to an object over time.
♦ Check out or check in the versioned object. You can check out an object to reserve it while you edit the
object. When you check in an object, the repository saves a new version of the object, and you can add
comments to the version. You can also find objects checked out by yourself and other users.
♦ View multiple versions of an object in the workspace. You can view multiple versions of an object in the
workspace of the Designer and Workflow Manager.
♦ Apply labels to objects. You can create labels to associate with any versioned object or group of versioned
objects in a repository. Use labels to track versioned objects during development, improve query results, and
associate groups of objects for deployment or import and export. For more information, see “Creating and
Editing Labels” on page 71.
♦ Group objects for deployment. You can create groups of versioned objects to deploy to another repository
or folder. Use the result set from an object query to group objects for deployment. Or, you can create a static
group of objects for deployment. For more information, see “Deployment Groups” on page 87.
♦ Delete or purge the object version. You can delete an object from view and continue to store it in the
repository. You can recover, or undelete, deleted objects. If you want to permanently remove an object
version, you can purge it from the repository.
You can perform these tasks in the Repository Manager, Designer, and Workflow Manager.

Sample Scenario
You are working in an environment that includes a development repository and a production repository. You
create and test metadata in the development repository and then deploy it to the production repository. While
working in the development repository, you want to exclusively edit objects, retain older versions, and freeze
the folder when you are finished with development to prevent further changes to the objects it contains.

Creating the Initial Version

You use the Designer to create a mapping, including source definition, target definition, and transformations.
While you are working with the mapping, the repository locks the object for your use. Other users are unable to
edit the objects you have checked out.
When the mapping is ready to test, you check it in to the repository. When you check in the mapping, the
repository creates a new version of the object and assigns it a version number. The first time you check in the
object, the repository assigns it version number one. You also include comments with the checked-in version,
noting that it is the initial version of the mapping.

Creating Successive Versions

After creating a session and workflow and testing the initial version of the mapping, you edit the mapping based
on the results of the tests. When you finish editing the mapping, you check it in to commit changes to a new
version. Each time you check in the mapping, the repository creates a new version and increments the version
number by one.

Applying Labels and Deploying Objects

After you finish editing the mapping, you want to move it to the production repository. To track the versioned
object, you apply a label to it. You apply this label to all the objects that you are ready to deploy to the target
repository. You create a query to identify all objects that use the deployment label, and associate this query with
a dynamic deployment group. When you run the dynamic deployment group, the query groups objects that use

56 Chapter 6: Working with Versioned Objects

 the label. Later, you use the Copy Deployment Group Wizard to deploy this group of objects to the production
repository.

RELATED TOPICS:
♦ Labels, 71

♦ Deployment Groups, 87

Deleting and Purging an Object

You want to remove a transformation instance from the mapping. When you delete the transformation, it no
longer appears in the Navigator window, but the repository retains all versions of the transformation in the
repository database.
You do not need to use this transformation any more. You purge all versions of the transformation,
permanently removing them from the repository and freeing up space in the repository database.

Freezing a Folder
After you finish developing and testing the metadata, you decide to freeze the folder. Freezing the folder
prevents other users from checking out objects. You decide to freeze the folder and allow deployment of objects
in the folder.
Later, a query locates the object in the repository and includes it in a dynamic deployment group. The
deployment group specifies objects in the development repository you want to put into production.

RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “Deleting and Recovering Objects” on page 64

Viewing Results View Windows

You can query the repository for information about versioned objects. You can view results for the following
types of versioned objects:
♦ Object dependencies. View object dependencies to see the impact of changing or deleting an object. For
more information about viewing object dependencies, see “Viewing Object Dependencies” on page 24.
♦ Object queries. You can search the repository for versioned objects that meet conditions you specify. For
more information about viewing object queries, see “Object Queries Overview” on page 75.
♦ Checked-out objects. You can view objects you and other users have checked out. For more information
about viewing checked-out objects, see “Checking Out and Checking In Objects” on page 62.
♦ Object histories. Object histories allow you to see the changes made to the object. For more information
about viewing object histories, see “Tracking Changes to Versioned Objects” on page 60.
To switch between open results view windows, click Window > Results View List.

Customizing Results View Windows

The columns of a results view window show the properties of objects in the window. You can specify the
columns that appear in the results view window, and you can change the order of the columns. You can also
choose the display font for the elements of the results view window.

Overview 57
 To customize a results view window:

1. Open the results view window that you want to customize.

Click View > Options to modify the display options.

Add a column.

Remove a column.

Change the order of

columns.

2. To add a column to the results view window, select the object property in the Available list and click the
Move button. The object property moves to the Selected list.
3. To remove a column from the results view window, select the object property in the Selected list and click
the Remove button. The object property moves to the Available list.
4. To change the order of the columns in the results view window, select an object property in the Selected
list and click the up or down arrow.
5. To change the font of a results view window element, complete the following steps:
♦ Select a category and click Change.
♦ Select the font settings in the Font dialog box and click OK.
6. In the Options dialog box, click OK.
Note: By default, the timestamp that appears in results view windows shows the last-saved time for an object.
You can also display the checkout time and the checkin time by moving those properties from the Available list
to the Selected list in the results view window display options.

Working with Version Properties

When you enable version control in a repository, you allow the repository to store multiple copies of the same
object as you make changes and save it. The repository assigns each copy, or version, of the object a version
number. Each time you check in an object, the repository creates a new version and increments the version
number by one.
By default, the Navigator and workspace always display the latest version of an object. You can view the version
history of an object or create a query to search for previous versions of an object. If you rename an object during
development, different versions of the same object may have different names.
Every version of an object takes up approximately the same amount of space in the repository database. To
conserve space, you can purge older object versions.

58 Chapter 6: Working with Versioned Objects

Viewing Version Properties
Use the Designer, Workflow Manager, or Repository Manager to view the version properties of an object. You
can view the version properties, labels applied to the version, and the status of the object in the Properties
dialog box.
To access the object properties, select the object in the Navigator and click View > Properties. Alternatively,
right-click the object in the Main window or Navigator and click Properties. In a versioned repository, the
Properties dialog box for a versioned object has the following tabs: Object, Version, Labels, and Object Status.
In a non-versioned repository, the Properties dialog box displays the Object Status tab.

Object Properties
The Object tab of the Properties dialog box shows the object properties. Object properties are associated with
the object when you create it. You can also view the current object version number and whether the object is
checked out.

Version Properties
On the Version tab, you can view properties that are specific to the latest version of the object. This includes
the version number, the user and host that created the version, and any comments associated with the version.

Labels Properties
On the Labels tab, you can view all labels applied to the object. For each label, you can also view the name of
the user who applied the label, the time the label was applied, and comments associated with the label.

Object Status Properties

On the Object Status tab, you can view the current status of the object. In the Repository Manager, you can
also change the object status on this tab.
The object status defines what actions you and other users can perform on the object. An object can have one of
the following statuses:
♦ Active. You and other users can edit the object.
♦ Deleted. The object is marked as deleted and is not visible in the Navigator. You can find a deleted object
through a query.
You can manually change the status of an object from the Repository Manager.

Changing Object Status

You can change the status of individual repository objects from the Repository Manager. Each version of an
object maintains its own status. You must check in the object for other users to view changes to the object
status. This is true even if you delete the object.
If you change the status of an object from Active to Deleted, the repository removes the object from view. No
other objects can use or reference the deleted object. You can recover a deleted object by changing its status
from Deleted to Active.
You can change the status of an object when you view object history, query results, object dependencies,
deployment group contents, or checkouts. To change object status, complete the following steps.

To change the status of an object:

1. In the Repository Manager, right-click the object in the Navigator and click Versioning > View History.
The View History window appears.

Working with Version Properties 59

 2. Select the latest version of the object, and click Tools > View Properties.
The object properties appear.
3. In the Properties dialog box, click the Object Status tab.
4. From the Object Status list, select a status for the object.
5. Click OK.
6. Check in the object for other users to view changes to the status.
You can also change the status of folders in the repository.

Changing Folder Status

To configure operations that users can perform, you can change the folder status. To change the folder status,
edit the folder in the Repository Manager. You can configure a folder with one of the following statuses:
♦ Active. This status allows users to check out versioned objects in the folder.
♦ Frozen, Allow Deploy to Replace. This status prevents users from checking out objects in the folder.
Deployment into the folder creates new versions of the objects.
♦ Frozen, Do Not Allow Deploy to Replace. This status prevents users from checking out objects in the
folder. You cannot deploy objects into this folder.
You might change the status of a folder to serve different purposes depending on the configuration of the
environment and the development processes. For example, an environment uses a development repository for
creating and testing metadata, and it uses a production repository for running the workflows and sessions. In
the development repository, you might change the status of a folder from active to Frozen-Do Not Allow
Deploy to Replace in a code freeze situation. This prevents other users from checking out objects in the folder
and creating new versions. Both of the Frozen statuses allow the Repository Manager to add objects in the
folder to a deployment group.
In the production repository, you might change the status of a folder from active to Frozen-Allow Deploy to
Replace to ensure that copy deployment group operations successfully complete. The Frozen-Allow Deploy to
Replace status prevents other users from checking out objects in the folder, but it allows the Copy Deployment
Group operation to create new versions of objects. The Frozen-Do Not Allow Deploy to Replace status
prevents the Copy Deployment Group operation from creating new versions of the objects.
Note: Before you change the status of a folder, you might want to verify that other users do not have objects in
the folder checked out.

Tracking Changes to Versioned Objects

A repository enabled for version control maintains an audit trail of version history. It stores multiple versions of
an object as you check it out, modify it, and check it in. As the number of versions, you may want to view the
object version history. You may want to view version history for the following reasons:
♦ Determine versions that are obsolete and no longer necessary to store in the repository.
♦ Troubleshoot changes in functionality between different versions of metadata.
To accomplish tasks like these, you can view a history of all of the versions of an object stored in the repository.
You can also compare two versions of an object displayed in the history.

Viewing Object History

The history of an object is a record of all of the versions of an object stored in the repository, going back to the
initial version, version number one. You can view user changes to an object, the date and time of changes, and
comments associated with and labels applied to each version. If you or another user purges a version from the

60 Chapter 6: Working with Versioned Objects

 repository, the object history retains a record of the version in the object history and specifies the user who
purged the version.
You can view object history in the Designer, Repository Manager, and Workflow Manager.
To view object version history in the Repository Manager, right-click the object in the Main window or the
Navigator and click Versioning > View History.
Use the following methods to view the object version history in the Designer or Workflow Manager:
♦ Right-click the object in the Navigator and click Versioning > View History.
♦ Right-click the object in the workspace and click Versioning > View History.
♦ Select the object in the workspace and click Versioning > View History from the menu.
When you click View History, the View History window displays the object version history.
The following figure shows the View History window:

The following table lists additional tasks you can perform from the View History window:

Task Description

Compare versions. Compare the selected object with the previous checked-in version.

View version properties. View the object and version properties of the selected object.

Apply or remove a label. Apply a label to a versioned object or a group of versioned objects.

Purge object version. Purge individual versions of objects.

Perform an advanced purge. Purge obsolete versions of objects based on purge criteria.

Add versioned object to deployment Add an object or a group of objects to a deployment group.
group.

View object dependencies. View dependencies for the selected object.

Check in object or undo checkout. Check in or undo the checkout for the selected object.

Save object version history to a file. To save the object version history to an HTML file, click File > Save to
File.

Export object version to an XML file. Export the object version to an XML file.

Comparing Versions
When you view the version history of an object, you can compare two selected versions of the object. When you
compare two versions of an object, the PowerCenter Client displays the attributes of each object.

Tracking Changes to Versioned Objects 61

 To compare two versions of an object, select the versions that you want to compare in the object history and
click Tools > Compare > Selected Versions. Alternatively, select one version and click Tools > Compare >
Previous Version.

Checking Out and Checking In Objects

When you work with versioned objects, you must check out an object each time you want to change it, and save
it when you want to commit the changes to the repository. You must check in the object to allow other users to
make changes to it. Checking in an object adds a new version to the object history.
An object is in read-only mode until you or another user checks it out. When you view an object that is in read-
only mode, it is available for other users to check in or check out. If another user checks out or checks in an
object that you are viewing in read-only mode, a message appears in the Notifications tab of the Output
window. If another user has an object checked out, you can open the object as read-only. To update the view of
an object with the latest version of the object, select the object in the Navigator, and then click View > Refresh.
You can check out and check in objects in the Designer, Repository Manager, and Workflow Manager.

Checking Out Objects

To edit an object, you must check out the object. When you check out an object, the repository obtains a write-
intent lock on the object. No other users can edit the object when you have it checked out. If you disconnect
from the repository and do not save the object, it remains checked out to you, but you lose the changes you
made to it.
Note: An object is checked out by default when you create, copy, replace, or import it.

To check out an object:

1. Select the object you want to check out.

2. Click Versioning > Check Out.
3. In the Check Out dialog box, enter an optional comment in the comment field.
4. Click OK to check out the object, or Apply to All to apply the checkout comment to multiple objects.

Viewing Checked-Out Objects

You can view objects you and other users have checked out. You might want to view checkouts to check in all of
the objects you have checked out or to see if an object is available for you to check out.
You can narrow or broaden the search for checked-out objects in the following ways:
♦ By folder. Search for checkouts in the selected folder, or search all folders in the repository.
♦ By user. Search for objects you checked out, or search for objects checked out by all users in the repository.

62 Chapter 6: Working with Versioned Objects

 To view checkouts:

1. In the Designer, Workflow Manager, or Repository Manager, click Versioning > Find Checkouts.

Specify folders.

Specify users.

2. Select options to narrow or broaden the search, and click OK.

The View Checkouts window appears. The results depend on the options you select for the search.
The following table lists additional tasks you can perform from the View Checkouts window:

Task Description

Compare versions. Compare the selected checkout with the previous checked-in
version.

View version properties. View the object and version properties of the checkout.

View object dependencies. View dependencies for the selected checkout.

Check in object or undo checkout. Check in or undo checkout for the selected unmodified
checkouts.

Save object version history to a file. To save the version history to an HTML file, click File > Save to
File.

View object history. View the object version history for the selected checkout.

Export object version to an XML file. Export the version to an XML file.

Undoing a Checkout
When you undo a checkout, the repository releases the write-intent lock on the object and removes the
checkout version from the repository. The most recently checked-in version of the object becomes the latest
version of the object.
You can undo a checkout from the View History, View Checkouts, and Query Results windows.
To undo a checkout, select the checked-out object and click Versioning > Undo Checkout.

Checking In Objects
You must save an object before you can check it in. When you check in an object, the repository creates a new
version of the object and assigns it a version number. The repository increments the version number when you
check in an object. You must check in an object to purge it.
If you save an object without checking it in, the changes are committed to the repository, and the object
remains checked out until you check it in. You can check in objects from the Designer, Workflow Manager, or
Repository Manager.
You can also check in an object from the View History, View Checkouts, View Dependencies, and Query
Results windows.

Checking Out and Checking In Objects 63

 To check in an object:

1. Select the object or objects.

2. Click Versioning > Check in.
3. In the Check In dialog box, enter a comment in the comment field
4. Click OK to check in the object or Apply to All to apply the comment to multiple objects.
When you check in an object, the repository creates a new version of the object and increments the version
number by one.

Checking Out and Checking In Composite Objects

Use the following rules and guidelines when you check out and check in composite objects:
♦ The Repository Service does not check out or check in reusable objects when you check out or check in a
composite parent object, such as a mapping. For example, if you want to check out a mapping and all objects
used in the mapping, you must check out all mapplets and reusable transformations individually.
♦ The Repository Service treats non-reusable objects as part of the parent object, so you cannot check out or
check in individual non-reusable objects. For example, if you have a mapping that contains a non-reusable
Aggregator transformation, you cannot check out the Aggregator transformation individually. When you
check out the parent mapping, the Repository Service checks out the non-reusable Aggregator
transformation.
♦ When you check out or check in cubes, the child objects (the fact tables) are also checked out or checked in.
Likewise, when you check out or check in dimensions, the child objects (the levels) are checked out or
checked in.
♦ You can check out or check in scheduler objects in the Workflow Manager or the Repository Manager:
− In the Workflow Manager, run an object query. You can also check out a scheduler object in the
Scheduler Browser window when you edit the object. However, you must run an object query to check in
the object.
− In the Repository Manager, run an object query. You can also select the Schedulers node in the Navigator
and then check out objects from the Main window.
♦ You can check out or check in session configuration objects in the Workflow Manager:
− In the Workflow Manager, run an object query. You can also click Tasks > Session Configuration and
then check out objects from the Session Config Browser window.
− In the Repository Manager, run an object query. Or, select the Configurations node in the Navigator and
then check out objects from the Main window.

Deleting and Recovering Objects

When you delete an object in a versioned repository, the repository removes the object from view in the
Navigator and the workspace but does not remove it from the repository database. Instead, the repository
creates a new version of the object and changes the object status to Deleted. You can recover a deleted object by
changing its status to Active.

Deleting a Versioned Object

You can delete a versioned object in the Designer or Workflow Manager. When you delete a versioned object,
the repository changes the object status to Deleted and removes the object from view in the Navigator and
workspace. After you delete an object, you must check it in for other users to view the changed status. Check in
a deleted object in the Find Checkouts dialog box.

64 Chapter 6: Working with Versioned Objects

 You can check out an object before you delete it to keep it as a current checkout object. You can also delete
objects without first checking them out. In the Options dialog box, enable the option to delete objects without
checkout. When you delete an object, the Repository Service checks out the object to you and then deletes it.
When you delete a composite object that contains non-reusable objects, the Repository Service treats the non-
reusable objects as part of the parent object and deletes them. For example, when you delete a mapping, the
Repository Service deletes all of the non-reusable child objects associated with the mapping.
The repository retains the metadata information for all versions of a deleted object. To permanently remove the
object from the repository, you must purge it.

Recovering a Deleted Object

You can recover a deleted object by changing the object status to Active. This makes the object visible in the
Navigator and workspace. Use a query to search for deleted objects.
You use the Repository Manager to recover deleted objects. Complete the following steps to recover a deleted
object:
1. Create and run a query to search for deleted objects in the repository. You can search for all objects marked
as deleted, or add conditions to narrow the search. Include the following condition when you query the
repository for deleted objects:
Version Status Is Equal To Deleted

2. Change the status of the object you want to recover from Deleted to Active.
3. If the recovered object has the same name as another object that you created after you deleted the recovered
object, you must rename the object.

Purging Versions of Objects

You can purge specific versions of objects, or you can purge all versions of objects.
To permanently remove an object version from the repository, you must purge it. You need to check in object
versions to purge them. You might want to purge a version if you no longer need it and you want to reduce the
size of the repository database.
You can purge multiple versions of an object from the repository at the same time. To completely purge an
object from the repository, you must purge all versions. If you purge a version that is not the latest version, the
repository keeps a record of the purge in the object history. If you purge the latest version, the repository does
not keep a record of the purge.
You can revert to an older version of an object by purging more recent versions. You cannot, however, promote
an older version to the current version without purging the more recent versions. For example, you create 12
versions of a mapping. You then determine that you need to use version 10 of the mapping instead of
version 12. You can purge versions 11 and 12 to make version 10 the current version.
You use the Repository Manager to purge versions. When you purge versions of objects, you can perform the
following tasks:
♦ Purge individual object versions. You can select object versions in the View History window or Query
Results window to purge the individual object versions. For more information, see “Purging Individual
Object Versions” on page 66.
♦ Purge versions based on criteria. You can purge versions at the repository, folder, or object level based on
purge criteria. This type of purge is called an advanced purge. Use advanced purges to purge deleted or
active objects. For deleted objects, you can specify the objects to purge based on the date of deletion. For
active objects, you specify the versions to purge based on the version number, the check-in date, or both. For
more information, see “Purging Versions Based on Criteria” on page 66.

Purging Versions of Objects 65

 ♦ Preview purge results. Preview an advanced purge to view the purge results before you purge objects from
the repository. You can view summary or detailed information about the purge. For more information, see
“Previewing Purge Results” on page 68.
♦ Purge composite objects. You can purge versions of composite objects, and you can purge versions of
dependent objects that make up composite objects. View object dependencies before you purge composite
objects. You might get unexpected results if you do not determine the dependent object versions that a
purge affects. For more information, see “Purging Composite Objects” on page 68.
The following table shows the Repository Manager commands that you can use to purge versions at the object,
folder, or repository level:

Versions at
Single Object Multiple Object Versions at
Purge Type Repository
Version Versions Folder Level
Level

By Object Version X X
(View History Window)

By Object Version X X
(Query Results Window)

Based on Criteria X X X X
(Navigator)

Based on Criteria X X
(View History Window)

Based on Criteria X X
(Query Results window)

Purging Individual Object Versions

You can select individual versions of objects in the View History window or the Query Results window to purge
the versions.

To purge individual object versions:

1. Select an object in the Navigator, and click Versioning > View History.
-or-
Click Tools > Query, and run a query from the Query Browser.
2. In the results window, select the object versions to purge.
3. Click Tools > Purge Object Version.
4. In the confirmation message, click Yes.
5. Click OK.
Warning: When you purge an object version, you might invalidate dependent objects.

RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “Purging Composite Objects” on page 68

Purging Versions Based on Criteria

In the Repository Manager, you can purge object versions based on criteria. This type of purge is called an
advanced purge. You can purge object versions at the repository, folder, or object level.
When you purge versions based on criteria, you can perform the following tasks:
♦ Purge versions of deleted objects. Purge versions of checked-in deleted objects to permanently remove the
versions from the repository. You can purge all checked-in deleted objects, or you can purge objects that
were deleted before a specified date. When you purge deleted objects, you purge all versions of the objects.

66 Chapter 6: Working with Versioned Objects

♦ Purge versions of active objects. Purge specified checked-in versions of active objects. Active objects are
undeleted objects and deleted objects that are not checked in. When you purge versions of active objects,
you specify the number of versions to keep, a purge cutoff time, or both. If you specify a number of versions
to keep and a purge cutoff time, you purge versions that meet both conditions.
♦ Preview versions before purging. Before you purge versions based on criteria, you can preview the purge
results to verify that the purge criteria produces the expected results.
Note: When you purge versions based on criteria, you cannot purge a dependent object version if it is used in an
unpurged composite object.
The following table describes the options in the Advanced Purge window:

Option Description

Purge Deleted Purges versions of checked-in deleted objects. Select All to purge versions of all
Objects deleted objects in a repository or folder, or select Older Than to purge versions of
objects deleted before an end time. You can specify the end time either as the number
of days before the current date or in MM/DD/YYYY HH24:MI:SS format.

Purge Active Purges specified versions of active objects. Select Older Than the Last n Versions to
Objects specify the number of latest checked-in versions to keep. For example, select 6 to purge
all versions except the last six checked-in versions. If the object is checked out, you
also retain the checked-out version. Select Older Than and specify a number of days or
a date and time to purge versions that were checked in before a specified time.

Save Purge List Output file to save information about purged object versions. Default is disabled.

Summary Only Saves summary information in the purge output file and displays summary information
in purge previews. Disable to view detailed information about each object version.
Default is enabled.

The amount of time that the Repository Service takes to purge versions depends on the size of the repository,
the number of deleted and old objects, and the composite objects that are affected. For optimal performance,
purge at the folder level or use purge criteria to reduce the number of purged object versions. Avoid purging all
deleted objects or all older versions at the repository level.

To purge versions based on criteria:

1. Connect to a repository and then select it in the Navigator to purge versions at the repository level.
-or-
Select a folder to purge versions from the folder.
-or-
Select one or more objects to purge objects based on criteria.
Note: You can also use the View History window or the Query Results window to purge based on criteria.
Select one or more objects in the window, and click Tools > Advanced Purge.
2. Click Versioning > Advanced Purge.
Alternatively, right-click the repository or folder and select Advanced Purge, or right-click the selected
objects and click Versioning > Advanced Purge.
3. To purge deleted objects, select Deleted Objects, and then specify whether to purge all deleted objects or
objects deleted before an end date.
-or-
To purge active objects, select Active Objects, and then specify the versions to keep, the purge cutoff, or
both. After you purge an object version, you cannot retrieve it. To ensure that you can revert to past
versions, avoid purging all versions of an object.
4. Optionally, click Save Purge List to create an output file for the purge information.
5. Optionally, choose to view and save summary information instead of detailed purge information.

Purging Versions of Objects 67

 6. Optionally, click Preview to preview the purge.
7. Click Purge to purge the deleted objects.
Tip: When you use an advanced purge to purge deleted objects, you purge all versions of the objects. To keep
recent versions of deleted objects and purge older versions, define a query that returns the deleted objects.
Then, use the pmrep PurgeVersion command with the -q option to retrieve the deleted objects and specify the
versions to purge.

Previewing Purge Results

Before you purge versions based on criteria, you might want to preview the purge results. When you preview
purge results, check the purge criteria before you purge versions from the repository. Also, review the affected
object versions to verify that the Repository Service removes the obsolete versions and retains the versions that
you want to keep.
When you preview a purge, you can view summary or detailed information about the purge.
To preview a purge, configure the purge criteria for an advanced purge. Choose to view and save summary or
detailed information. Then, click Preview.
In the Preview window, you can click Purge to proceed with the purge, or you can click Cancel to close the
Preview window without purging. Click Save To File to save the purge preview results to an output file.

Purging Composite Objects

When you purge versions based on criteria, the purged objects might include composite objects such as
mappings or workflows. Before you purge a composite object, you need to consider object dependencies.
Object dependencies can affect the way that dependent reusable objects are purged.
If you purge a composite object that consists of non-reusable dependent objects, you also purge the non-
reusable dependent objects. If you purge a composite object that contains reusable dependent objects, you
purge the dependent object versions if they are not used in another composite object.
You cannot purge a version of a dependent object if it is used in a version of a composite object that you do not
purge. Also, if you cannot purge a particular version of an object, you cannot purge more recent versions of that
object, even if the more recent versions are not used in composite objects.
This section provides two examples that show how dependencies can affect purges of active objects. The first
example describes a frequently modified composite object with rarely updated dependent objects. The second
example describes a composite object with few versions but frequently modified dependent objects.
Tip: View dependencies before you purge an object to determine if a dependency might affect the versions that
you purge.

Example of a Frequently Checked-Out Composite Object

You update the mapping m_Payroll often, and you frequently check it in and out. Five checked-in versions of
the mapping exist. You rarely modify the source and target objects in the mapping. There are three checked-in
versions of the source and one checked-in version of the target.
At the repository level, you purge versions based on criteria, and you indicate that you want to keep the last two
checked-in versions of objects.
The following figure shows the history of versions 1 through 5 of the mapping:
m_Payroll m_Payroll m_Payroll m_Payroll m_Payroll
v1* v2* v3* v4 v5

Source Target Source Target Source Target Source Target Source Target
v1* v1 v2 v1 v2 v1 v2 v1 v3 v1

*Indicates purged versions.

68 Chapter 6: Working with Versioned Objects

 The advanced purge produces the following results:

Object Purged Versions

Mapping m_Payroll Versions 1 through 3, assuming that no Session task or other composite object uses
m_Payroll.

Source Version 1. Because you purge the version of m_Payroll that uses source version 1, you
also purge that version of the source. The purge keeps the last two checked-in versions
of objects, so you do not purge versions 2 and 3 of the source.

Target None. The purge keeps the last two checked-in versions of objects. Only one checked-
in version of the target exists.

Example of a Rarely Checked-Out Composite Object

You rarely check in and check out the mapping m_PhoneList. Two checked-in versions of the mapping exist.
However, you frequently check in and out the reusable transformation in the mapping. The transformation is a
Filter transformation named FIL_Tr. It has six versions.
At the repository level, you purge versions based on criteria, and you specify that you want to keep only the
latest checked-in version of objects.
The following figure shows the history of the mapping and transformation versions:
m_PhoneList m_PhoneList m_PhoneList m_PhoneList m_PhoneList
v1* v2 v2 v2 v2

FIL_Tr FIL_Tr FIL_Tr FIL_Tr FIL_Tr FIL_Tr

v1* v2 v3** v4 v5 v6

*Indicates purged versions.

**The mapping does not use version 3 of the transformation.

The advanced purge produces the following results:

Object Purged Versions

Mapping m_PhoneList Version 1, assuming that no Session task or other composite object uses
m_PhoneList.

Transformation FIL_Tr Version 1. You do not purge versions 2, 4, 5, and 6 of the transformation, because
version 2 of m_PhoneList uses those transformation object versions. You do not
purge version 3 of the transformation, because you retain version 2, which is an
older version.

Note: If you cannot purge an older version of an object, the Repository Service retains all newer versions of the
object during an advanced purge.

Rules and Guidelines for Purging Versions of Objects

Use the following rules and guidelines when you purge versions of objects:
♦ If you purge the latest version of an object and the preceding version has a different name, the preceding
version takes the name of purged version. For example, you have the source src_Records. The latest version
is named src_Records, but the name of the preceding version in the history is src_RecordsWeekly. If you
purge the latest version, the name of the preceding version becomes src_Records.
♦ When you purge an individual version of a dependent object, you render composite objects invalid if they
use the dependent object version. Verify object dependencies before purging individual object versions.
♦ In an advanced purge of an active object, you cannot purge a version of a dependent object if it is used in an
unpurged version of a composite object.
♦ In an advanced purge of an active object, if you specify a number of versions to keep, you keep the latest
checked-in version, even if it was checked in after the purge cutoff time. If the number of versions to keep is
greater than the number of object versions, you keep all object versions.

Purging Versions of Objects 69

70 Chapter 6: Working with Versioned Objects
CHAPTER 7

Labels
This chapter includes the following topics:
♦ Overview, 71
♦ Creating and Editing Labels, 71
♦ Applying Labels, 72

Overview
A label is a global object that you can associate with any versioned object or group of versioned objects in a
repository. You may want to apply labels to versioned objects to achieve the following results:
♦ Track versioned objects during development.
♦ Improve query results.
♦ Associate groups of objects for deployment.
♦ Associate groups of objects for import and export.
For example, you might apply a label to sources, targets, mappings, and sessions associated with a workflow so
that you can deploy the workflow to another repository without breaking any dependency.
You can apply the label to multiple versions of an object. Or you can specify that you can apply the label to one
version of the object.
You can create and modify labels in the Label Browser. From the Repository Manager, click Versioning >
Labels to browse for a label.

Creating and Editing Labels

When you create or edit a label, you can specify the label name and add comments.
You can also lock the label, which prevents other users from editing or applying the label. You lock a label to
limit access to the label or ensure you apply a label once. For example, you might want to apply a label to a
group of objects to indicate that you tested the objects and are ready to deploy them. After you apply the label,
you can lock it to prevent users from editing the label or applying the label to other objects.

71
 Creating a Label
To create a label, click Versioning > Labels from the Repository Manager to open the Label Browser.
Note: Click a column heading to sort labels by that column.

Click New to open the Label Editor. Select from the options in the Label Editor to create a label object.

Editing a Label
When you edit a label object, you can edit the name or the comments associated with it, or you can lock the
label to prevent other users from editing or applying the label. When you delete a label, the Repository Service
permanently deletes all instances of the label that have been applied to versioned objects.
To edit a label, click Edit in the Label Editor, and select the options to change.

Applying Labels
You can apply one or more labels to any versioned object in the repository. You can select any label you have
execute permissions for. You can also apply the label to selected dependent objects. For example, if you want to
group dependencies for a workflow, you can label all child objects. The Repository Service applies labels to
sources, targets, mappings, and tasks associated with the workflow.
If you deploy objects to multiple repositories, you can apply the label to global shortcut dependencies. When
you deploy labels to global shortcut dependencies, you can apply the label to dependent objects in a global
repository from a local repository. You can also apply the label to dependent objects in all registered local
repositories in a global repository.
You can apply labels to objects when you complete one of the following tasks from the Designer, Workflow
Manager, or Repository Manager:
♦ View the history of an object. When you view the history of an object, click Tools > Labels > Apply Label
from the View History window.
♦ Create an object query. When you run an object query, click Tools > Labels > Apply Label from the Query
Results window.
Alternatively, you can apply labels by selecting Versioning > Apply Labels in the Repository Manager. In the
Repository Manager, you open the Label Wizard. You can apply labels to groups of objects in the Label Wizard.
Table 7-1 describes the label options:

Table 7-1. Label Options and Description

Label Options Description

Move Label Moves the label from a previous version of the object to the latest version of the
object. If the Repository Service detects the label is applied to another version of the
same object, you can move the label to the selected version of the object.

Primary/Foreign Key Applies the label to the source object containing the primary key referenced by the
Dependencies foreign key in the selected source object.

Global Shortcut Applies the label to global shortcut objects. Select one of the previous options such
Dependencies as Label All Children. Select Global Shortcut Dependencies. The Repository Service
applies the label to global shortcuts that meet the conditions you specify.

Label all Children Applies the label to all repository objects that the selected object uses.

Label all Parents Applies the label to all repository objects that use the selected object.

Preview Previews the group of objects that the Repository Service applies the label to when
you apply labels to dependent objects.

72 Chapter 7: Labels
 When you apply labels to objects, you can apply a label to one version of an object at a time. For example, you
apply the Deployment label to version 1 of a mapping. When you create version 2 of this mapping, you can
move the Deployment label to version 2 of the mapping, or you can apply a different label to version 2 of the
mapping. You cannot apply the Deployment label to both versions of the mapping.
When you label parent objects, such as mappings, workflows, and worklets, you must apply the label to non-
reusable child objects. If you do not apply labels to non-reusable child objects, the labels for parent and non-
reusable child objects may not be synchronized.
When you search for an object, view an object history, or view object properties, you can view metadata for the
labels applied to an object. You can view the label owner, the timestamp when the label was applied, and the
comments you entered when you applied the label to the object.
Note: The Repository Service applies the label to objects that are checked in to the repository. You cannot apply
labels to checked-out objects.

Applying Labels to Groups of Objects

In the Repository Manager, use the Apply Label Wizard to apply a label to groups of objects. To open the
Apply Label Wizard, click Versioning > Apply Labels and click Next. You can apply labels to the following
groups of objects:
♦ One or more objects in a folder.
♦ All objects in one or more folders.
♦ All objects in one or more selected repositories.
After you select objects to label, browse to select the label to apply and choose label options. For more
information about label options, see Table 7-1 on page 72.
Click Preview to view the objects the Repository Service labels.

Applying Labels 73
74 Chapter 7: Labels
CHAPTER 8

Object Queries
This chapter includes the following topics:
♦ Object Queries Overview, 75
♦ Configuring Query Conditions, 76
♦ Running a Query, 82
♦ Sample Queries, 83
♦ Troubleshooting, 85

Object Queries Overview

An object query is a global object that you use to search for repository objects that meet specified conditions.
When you run a query, the repository returns results based on those conditions. You can run an object query to
locate versioned and non-versioned objects. You can run an object query from the Designer, Workflow
Manager, or Repository Manager.
You can create an object query to complete the following tasks:
♦ Find and maintain object relationships. Use object queries to locate parent and child dependencies,
shortcut dependencies, and primary and foreign key relationships. For more information, see “Query
Parameters” on page 77.
♦ Find groups of invalidated objects to validate. Use a query to locate invalidated objects. For more
information about validating groups of objects, see “Validating Multiple Objects” on page 28.
♦ Associate a query with a deployment group. When you create a dynamic deployment group, you can
associate an object query with it. For more information, see “Using Queries in Dynamic Deployment
Groups” on page 88.
♦ Track versioned objects during development. You can add Label, User, Last saved, or Comments
parameters to queries to track versioned objects during development. For more information, see “Query
Parameters” on page 77.
♦ Find deleted versioned objects to recover. For more information about recovering deleted versioned objects,
see “Recovering a Deleted Object” on page 65.
To create and run an object query, you configure the query conditions and run the query. Each query condition
consists of a parameter, an operator, and a value. You can add, cut, copy, paste, and move query conditions.
When you run the query, the Repository Service queries the repository and displays the results in the Query
Results window.

75
 RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “Configuring Query Conditions” on page 76

♦ “Running a Query” on page 82

Using the Query Browser

You can create, edit, run, or delete object queries in the Query Browser. You can view the list of available
queries in the Query Browser. Click Tools > Queries to browse for a query.
You can also configure permissions for the query from the Query Browser.
Note: Click a column heading to sort queries by that column.

In the Query Browser, click New or Edit to open the Query Editor. You can create, validate, and run a query in
the Query Editor. To save the query with another name, click Query > Save As.
The following figure shows the Query Editor:

Save query.

Validate
Run query.
Add a logical
operator.

Add a query
condition.

Specify
query
conditions.

When you create a query, you can make it personal or shared. You can run any personal object query you own
and any shared object query in the repository.

Configuring Query Conditions

Each query condition consists of a parameter, an operator, and a value. You can add, cut, copy, paste, and move
query conditions. Each time you add a query parameter, you specify an operator and a value. You can view the
valid operators and values for each parameter when you add the parameter to a query.
You may need to configure multiple query conditions to effectively narrow the results. Use the AND and OR
logical operators to add multiple query conditions. For example, you might want to deploy a group of objects
with the Deployment_2 label, but you also want to ensure that the objects were saved after a particular date.

76 Chapter 8: Object Queries

 The following figure shows a query with multiple conditions:

Add, edit, or
move query
conditions
and
operators.

Add logical
operators.

Add
multiple
query
conditions.

When the Repository Service processes a parameter with multiple conditions, it processes them in the order you
enter them. To receive expected results and improve performance, enter parameters in the order you want them
to run.
If you nest several parameters within a query, the Repository Service resolves each inner parameter conditions
before outer parameter conditions.
For example, when you run the following query with nested conditions, the Repository Service resolves the
innermost conditions and the next outer conditions until it resolves all parameter conditions. The following
sample query shows the order in which the Repository Service resolves query conditions:
5 2 1

4 3

Query Parameters
You build queries using query parameters. Each query parameter uses operators and accepts values. Some query
parameters are available for versioned objects only. These are query parameters that relate to configuration
management. For example, the Check-In Time query parameter displays checked-in versioned objects for a
specified time, before or after a specified time, or within a specified number of days.

Configuring Query Conditions 77

 The following table describes the query parameters and the valid operators and values for each parameter:

Parameter Description Valid Operator Accepted Values

AND Joins query conditions or groups None None

of query conditions.

Business Name Displays sources and targets Contains, String

based on their business names. Does Not Contain,
For example, the query Business Does Not End With,
Name is Equal to Informatica, Does Not Start With,
returns sources and targets that Ends With,
contain the Informatica business Is Equal To,
name and filters out all other Is Not Equal To,
objects. Is Not One Of,
Is One Of,
Starts With

Check-in Time* Displays checked in versioned Greater Than, Date/time,

objects for a specified time, Is Between, Numeric
before or after a specified time, Less Than,
or within a specified number of Is Not Between,
days. Within Last (days)

Check-out Time* Displays checked out versioned Greater Than, Date/time,

objects for a specified time, Is Between, Numeric
before or after a specified time, Less Than,
or within a specified number of Is Not Between,
days. Within Last (days)

Comments Displays comments associated Contains, String

with a source, target, mapping, or Does Not Contain,
workflow. Does Not End With,
Does Not Start With,
Ends With,
Is Equal To,
Is Not Equal To,
Is Not One Of,
Is One Of,
Starts With

Deployment Displays versioned objects Greater Than, Date/time,

Dispatch History deployed to another folder or Is Between, Numeric
repository through deployment Less Than,
groups in a given time period. Is Not Between,
Within Last (days)

Deployment Displays versioned objects Greater Than, Date/time,

Receive History deployed from another folder or Is Between, Numeric
repository using deployment Less Than,
groups in a given time period. Is Not Between,
Within Last (days)

Folder Displays objects in a specified Is Equal To, Folder name

folder. Is Not Equal To,
Is Not One Of,
Is One Of

Include Children Displays child dependent Where (Value 1) Source Definition,

objects. depends on (Value 2) Target Definition,
Transformation,
Mapplet,
Mapping,
Cube,
Dimension,
Task,
Session,
Worklet,
Workflow,
Scheduler,
SessionConfig

78 Chapter 8: Object Queries

Parameter Description Valid Operator Accepted Values

Include Children Displays child and parent Where (Value 1) Source Definition,
and Parents dependent objects. depends on (Value 2) Target Definition,
Transformation,
Mapplet,
Mapping,
Cube,
Dimension,
Task,
Session,
Worklet,
Workflow,
Scheduler,
SessionConfig

Include Parents Displays parent dependent Where (Value 1) Source Definition,

objects. depends on (Value 2) Target Definition,
Transformation,
Mapplet,
Mapping,
Cube,
Dimension,
Task,
Session,
Worklet,
Workflow,
Scheduler,
SessionConfig

Include Displays primary key-foreign key n/a n/a

Primary/Foreign dependencies.
Key
Dependencies

Impacted Status Displays objects based on Is Equal To Impacted,

impacted status. Objects can be Not Impacted
marked as impacted when a child
object changes in such a way
that the parent object may not be
able to run.

Label* Displays versioned objects Contains, String

associated with a label or group Does Not Contain,
of labels. Does Not End With,
Does Not Start With,
Ends With,
Is Equal To,
Is Not Equal To,
Is Not One Of,
Is One Of,
Starts With

Last Saved Time Displays objects saved at a Greater Than, Date/time,

particular time or within a Is Between, Numeric
particular time range. Less Than,
Is Not Between,
Within Last (days)

Latest Status* Displays versioned objects Is Equal To, Checked-out

based on the object history. The Is Not Equal To, Latest,
query can return local objects Is One Of Checked-in
that are checked out, the latest Older
version of checked-in objects, or
a collection of all older versions
of objects.

Configuring Query Conditions 79

 Parameter Description Valid Operator Accepted Values

Metadata Displays objects based on an Is Equal To, Vendor-defined

Extension extension name or value pair. Is Not Equal To metadata domain
Use this query parameter to find
non-reusable metadata
extensions. The query does not
return user-defined reusable
metadata extensions.

Object Name Displays objects based on the Contains, String

object name. Does Not Contain,
Does Not End With,
Does Not Start With,
Ends With,
Is Equal To,
Is Not Equal To,
Is Not One Of,
Is One Of,
Starts With

Object Type Displays objects based on the Is Equal To, Cube,

object type. For example, you Is Not Equal To, Dimension,
can find all workflows in a Is Not One Of, Mapping,
specified folder. Is One Of Mapplet,
Scheduler,
Session,
Session Config,
Source Definition,
Target Definition,
Task,
Transformation,
User-Defined
Function,
Workflow,
Worklet

Object Used Displays objects that are used by Is Equal To Unused,

Status other objects. For example, you Used
can find mappings that are not
used in any session.
If any version of an object is used
by another object, the query
returns the most recent version
of the object. This occurs even
when the most recent version of
the object is unused. The query
does not return workflows or
cubes because these objects
cannot be used by other objects.

Shortcut Status Displays objects based on Is Equal To Is Not Shortcut,

shortcut status. If you select this Is Shortcut
option, the query returns local
and global shortcut objects.
Shortcut objects are considered
valid regardless of whether the
objects they reference are valid.

Reusable Status Displays reusable or non- Is Equal To, Non-reusable,

reusable objects. Is One of Reusable

User Displays objects checked in or Is Equal To, Users in specified

checked out by the specified Is Not Equal To, repository
user. Is Not One Of,
Is One Of

80 Chapter 8: Object Queries

 Parameter Description Valid Operator Accepted Values

Valid Status Displays valid or invalid objects. Is Equal To Invalid,

The Repository Service validates Valid
an object when you run validation
or save an object to the
repository.

Version Status* Displays objects based on Is Equal To, Deleted,

deleted or non-deleted status. Is One of Not deleted
* You can specify this parameter for versioned repositories only.

Validating and Saving a Query

After you create the object query and specify the conditions, you validate it.
Click Validate to run the query validation. The Validate Query window displays the validation results. If the
validation returns an error, review the error message and validate the query again.
After you validate the query, you can save it for later use. For example, if you regularly run an object query on
checkin histories, you might want to save the object query so that you can easily run it again.

Invalid Queries
The query parameters you can view and use in the Query Editor are determined by the tool you use to create
queries. When you create a query in one PowerCenter Client tool, the query may appear invalid when you open
it in another tool. For example, you can view query parameters such as workflows, worklets, and sessions in the
Workflow Designer. If you open a query that uses Workflow Designer parameters in the Designer, the query
may appear invalid.
For example, you create a query in the Workflow Manager using the following parameters:
♦ Object Type is equal to Workflow
♦ Valid Status is equal to Invalid
When you open the query in the Designer, the query appears as invalid:

Workflow query invalidated in the

Queries can be invalidated when you use logical operators with the wrong number or kind of query conditions.
For example, an AND logical operator requires at least one parameter to be valid. The following example shows
a query that is invalid because the AND operator has no parameters:

The query is invalid

because the logical
operator requires
parameters.

Configuring Query Conditions 81

Running a Query
After you create and validate the object query, you can run it. The Repository Service queries the repository and
displays the results of the query in the Query Results window.
The following figure shows sample results for a query that returns repository objects that are more than six
months old:

From the Query Results window, you can complete tasks by selecting the object and clicking Tools.
The following table lists additional tasks you can perform from the Query Results window:

Task Task Information

View history. View the object version history for the selected checkout.

Compare versions. Compare the selected object with the previous checked in version.

Validate multiple objects. Validate selected objects.

Check in. Check in an object version.

Undo check out. Undo an object checkout.

Export to an XML file. Export the object version to an XML file.

Apply or remove a label. Apply a label to a versioned object or a group of versioned objects.

View object dependencies. View dependencies for the selected object.

View version properties. View the object and version properties of the selected object.

Add version to deployment group. Add an object or a group of objects to a deployment group.

Change object status. Change the status of an object from deleted to active.

Purge object version. Purge individual versions of objects.

Perform an advanced purge. Purge obsolete versions of objects based on purge criteria.

Save object version history to a file. To save the version history to an HTML file, click File > Save to File.

Open object in a workspace. Select this option to open an object in the workspace when the object
type is compatible with the tool in which you run the query. For
example, you can open a workflow in the Workflow Manager using this
option.

82 Chapter 8: Object Queries

 Viewing Query Results
By default, when you run an object query in a non-versioned repository, the Repository Service returns reusable
objects.
When you run an object query in a versioned repository, the Repository Service returns objects that meet the
following criteria:
♦ Versioned objects are the latest version, either local checked-out versions or checked-in versions.
♦ Non-versioned objects that are saved to the repository.
♦ Objects are reusable.
♦ Objects that are not deleted.
If you have a versioned repository and you want to view deleted or older objects, you must specify these values
in the query parameter. You can search for deleted objects using the deleted value in the Version Status
parameter. You can search for older versions of objects when you specify the older value in the Latest Status
query parameter.
Note: If you run a query without specifying any query condition, the query returns reusable objects in the
repository.

Sample Queries
The following sample queries show how to create query conditions with different parameters, operators, and
values. When you run the following sample queries in a versioned repository, the query returns the latest
checked-in version of the objects that meet the query criteria. When you run the following queries in a non-
versioned repository, the query returns the latest saved objects that meet the query criteria.

Finding Object Dependencies

To search for parent and child dependencies, use the Include Children and Parents parameter. In this example,
select source definitions and target definitions for Value 1 and select mapping for Value 2. To include reusable
and non-reusable dependencies, select both reusable and non-reusable dependency in Value 3.
The following query returns sources and targets in the Vendors folder that are dependent on the mapping,
Mapping_deploy:

Finding Impacted Mappings

The Repository Service marks a parent object as impacted if you modify a child object in such a way that the
parent object may not be able to run. The query returns impacted composite objects such as mapplets,
mappings, sessions, worklets, and workflows.
The following query returns objects that are impacted and are mappings:

Note: Use the impacted query to search for impacted objects and run a validation on multiple objects.

Sample Queries 83
 RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “Validating Multiple Objects” on page 28

Finding Invalid Mappings

The Repository Service invalidates objects when you save an object or run validation and it detects changes to
the object that cause problems with data flow.
The following query returns objects that are invalid and are mappings:

Finding the Used Status of Objects

The following query returns objects that are mappings and that are not used by any session:

Finding Recently Deployed Versioned Objects

The following query returns the latest checked-in version of versioned objects deployed within the last seven
days and are reusable or non-reusable:

Finding Recently Checked-Out Objects

The following query returns currently checked-out objects that were checked out within the last seven days:

Finding Older Versions of Versioned Objects

The following query returns versioned objects that are mappings and that are older and that are checked in by
the Administrator:

Finding Versioned Objects Older than a Specified Date

Use this query to search for older versions of objects to purge. This query ensures that you do not purge the
latest versions of objects.

84 Chapter 8: Object Queries

 The following query returns object versions that were checked in before a specified date and that are not the
latest checked-in version:

Troubleshooting
I created a query to return objects from a specified folder. The query returned only reusable objects. Why?
By default, when you execute an object query, the query returns only reusable objects that are visible to the
current user.
To find both reusable and non-reusable objects in a specified folder, include the Reusable Status parameter and
specify reusable and non-reusable values:

I created a query to return objects that use a specified label. The query returned only reusable objects that use the
specified label. Why?
By default, when you execute a query to find objects associated with a label, the query returns labeled reusable
objects. To find reusable and non-reusable objects that use a specified label, include the Reusable Status
parameter and specify reusable and non-reusable values:

I created a query to search for labeled versioned objects. The query did not return older versions of labeled objects.
Why?
By default, when you run a query to find labeled versioned objects, the query returns only the latest checked-in
version of objects. To find all versions of objects using the specified label, include the Latest Status parameter
and specify latest checked-in and older values:

Do I need to edit the query condition after I change the name of a folder or label?
No. After you change the name of a folder or label, the Repository Service retrieves and uses the new folder or
label name in the query condition. The query returns the same results after you rename a folder or label.

Troubleshooting 85
86 Chapter 8: Object Queries
CHAPTER 9

Deployment Groups
This chapter includes the following topics:
♦ Overview, 87
♦ Deployment Group Tasks, 87
♦ Creating and Editing Deployment Groups, 90

Overview
A deployment group is a global object that consists of objects from one or more folders. You use a deployment
group to copy objects to another folder or repository. You can use a deployment group when you want to copy
some, but not all, of the objects in a folder. You can also use a deployment group to copy objects from multiple
folders.
You can create, edit, or delete deployment groups. You can copy a deployment group and the objects in the
deployment group to a target repository.

Deployment Group Tasks

You can complete the following tasks when you work with deployment groups:
♦ Create a deployment group. Create a global object for deploying objects from one or more folders. For more
information, see “Creating a Deployment Group” on page 91.
♦ Edit a deployment group. Modify a deployment group. For example, you can convert a static deployment
group to a dynamic group, or you can convert a dynamic deployment group to a static group. For more
information, see “Editing a Deployment Group” on page 92.
♦ Configure privileges and permissions for a deployment group. Configure permissions on a deployment
group and the privilege to copy a deployment group. For more information, see “Configuring Privileges and
Permissions for a Deployment Group” on page 88.
♦ View the objects in a static or dynamic deployment group. Preview the objects that the Repository Service
will deploy. For more information, see “Viewing the Objects in a Deployment Group” on page 92.
♦ Add or remove objects in a static deployment group. Specify the objects that belong to a static deployment
group. For more information, see “Adding or Removing Objects in Static Deployment Groups” on page 88.

87
 ♦ Associate a query with a dynamic deployment group. Assign a query to a deployment to dynamically
update the objects that the group contains. For more information, see “Using Queries in Dynamic
Deployment Groups” on page 88.
♦ View the history of a deployment group. View the history of a deployment group, including the source and
target repositories, deployment date, and user who ran the deployment. For more information, see “Viewing
Deployment History” on page 89.
♦ Post-deployment validation. Validate the objects in the target repository after you copy a deployment group
to verify that the objects and dependent objects are valid. For more information, see “Validating the Target
Repository” on page 90.
♦ Roll back a deployment group. Roll back a deployment group to purge deployed versions of objects from
the target repository. For more information, see “Rolling Back a Deployment” on page 90.

Configuring Privileges and Permissions for a Deployment Group

Configure object permissions when you create, edit, delete, or copy a deployment group. To limit the privilege
to perform deployment group operations but provide the privilege to copy a deployment group without write
permission on target folders, assign the Execute Deployment Groups privilege. An administrator can assign the
Execute Deployment Groups privilege. You must have read permission on source folders and execute
permission on the deployment group to copy the deployment group.

RELATED TOPICS:
♦ Managing Permissions, 40

Adding or Removing Objects in Static Deployment Groups

You manually add or delete objects from a static deployment group. You can add checked-in objects to a static
deployment group from the Repository Manager. You cannot add checked-out objects to a deployment group.
You can add objects to a deployment group when you view the results of an object query or view the results of
an object history query from the Repository Manager. To add objects from the Query Results or View History
window, click Tools > Add to deployment group.
In the Repository Manager, right-click an object in the Navigator or in a detail window, and click Versioning >
View History. In the View History window, click Tools > Add to deployment group.
To add several objects to a deployment group, select the objects in the Navigator and drag them into the
deployment group. When you select a static deployment group in the Navigator, the Main window displays the
objects within the deployment group.
When you add objects to a static deployment group, you can also add dependent objects to the deployment
group. You can specify the following conditions to add dependencies:
♦ All dependencies. Select to deploy all dependent objects.
♦ Non-reusable. Select to deploy non-reusable dependent objects.
♦ No dependencies. Select to skip deploying dependent objects.
When you click All Dependencies, you add all dependent objects to the static deployment group. Dependent
objects include dependent objects within a workflow or mapping, original objects that shortcuts reference, and
primary key sources where there is a primary-key/foreign-key relationship.
To have the Repository Manager use the recommended setting without prompting you, select the option to
prevent the dialog box from appearing again. Alternatively, click Tools > Options, and clear Prompt User
While Adding to Deployment Group.

Using Queries in Dynamic Deployment Groups

When you associate an object query with a deployment group, the Repository Service runs the query at the time
of deployment. You can associate an object query with a deployment group when you edit or create a
deployment group.

88 Chapter 9: Deployment Groups

 To deploy composite objects using a dynamic deployment group, you must deploy all components of the
composite object the first time you deploy the deployment group to another repository. For example, if you
deploy a mapping, you must also deploy the reusable and non-reusable child objects associated with the
mapping. To do this, you must create a query that returns parent objects and their dependent child objects. A
common way to group versioned objects for deployment is to use labels to identify the objects you want to
deploy.
To find the latest versions of objects in a dynamic deployment group, you must create all mappings in the
group with labels. If the dynamic deployment group contains a non-reusable object in an unlabeled mapping,
the group will not deploy.
When you use labels to identify versioned objects for a dynamic deployment group, the labels for parent and
dependent child objects can become out of sync. When this occurs, queries may return part of a composite
object, and the dynamic deployment fails. This can occur in the following cases:
♦ You apply a label to a parent object, but do not label the dependent child objects. When you apply a label
to a parent object, the label does not apply to child objects. For example, you apply label 1 to mapping 1
without labeling the dependent child objects. Later, you run a dynamic deployment group using a query that
searches for objects in a specified folder that use label 1. The query returns the parent object but not the
child objects. The deployment fails because you attempted to deploy only the parent for a composite object.
To ensure that dynamic deployment queries return these child objects, manually apply the label to
dependent objects each time you apply a label or move a label to a different version of the parent object.
♦ You do not apply a specified label to the same version of the parent and child object. By default, object
queries return the latest versions of objects. For example, you apply label 1 to version 1 of a child object and
apply label 1 to version 2 of the parent object. In the query, you search for objects that use label 1 and
reusable and non-reusable objects. The query returns the parent object but not the child objects because the
most recent versions of the child objects do not have the label applied. To ensure that dynamic deployment
queries return both parent and child objects when you apply a specified label to different versions of parent
and child objects, include a Latest Status parameter in the query and specify the latest checked-in and older
values.
♦ The dynamic deployment query does not return non-reusable child objects with parent objects. To ensure
that the dynamic query returns reusable and non-reusable child objects, include the Reusable Status
parameter in the query and specify reusable and non-reusable values. In addition, include a Latest Status
parameter in the query and specify the latest checked-in and older values.

Viewing Deployment History

You can view the following information about groups you have deployed:
♦ Date/time. The date and time you deployed the group.
♦ User name. The user name of the person who deployed the group.
♦ Deployment group name. The name of the deployment group.
♦ Source repository. The repository you deployed the group from.
♦ Target repository. The repository where you deployed the group.
♦ Status. The status of the group as either deployed or not deployed.
♦ Rollback time. The date and time the deployment group was rolled back.

To view the history of a deployment group:

1. Click Versioning > Deployment > Groups to open the Deployment Group Browser.
2. Select a deployment group.
3. Click View History to view the history of the deployment group.
4. Optionally, click Details to view details about the objects in the deployment group.
5. Click OK to close the Deployment Group History window.

Deployment Group Tasks 89

 Validating the Target Repository
Validate the objects in the target repository after you copy a deployment group to verify that the objects or
dependent objects are valid. You can also use the pmrep Validate command or the Repository Manager to
validate the objects.
You can view the validation results in the deployment log. In the Repository Manager, the deployment log
appears in the Output window.
Note: Validating objects in the target repository can take a long time.

Rolling Back a Deployment

You can roll back a deployment to purge the deployed versions from the target repository or folder. When you
roll back a deployment, you roll back all the objects in a deployment group that you deployed at a specific date
and time. You cannot roll back part of a deployment or roll back from a non-versioned repository.
To initiate a rollback, you must roll back the latest version of each object. The Repository Service ensures that
the check-in time for the repository objects is the same as the deploy time. If the check-in time is different, then
the repository object is not the same as the object in the deployment, and the rollback fails. The rollback also
fails if the rollback process causes you to create duplicate object names. This might occur if you rename a
deployed object, create a new object with the same name, and attempt to roll back the original deployment.

To roll back a deployment:

1. In the Repository Manager, connect to the target repository where you deployed the objects.
2. Click Versioning > Deployment > Group.
3. Select a deployment group in the Deployment Group Browser, and click View History.
4. Select a deployment to roll back.
5. Click Rollback.
The Repository Service checks the object versions in the deployment against the objects in the target repository
or folder, and the rollback either succeeds or fails. The rollback results appear at the end of processing. If the
rollback fails, the Repository Service notifies you of the object that caused the failure.

Creating and Editing Deployment Groups

You can create the following types of deployment groups:
♦ Static. You populate a static deployment group by manually selecting objects. Create a static deployment
group if you do not expect the set of deployment objects to change. For example, you might group objects
for deployment on a certain date and deploy all objects at once.
♦ Dynamic. You use the result set from an object query to populate the deployment group. Create a dynamic
deployment group if you expect the set of deployment objects to change frequently. For example, you can
use a dynamic deployment group if you develop multiple objects to deploy on different schedules. You can
run the dynamic deployment group query multiple times and add new objects to the group each time you
run the query.
You can edit a deployment group to convert it into another deployment group type. You can view the objects in
the deployment group before you copy a deployment group.

90 Chapter 9: Deployment Groups

Creating a Deployment Group
You use the Deployment Group Editor to create and edit deployment groups.

To create a deployment group:

1. In the Repository Manager, click Versioning > Deployment > Groups to view the existing deployment
groups in the Deployment Group Browser.

2. Click New to configure the deployment group in the Deployment Group Editor.

3. Enter a name for the deployment group.

4. Select whether to create a static or dynamic deployment group.
5. If you are creating a dynamic deployment group, click Queries to select a query from the Query Browser,
and then click Close to return to the Deployment Group Editor.
6. Optionally, enter a comment for the deployment group.
7. Click OK.
After you create a deployment group, it appears in the Deployment Groups node in the Navigator of the
Repository Manager.
After you create a static deployment group, you can add objects to it.

RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “Adding or Removing Objects in Static Deployment Groups” on page 88

Creating and Editing Deployment Groups 91

 ♦ “Using Queries in Dynamic Deployment Groups” on page 88

Editing a Deployment Group

You edit a deployment group to convert a static deployment group into a dynamic deployment group, to
convert a dynamic deployment group into a static group, or to associate a different query with a dynamic
deployment group.

To edit a deployment group:

1. In the Repository Manager, click Versioning > Deployment > Groups.

2. In the Deployment Group Browser, select the deployment group, and click Edit.
3. In the Deployment Group Editor, configure the static or dynamic deployment group.
4. Click OK.

Viewing the Objects in a Deployment Group

Before you deploy a static or dynamic deployment group, you can preview the objects that will be deployed.

To view the objects in a deployment group:

1. In the Repository Manager, click Versioning > Deployment > Groups.

2. In the Deployment Group Browser, select the deployment group, and click View Group.
For a static deployment group, the deployment group objects appear in the Deployment Group Contents
window. For a dynamic deployment group, the deployment group objects appear in the Query Results
window.

RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “Running a Query” on page 82

92 Chapter 9: Deployment Groups

CHAPTER 10

Copying Folders and Deployment

Groups
This chapter includes the following topics:
♦ Overview, 93
♦ Using the Copy Wizards, 94
♦ Copying or Replacing a Folder, 97
♦ Copying a Deployment Group, 102
♦ Troubleshooting, 109

Overview
Use the Repository Manager to copy multiple objects from one repository to another. You can complete the
following copy operations:
♦ Copy a folder. You can copy a folder and all of its contents within a repository or from a source repository
into a target repository.
♦ Replace a folder. You can copy a folder and all of its contents from a source repository and replace an
existing folder in the target repository. The contents of the replaced folder are overwritten.
♦ Copy a deployment group. You can copy the objects in a dynamic or static deployment group to multiple
target folders in the target repository. For versioned repositories, the deployment operation creates new
versions of existing objects in the target folders. For non-versioned repositories, if the objects in the
deployment group exist in the target repository, the deployment operation deletes existing objects and
creates new objects.
If you want to archive or share metadata or deploy metadata into production, you can use copy folder to copy
an entire folder. If you want to update the metadata in a folder in production, you can replace the folder.
For example, you have a folder called Sales in the development repository. When it is ready for production, you
copy the Sales folder into the production repository. After a week in production, you want to make minor
changes. You edit the Sales folder in the development repository and test the changes. When the folder is ready
for production, you can either copy the folder into the production repository, resulting in two copies of the
folder in production, or you can replace the existing Sales folder with the new one. When you replace the
folder, you can update the production repository without creating multiple copies of the folder.
If the repository is enabled for versioning, you can also copy the objects in a deployment group from one
repository to another. When you copy a deployment group, you can copy objects in a single copy operation

93
 from multiple folders in the source repository into multiple folders in the target repository. You can also specify
individual objects to copy, rather than the entire contents of a folder.
You can also use different copy operations together. You might use copy folder and copy deployment group
together in the repository environment at different stages of the development process.
For example, you have development and production repositories. When you complete initial development for
the metadata in a new folder and you are ready to deploy the objects into production, you copy the folder and
all of its objects into the production repository.
As development continues, you make changes to a session in the folder. You do not need to copy all of the
metadata in the folder to production, so you add the session to a deployment group. When you copy the
deployment group, the Copy Deployment Group Wizard creates a new version of the session in the target
folder.

Copying or Replacing Running Workflows, Sessions, and Tasks

When you copy or replace a folder or deploy a deployment group, the Repository Service first copies the folder
or deployment group to temporary tables in the target repository database. During this stage of the deployment,
you have read-only access to the target repository if you are copying but not replacing a folder, or if you are
copying a deployment group. Workflows, sessions, and tasks that are running in the target repository continue
to run. You can view them running in the Workflow Monitor after the deployment operation begins.
Note: If you are replacing a folder, you cannot view the folder in the target repository after the deployment
operation begins. Also, all running workflows, sessions, and tasks are immediately blocked in the target folder,
and they remain blocked for the duration of the deployment operation. Running workflows, sessions, and tasks
in other folders in the target repository continue to run.
After the Repository Service copies all objects in the folder or deployment group to temporary tables, it moves
the data from the temporary tables to the target repository. During this stage of the deployment, you no longer
have read-only access to the target repository, and all running workflows, sessions, and tasks are blocked. When
an Integration Service tries to access the repository to run a workflow, session, or task while a repository is
blocked, the Repository Service denies access and returns the following message:
Access to the repository is blocked since a folder/object deployment is in progress. The
current operation will be suspended until the deployment is completed.

The error message appears in the Administration Console, workflow log, or session log, depending on which
operation the Integration Service tried to perform. For example, if the Integration Service tried to fetch session
information to run a session in a workflow, the message appears in the workflow log.
The Integration Service pauses until the repository completes the deployment. It cannot fetch objects in that
repository during this time.
When the repository allows access again, it displays the following message:
The folder/object deployment has completed. The current operation will resume.

The Integration Service fetches the repository object and completes the workflow, session, or task.

Using the Copy Wizards

The Repository Manager provides a wizard to copy and replace folders and to copy deployment groups. The
wizard steps vary depending on the operation and the content of the folder or deployment group you want to
copy or the target repository type.
When you copy a folder or deployment group, you perform many of the same actions. You can use the Copy
Folder Wizard and the Copy Deployment Group Wizard to complete the following actions:
♦ Choose an Integration Service. Use the Integration Service to run all workflows in the folder if a matching
Integration Service does not exist in the target repository.

94 Chapter 10: Copying Folders and Deployment Groups

 ♦ Retain assigned Integration Services. Retain the assigned Integration Services for workflows configured to
run on specific Integration Services.
♦ Copy connections. Copy database, FTP, external loader, and application connection information if
matching connection names do not exist in the target repository.
♦ Copy plug-in application information. Copy plug-in application component information that does not
exist in the target repository.
♦ Copy persistent values. Copy the saved persistent values for mapping variables used in a session and
workflow variables used in a workflow.
♦ Copy metadata extension values. Copy the metadata extension values associated with repository objects.
♦ Assign an owner to a folder. Assign an owner to a folder when you copy a folder.
♦ Validate the objects in the target repository. Validate the objects in the target repository after you copy a
deployment group to verify that the objects and dependent objects are valid.
♦ Generate a deployment control file. Generate a deployment control file, encoded in UTF-8 format, that
you use with the pmrep command line program.
For more information about using the Copy Folder Wizard to copy or replace a folder, see “Copying or
Replacing a Folder” on page 97. For more information about using the Copy Deployment Group Wizard to
copy a deployment group, see “Copying a Deployment Group” on page 102.

Copy Modes
When you copy a folder or deployment group, you must choose from the following copy modes:
♦ Typical. The wizard uses the defaults for shortcuts to local and global shared folders.
♦ Advanced. You can override the defaults for shortcuts to local and global shared folders. You can choose the
shared folder to associate shortcuts. The wizard might have to determine how the folders are related before
establishing shortcuts.

Associated Integration Services

Each workflow is configured to be run by an Integration Service associated with the repository. A copied
workflow becomes associated with an Integration Service in the target repository in the following
circumstances:
♦ If the target repository is associated with Integration Service names that match the Integration Services
configured to run the folder workflows, the wizard associates those workflows with the existing Integration
Services. To use Integration Services with the same name in the target repository, you must configure those
Integration Services before you copy the folder.
♦ If an Integration Service with the same name does not exist in the target repository, the wizard lists all of the
Integration Services associated with the target repository. You then select one of those Integration Services to
run all unassociated workflows.
♦ If the target repository is associated with one Integration Service, the wizard associates all unassociated
workflows with it.
♦ If the target repository is not associated with an Integration Service, the wizard does not copy Integration
Service connection information.
If you associate a different Integration Service with a workflow when you copy a folder, make sure that it uses
the same directory structure for service and process variables and other directory paths in the session properties.

Connections
The Copy Wizard copies connections used by sessions in the folder or deployment group. If the connection
exists in the target repository, the Copy Wizard uses the existing connection. The wizard does not overwrite
connections in the target repository.

Using the Copy Wizards 95

 When you copy a folder or deployment group, the wizard displays the following information about
connections:
♦ No Match Found. No match exists in the target repository. The wizard copies the object. You have access to
the object in the source repository.
♦ Match Found. A matching object with the same name exists in the target repository. You have access to the
objects in both the originating and target repositories.
♦ Match Found - Permission Denied, will copy and rename to [new_name]. A matching object with the
same name exists in the target repository. You have access to the object in the originating repository, but no
access to the object in the target repository. The wizard copies the object and renames it by appending a
number to the name.
♦ Permissions Denied. You have no access to the object in the source repository. All sessions using this
connection are invalidated.

Metadata Extensions
When you copy objects to another repository, the Copy Wizard copies the metadata extension values associated
with those objects to the target repository. The metadata extension values might or might not be available in the
target repository, depending on whether the extensions are non-reusable or reusable.

Non-Reusable Metadata Extensions

Non-reusable metadata extensions apply to single objects such as one source definition or one session. You
create non-reusable metadata extensions in the Designer or Workflow Manager.
When you copy an object that contains a non-reusable metadata extension, the Copy Wizard copies the
extension to the target repository with the object. The extension becomes non-reusable in the target repository.
You can edit it, delete it, or promote it to a reusable extension. If the metadata extension contains a value, the
wizard retains the value of the metadata extension in the target repository.

RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “Working with Metadata Extensions” on page 146

Reusable Metadata Extensions

Reusable metadata extensions apply to all repository objects of a certain type, such as all workflows or all
Expression transformations. There are two types of reusable metadata extensions that you can copy:
♦ User-defined extensions. Reusable metadata extensions that you create exist in the User Defined Metadata
domain. When you copy an object that contains user-defined, reusable metadata extensions, the Copy
Wizard copies the extensions to the target repository. If the definition exists in the target repository, the
copied extensions become reusable in the target repository. If the definition does not exist in the target
repository, the copied extensions become non-reusable.
♦ Vendor-defined extensions. Reusable extensions that other applications create exist in the appropriate
vendor domain. When you copy an object that contains vendor-defined metadata extensions, the Copy
Wizard copies the extensions to the target repository and retains their values. If the vendor domain exists in
the target repository, the metadata extensions become part of that domain in the target repository.
Therefore, you can view them or change the values as you do with the other metadata extensions in that
domain.
If the vendor domain does not exist in the target repository, you can cancel the copy or continue in the Copy
Wizard. If you continue, the extensions are not available in the target repository. When you install the
vendor application, the metadata extensions become available so you can view them and change their values.

RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “Working with Metadata Extensions” on page 146

96 Chapter 10: Copying Folders and Deployment Groups

 Copying Plug-in Application Information
When you copy a folder or deployment group, you can copy plug-in application information if the folder or
deployment group depends on the plug-in application information. The source folder or deployment group
depends on a plug-in application in the following cases:
♦ The source folder contains metadata extension values from a vendor-defined metadata domain.
♦ The source folder contains a source or target with a plug-in application database type.
♦ The source folder uses plug-in application connections.

Copying or Replacing a Folder

In the Repository Manager, you can copy a folder within the same repository. You can also copy a folder into a
different repository within the same PowerCenter domain or to a different PowerCenter domain. Use the Copy
Folder Wizard to perform the copy or replace operation. Each time you copy or replace a folder, the wizard
copies all of the metadata objects in the folder.
You can also copy and replace a folder across repositories. You might replace a folder when you want to update
a folder that is in production. Instead of creating a second copy of the folder in the production repository, you
can replace the existing folder with the updated data. When you replace a folder, the wizard may overwrite data
in the target folder, depending on the options you select. To ensure no metadata is lost, back up the repository
before replacing a folder.
If the Integration Service uses operating system profiles, the Copy Folder Wizard retains operating system
profile assignments of the target folder. The Copy Folder Wizard does not copy the operating system profiles
assignment when you copy a folder.
In the Copy Folder Wizard, you can perform all of the tasks listed in “Using the Copy Wizards” on page 94.
When you copy a folder, you can complete the following actions in the Copy Folder Wizard:
♦ Reestablish shortcuts. Maintain shortcuts to objects in shared folders.
♦ Compare folders. Compare folders to determine how they are related.
♦ Rename folders. If a folder in the target repository has the same name as the folder you are copying, you can
rename the copy of the source folder that the Copy Folder Wizard creates in the target repository.
♦ Copy latest object versions or all object versions. You can choose to copy the latest version of objects in the
source folder, or all versions.
When you replace a folder, the wizard maintains properties of the replaced folder, such as shortcuts, FTP, and
external loader connection information. When you replace a folder, you can complete the following additional
actions:
♦ Retain current values for Sequence Generator and Normalizer transformations. You can choose to retain
existing values or replace them with values from the source folder.
♦ Retain persistent values for mapping variables. You can choose to retain existing values or replace them
with values from the source folder.
♦ Retain persistent values for workflow variables. You can choose to retain existing values or replace them
with values from the source folder.
♦ Workflow logs. You can choose to retain existing workflow logs or replace them with workflow logs from
the source folder.
♦ Copy latest object versions or all object versions. If you copy the latest object versions in the source folder,
the wizard replaces each object in the target folder with the latest version. The wizard does not retain any
older versions in the target folder. If you copy all versions from the source folder, the wizard removes all
existing versions of the object from the target folder, including the latest one, and replaces them with all
versions from the source folder.

Copying or Replacing a Folder 97

 The wizard copies and replaces folders as a single transaction. If you cancel the copy before it completes, the
wizard rolls back all changes.

Naming
When you copy a folder, the wizard names the copy after the folder. If the folder name exists in the repository
and you choose not to replace it, the wizard appends the date to the folder name, as follows:
<folder_name>_<mm/dd/yyyy>, where mm=months, dd=days, and yyyy=year.

Locking and Checkouts

To protect the integrity of the repository, the wizard does not allow you to copy a folder when the folder, or
objects in the folder, are being saved. Likewise, you cannot save objects in a folder as the wizard copies the
folder. Before you copy a folder, view object locks to verify that the folder is not in use.
If you are replacing a folder in a target repository enabled for versioning, you must also verify that no objects in
the target folder are checked out.

RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “Working with Version Properties” on page 58

♦ “Viewing Checked-Out Objects” on page 62

Shortcuts
The folder you want to copy might contain shortcuts to shared folders in the same repository or to shared
folders in the global repository. Shortcuts to folders in the same repository are known as local shortcuts.
Shortcuts to the global repository are called global shortcuts. When you copy multiple versions of folders, you
must take steps to ensure that you preserve shortcuts.

RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “Reestablishing Shortcuts When Copying Multiple Folder Versions” on page 99

Local Shortcuts
The wizard can reestablish local shortcuts to shared folders if you have a current copy of the shared folders in
the target repository. Therefore, you can keep shortcuts intact by copying the necessary local shared folders to
the target repository before copying the folder.
If you do not copy the shared folders before copying the folder, the wizard deletes all shortcuts and marks all
affected mappings invalid.
If shared folders exist in the target repository, the wizard verifies that the copy is current. In typical mode, if
you edit the original shared folder after you copy it to the target repository, the wizard asks you to copy it again.
In the advanced mode, you can compare the folders to see which folder is most recent. The wizard does not
establish shortcuts to an outdated shared folder. Therefore, to copy shortcuts correctly, you must copy shared
folders before copying the folder.
If you copy the folder from the global repository to a local repository in the same domain, local shortcuts
become global shortcuts.
For example, you copy a shared folder and a non-shared folder with shortcuts from a global repository to a local
repository. First copy the shared folder into the local repository. Then copy the non-shared folder. If you copy
the folder in typical mode, you establish global shortcuts to the shared folder in the global repository. If you
copy the folder in advanced mode, you can also choose to establish local shortcuts to the shared folder in the
local repository.

98 Chapter 10: Copying Folders and Deployment Groups

 Global Shortcuts
If you copy the folder or deployment group to another repository in the same repository domain, the wizard can
reestablish global shortcuts in the following situations:
♦ When you copy a folder from one local repository to another within the repository domain, the wizard
recreates global shortcuts to the global repository.
♦ When you copy a folder from a local repository to its global repository, the global shortcuts become local
shortcuts.
♦ When you copy a folder from a global repository to a local repository within the repository domain, local
shortcuts become global shortcuts.
If you copy folders that contain global shortcuts between repository domains, copy the shared folders from the
local and global repositories in the source domain to either the local or global repository in the target domain.
The Copy Folder Wizard will either reestablish global shortcuts as local shortcuts or establish the copied
shortcuts as global shortcuts.

Reestablishing Shortcuts When Copying Multiple Folder Versions

When you copy folders containing shortcuts to another repository, the Copy Folder Wizard reestablishes
shortcuts to the referenced folder in the target repository. If you copy two versions of the referenced folder to
another repository, the wizard reestablishes shortcuts to the folder most recently copied to the target repository
by default. For example, you have folder F1 and folder F2 in a development repository. Folder F2 contains a
shortcut to folder F1. You copy F1 to the production repository as F1_1. Later, you copy F1 to the production
repository as F1_2. When you copy F2 to the production repository, the Copy Wizard reestablishes shortcuts to
F1_2. If you modify the shortcut object in F1_1, the shortcut in F2 does not reflect the changes and may be
invalidated.
To maintain valid shortcuts, you must verify that you maintain the most recent versions of shortcut objects in
the most recently copied folder. Or, select Advanced Options when you copy folders to another repository. Use
Advanced Options to select the folder to which you reestablish shortcuts.

Folder Permissions and Owners

When you copy or replace a folder, the wizard copies all permissions for the source folder owner to the target
folder. The wizard does not copy permissions for users, groups, or all others in the repository to the target
folder. When you replace a folder, the wizard retains the target folder permissions for users, groups, and all
others in the repository.
By default when you copy or replace a folder, the wizard assigns the source folder owner to the target folder.
The wizard does not assign the source folder owner to the target folder in the following situations:
♦ You choose to retain the target folder owner in the Copy Wizard.
♦ You specify a different owner for the target folder in the Copy Wizard. You can select any user in the target
PowerCenter domain.
♦ You copy or replace the folder to a repository in a different PowerCenter domain, and the user name and
security domain of the source owner do not exist in the target PowerCenter domain. The wizard assigns the
user performing the copy as the target folder owner.

Copying Within a Repository

When you copy a folder within the same repository, the wizard asks you to rename the folder. The wizard
reestablishes all shortcuts, and the copied folder continues to use the same connection and service information.

Copying Folders Between Versioned and Non-Versioned Repositories

You can copy folders between versioned and non-versioned repositories. When you copy a folder from a
versioned repository to a non-versioned repository, the Copy Wizard copies the latest checked-in version of the

Copying or Replacing a Folder 99

 objects to the target repository. If you copy a folder from a non-versioned repository to versioned repository,
the Copy Wizard copies the objects as version 1. If you copy deleted objects or deleted shortcuts from a
versioned repository to another versioned repository, the Copy Wizard copies a deleted version of the objects to
the target repository. Later, you can recover the deleted objects. If you want to copy a deleted object from a
versioned repository to a non-versioned repository, you must first recover it in the versioned repository.

Copying from Local Repositories

When you copy a folder from a local repository to another repository, the wizard verifies that a folder of the
same name exists in the target repository. If it does not exist, the wizard uses the folder name for the copied
folder. If it does exist, the wizard asks you to rename the folder.
If you want to copy the folder again, you might want to rename the existing folder in the target repository,
using a naming convention that clearly defines the existing folder. If you have edited objects in any local shared
folders used by the folder, you must copy those shared folders into the target repository before copying the
folder. You might want to rename existing shared folders before performing the copy.

Steps to Copy or Replace a Folder

Before you copy a folder, use the Repository Manager to verify no users are accessing objects in the folder. You
might want to ask all users to exit the repository. Also, copy dependent shared folders to the target repository
before copying a folder. If you are replacing a folder, verify no users are accessing objects in the target repository.

To copy or replace a folder:

1. In the Repository Manager, connect to the source repository and select the folder you want to copy.
2. Click Edit > Copy.
3. If you are copying to a different repository, connect to the target repository.
You connect to the target repository with the same user account used to connect to the source repository.
To connect to the target repository with a different user account, use the DeployFolder pmrep command.
4. In the Navigator, select the target repository, and click Edit > Paste.
Tip: You can also drag the folder into the target repository after connecting to the repository.

The Copy Folder Wizard displays the folder name and target repository name.
5. The Copy Folder dialog box prompts you to select a mode:
♦ Typical. The wizard uses the defaults for shortcuts to local and global shared folders.
♦ Advanced. You can override the defaults for shortcuts to local and global shared folders. You can choose
the shared folder to associate shortcuts. The wizard might have to determine how the folders are related
before establishing shortcuts.
6. Click Next.
The Copy Folder Wizard prompts you for more information based on the content of the folders and the
copy mode you select.
The Next button is disabled if object locks cannot be acquired in the target repository. When the objects in
the target repository become available, the Next button is enabled. To stop the replacement, click Cancel.
The wizard rolls back all changes.

100 Chapter 10: Copying Folders and Deployment Groups

The following table lists the dialog boxes and prompts that may appear when you copy a folder:

Copy Folder Wizard

Modes Description
Dialog Box

Select Versions Typical, Copies the latest version of objects in the folder, or all versions. If
Advanced you are replacing a folder, copying the latest version adds a new
version to the existing objects in the target folder.

Replace Folder Typical, Lists existing copies of the folder or all folders in the repository.
Advanced

Source/Target Typical, Specifies if objects in the target folder have been created or modified
Comparison Advanced since the last copy.

Compare Folders - Typical, Compares modified folders to determine the similarities and
Compare Results Advanced differences between the folders.

Sequence Generators Typical, Retains current values for Sequence Generator and Normalizer
and Normalizers Advanced transformations.

Mapping Variables Typical, Copies persistent values for mapping variables if they exist.
Advanced

Retain Mapping Typical, Retains persistent values for mapping variables if you replace a
Variable Persisted Advanced folder.
Values

Dependency Typical, Copies dependency information for objects in mappings if it exists.

Information Advanced The dependency information exists if you set the general options for
the Designer to save MX data. The dependency information is
organized in a format that enables reporting tools to skip steps such
as fetching the entire mapping and parsing expressions when
collecting information for reporting.

Workflow Variables Typical, Copies persistent values for workflow variables.

Advanced

Retain Workflow Typical, Retains persistent values.

Variable Persisted Advanced
Values

Copy Workflow Run Typical, Copies workflow logs if they exist.

History Advanced

Retain Workflow Run Typical, Retains existing workflow logs in the target folder if you choose not to
History Advanced copy workflow logs from the source folder.

Folder Exists Typical, Renames the target folder if a folder of the same name exists in the
Advanced target repository. Otherwise, it appends the date to the original folder
name.

Retain Integration Typical, Retains the assigned Integration Service for workflows.
Service Assignment Advanced

Database Typical, Lists all database connections in the folder, indicating the
Connections Advanced connections for which you do not have permission to copy.

Message Queue Typical, Lists all message queue connections in the folder.
Connections Advanced

FTP Connections Typical, Lists all FTP connections in the folder, indicating the connections for
Advanced which you do not have permission to copy.

External Loaders Typical, Lists all external loader connections in the folder, indicating the
Advanced connections for which you do not have permission to copy.

Application Typical, Lists all application connections in the folder, indicating the
Connections Advanced connections for which you do not have permission to copy.

MMD Plug-in Typical, Lists plug-in applications that the source folder depends on if the
Advanced plug-in information does not exist in the target repository.

Copying or Replacing a Folder 101

 Copy Folder Wizard
Modes Description
Dialog Box

Integration Services Typical, Selects an Integration Service to associate with workflows. If the
Advanced target repository contains less than two Integration Services, the
wizard skips this step.

Local Shared Folders Typical Lists local shared folders in the target repository that you need to
copy first. To preserve shortcuts and prevent invalid mappings, click
Cancel and copy all listed local shared folders before copying the
folder.

Global Shared Folders Typical Lists global shared folders in the target repository that you need to
copy first. To preserve shortcuts and prevent invalid mappings, click
Cancel and copy all listed local shared folders before copying the
folder.

Outdated Shared Typical Lists outdated folders in the target repository that you need to copy
Folders first. To preserve shortcuts and prevent invalid mappings, click
Cancel and copy all listed local shared folders before copying the
folder.

Select Shared Folders Advanced Lists the folder that contains shortcuts and the folder to which you
can establish shortcuts. You can choose to accept or override the
shared folder.

Override Shared Advanced Lists folders you can select to establish shortcuts if you choose to
Folder override the default folder selection in the Select Shared Folders
dialog box.

Compare Folder Advanced Compares folders if the folders you choose in Override Shared
Folder dialog box are different.

Compare Shared Advanced Lists the results from the folder compare. Displays objects that exist
Folder -Compare in the local shared folder but not in the global shared folder. Also
Results displays objects that are older or newer than matching objects in the
global shared folder.
If there are differences between the folders, a message warns you
that shortcuts to missing objects will be removed. The wizard takes
you back to Select Shared Folders dialog box.

Owner Typical, Selects the owner for the copied folder in the target repository. You
Advanced can select any user in the target PowerCenter domain.

Complete Deployment Typical, Copies the folder immediately after completing the wizard or
Advanced generates a deployment control file to use with the pmrep command
line program.
If you do not specify an absolute path, the Repository Manager
generates the deployment control file in the directory where the
Repository Manager runs. The Repository Manager generates the
deployment control file encoded in UTF-8 format.

Copying a Deployment Group

Copy a deployment group and the deployment group objects to folders in a target repository. When you copy a
deployment group, you can choose to replace an existing deployment group or create another deployment
group. Use the Copy Deployment Group Wizard to copy objects in a deployment group into multiple folders
in the target repository.
At the time of deployment, the wizard copies all objects included in a static deployment group. If you are
copying a dynamic deployment group, the wizard runs the query associated with the deployment group and
copies the objects from the results of the query. When you copy a dynamic deployment group, the Repository
Service converts it to a static deployment group in the target repository.
You can copy parts of composite objects, local and global shortcuts, objects with different or conflicting names
or status in a deployment group to folders in a target repository.

102 Chapter 10: Copying Folders and Deployment Groups

 Note: Verify that the deployment group contains objects before you copy a deployment group. You cannot copy
an empty deployment group.

Copying to Repository Types

You can copy a deployment group between versioned an non-versioned repositories. When you copy a
deployment group from a versioned repository to a non-versioned repository, the Copy Deployment Group
wizard replaces the objects in the target repository with the objects in the deployment group. When you copy a
deployment group from a non-versioned repository to a versioned repository, the wizard creates new versions of
the objects in the target repository.
If an object copied to a non-versioned repository exists in the target repository, the wizard deletes the object
before copying the object from the deployment group. You cannot roll back a deployment from a non-
versioned repository.
The first time you copy an object to a versioned repository, the wizard creates an object in the target repository.
The next time you copy the object, the wizard identifies the previously copied object and replaces it, creating a
new version of the object in the target repository. After it creates the version, the wizard checks in the object.

RELATED TOPICS:
♦ Copying Object Types, 103

Copying Object Types

Consider the relationships between objects in the deployment group and objects in the target repository when
you copy the following types of objects:
♦ Parts of composite objects. When you create a deployment group, you can choose to copy all or part of
composite objects. If you choose to deploy part of a composite object, you must ensure that dependent
objects exist in the target folder. For more information about copying composite objects in a deployment
group, see “Copying Composite Objects” on page 104.
♦ Local and global shortcuts. When you copy a deployment group, you can reestablish local shortcuts to
objects in shared folders. The wizard does not allow you to reestablish global shortcuts. As a result, you must
ensure that the shared folders and global shortcuts exist in the target repository. For more information about
copying local and global shortcuts, see “Copying Shortcuts” on page 105.
♦ Objects with different or conflicting names in the deployment group and target repository. An object in
the target repository can be a copy of the object in the deployment group but have a different name. In this
situation, the wizard replaces the copy of the object with the object in the deployment group.
An object in the target repository may also have the same name as an object in the deployment group, but
may not be a copy of the deployment group object. If this naming conflict occurs, the wizard cannot copy
the deployment group object. For more information about object naming, see “Object Naming” on
page 105.
♦ Objects with different statuses in the deployment group and target repository. The status of an object in a
deployment group may change after the copy operation, depending on the status of the object before
deployment. For more information about changes to object status when you copy a deployment group, see
“Object Status” on page 106.

Locking and Checkouts

To protect the integrity of repository metadata, the Copy Deployment Group Wizard does not allow you to
copy a deployment group when objects targeted for replacement are checked out or locked. Before you copy a
deployment group, search for checkouts in the target repository and verify that no deployment target objects are
checked out.
You can freeze the target deployment folder to ensure that no target objects are checked out when you copy a
deployment group. When you freeze a folder, other users cannot check out objects in the folder, but the wizard
can still copy and check in deployment group objects. Change the folder status to Frozen, Allow Deploy.

Copying a Deployment Group 103

 Note: If the repository stops unexpectedly during the copy operation, the Repository Service rolls back changes.
However, the deployment group objects may be copied to the target repository but not checked in. If this
happens, the objects will be stored in the repository as checked-out objects. To complete the copy operation,
view checkouts and manually check in the objects.

RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “Working with Version Properties” on page 58

♦ “Checking Out and Checking In Objects” on page 62

Copying Composite Objects

A composite object is one that uses other objects. For example, a mapping may use a reusable source, reusable
target, and several non-reusable transformations. Each of these objects is a child dependency of the mapping.
You can copy the following composite objects to a deployment group:
♦ Local shortcuts
♦ Mappings
♦ Mapplets
♦ Sessions
♦ Worklets
♦ Workflows
When you create a deployment group, you can choose to include all dependencies, non-reusable dependencies,
or no dependencies for composite objects. If you choose to copy no dependencies or non-reusable dependencies
for a composite object, the wizard uses existing copies of objects in the target repository for all child
dependencies not included in the deployment group. If the wizard cannot locate necessary dependencies in the
target repository, it fails the copy operation.
You must ensure that the dependent objects are also included in the deployment group or exist in the target
repository. The first time you deploy a group, you must include all dependencies of the composite object. To
ensure that necessary dependencies exist in the target repository, you might want to copy the entire folder to the
target repository the first time you copy the objects. You can then use deployment groups to update individual
objects over time. After you initially deploy a group, you do not need to add all object dependencies to the
deployment group.
For example, you edit a mapping variable in a mapping. You want to update the copy of the mapping currently
stored in the production repository. You add the mapping to a deployment group with no dependencies
because you do not want to update any non-reusable or reusable transformations in the mapping. When you
copy the mapping to the production repository, the wizard replaces the current version of the mapping and
associates all existing transformations with the new version.
When you deploy composite objects, the Repository Service treats the non-reusable objects in the composite
object as part of the parent object. For example, if the parent object is deleted, the Repository Service treats
associated non-reusable objects as deleted. For information about the status of deployed objects, see Table 10-1
on page 106.
You can also add dependencies to the deployment group. Use one of the following methods to ensure that you
include dependencies in the deployment group:
♦ Manually add the dependencies to the static deployment group. The PowerCenter Client prompts you to
do this when you manually add an object to a static deployment group. You may want to add all
dependencies the first time you copy an object to another repository.
♦ Design the query associated with the dynamic deployment group to find dependencies. You can design the
query to search for dependencies of a composite object. You may want to further refine the query for a
dynamic deployment group by specifying other parameters.

104 Chapter 10: Copying Folders and Deployment Groups

Copying Shortcuts
The deployment group you want to copy might contain shortcuts to shared folders in the same repository or to
shared folders in the global repository. Shortcuts to folders in the same repository are known as local shortcuts.
Shortcuts to the global repository are called global shortcuts.

Local Shortcuts
The wizard can reestablish local shortcuts to objects in shared folders if you have a current copy of the object in
the target repository. You can keep these shortcuts intact by copying the necessary local shared folders to the
target repository before you copy the deployment group or by including the object the shortcut references in
the deployment group.
If the referenced object exists in the target repository, the wizard verifies that the copy is current. In typical
mode, if you edit the original shared folder after you copy it to the target repository, the wizard asks you to copy
it again. If you do not copy the shared folders before copying the deployment group, the wizard deletes all
shortcuts and marks all affected mappings invalid.
In advanced mode, you can compare the contents of the folders to see which contains the most recent copies of
referenced objects, and then decide to cancel and copy the shared folder again or proceed with the copy
operation. When you compare folders, the wizard compares the version of the objects in the deployment group
with the latest version of objects in the target folder.
Also, if you copy a local shortcut into the same folder that contains the object the shortcut references, the
wizard cannot reestablish the shortcut. The wizard deletes the shortcut and marks all affected mappings invalid.

Global Shortcuts
If the deployment group contains global shortcuts, the wizard does not reestablish them when you copy them to
the target repository. If you copy a global shortcut alone, the wizard completes the copy operation but does not
copy the shortcut. If the global shortcut is part of a composite object you want to copy, the copy operation fails.
To ensure that global shortcuts are preserved when you copy a composite object, verify that a copy of the
object, including the shortcut, exists in the target repository. When you copy the object for the first time,
consider copying the entire folder. You can then use a deployment group to copy subsequent versions of the
object.

Object Naming
You can create copies of objects with different names. As a result, you can add an object to a deployment group
that has an existing copy in the target folder, but the copy has a different name. In this situation, the wizard
detects the relationship between the objects and replaces the copy in the target folder with the object in the
deployment group.
For example, you add the mapping m_Orders to a deployment group and copy it to the production repository.
As you continue development, you change the name of the mapping in the development repository to
m_OrdersWeekly. You add this new version of the mapping to a deployment group and copy it to the
production repository. If the production repository is versioned, the wizard determines that m_Orders is an
older copy of m_OrdersWeekly and replaces it, creating a new version. The latest version of the mapping in the
production repository is now m_OrdersWeekly. If the production repository is non-versioned, the wizard
determines that m_Orders is a copy of m_OrdersWeekly and replaces it with m_OrdersWeekly.
An object in the target repository might also have the same name as a deployment group object without being a
copy of the object. The object may be of a different type. If this happens, the naming conflict causes the copy
operation to fail.
For example, a mapping uses relational source src_Records in the development repository. You add the
mapping to a deployment group and copy it to the production repository. Later, you delete src_Records from
the production repository and create a new XML source, also named src_Records. If you then use a deployment
group to copy the relational source src_Records to the target repository, the copy operation fails because the
XML source src_Records has the same name, but is a different object.

Copying a Deployment Group 105

 Object Status
When you copy an object in a deployment group, the status of the source object may change if a copy of the
object exists in the target folder.
Table 10-1 describes the status an object may take after copying a deployment group, depending on the status of
the source and target objects:

Table 10-1. Change in Object Status After Copying Deployment Group Objects

Status of Target
Status of Deployment Status of Target Deployment Wizard
Repository Object After
Group Object Repository Object Action
Copying

Active Object Deleted Deploys the object Active

Active Object Active Deploys the object Active

Deleted Object Active Deploys the object Deleted

Deleted Object Deleted Skips the object Deleted

Note: Non-reusable objects derive status from their parent composite objects. If a parent composite object has a deleted status,
associated non-reusable objects also have a deleted status.

Steps to Copy a Deployment Group

Use the Copy Deployment Group Wizard to copy objects in a deployment group. You can perform all of the
tasks listed in “Using the Copy Wizards” on page 94. You can also complete the following tasks:
♦ Choose deployment folders. You can choose the folders in the target repository you want to deploy.
♦ Apply labels to source and target objects. You can apply labels to the deployment group objects in the
source and target repositories. For example, you may want to apply a label to the source and target objects
that specifies when the source object version was deployed and when the target object version was created.
♦ Move labels. You can move labels from version to version in source and target repositories. For example, you
might want to move a label from the last version to the latest version before you deploy an object. Or, you
might want to deploy an earlier version of an object and apply the latest label to the object.
♦ Clear the static deployment group when you finish copying. You can remove the copied objects from a
static deployment group when you finish copying them into the target repository.
Before you copy a deployment group, verify that existing objects in the target repository are not checked out or
locked. Also, copy dependent shared folders for shortcuts in the deployment group.
If objects in the target repository are locked, by default the deployment operation waits until either the locks are
acquired or you cancel the deployment. If you use pmrep to copy the deployment group, you can specify a
deployment timeout period. If pmrep does not acquire the object locks within the timeout period, the
deployment operation fails.
Note: The default behavior is different if you attempt to replace a folder and the target folder is locked. The
deployment operation does not wait for the locks to be released. The deployment fails immediately, and an
error message indicates that the target folder is in use.

To copy a deployment group:

1. Connect to the source and target repositories.

2. Select the deployment group to copy.
3. Drag or paste the deployment group to the target repository.
The Copy Deployment Group Wizard appears, displaying the folder name and target repository name.
4. The Copy Deployment Group Wizard prompts you to select a mode:
♦ Typical. The wizard uses the defaults for shortcuts to local and global shared folders.

106 Chapter 10: Copying Folders and Deployment Groups

 ♦ Advanced. You can override the defaults for shortcuts to local and global shared folders. You can choose
the shared folders to associate shortcuts. The wizard might have to determine how the folders are related
before establishing shortcuts.
5. Click Next. The Copy Deployment Group Wizard prompts you for more information based on the
content of the folders and the copy mode you selected.
The Next button is disabled if object locks cannot be acquired in the target repository. When the objects in
the target repository become available, the Next button is enabled. To stop the replacement, click Cancel.
The wizard rolls back all changes.
The following table lists the dialog boxes and prompts that may appear when you copy a deployment group:

Copy Deployment Group

Modes Description
Wizard Dialog Box

Select Deployment Folders Typical, Folders you want to deploy objects to.
Advanced

Override Deployment Typical, Overrides the default selections for deployment folders.
Folder Advanced

Select Labels Typical, Selects a label in the source repository to apply to the copied
Advanced object versions, and selects a label in the target repository to
apply to the newly created object versions.

Clear Source Deployment Typical, Removes objects from the deployment group after the wizard
Group Advanced completes the deployment operation.

Source/Target Comparison Typical, Specifies if objects in the target folder have been created or
Advanced modified since the last copy.

Sequence Generators and Typical, Retains current values for Sequence Generator and Normalizer
Normalizers Advanced transformations.

Mapping Variables Typical, Retains persistent values for mapping variables.

Advanced

Dependency Information Typical, Copies dependency information for objects in mappings if it

Advanced exists. The dependency information exists if you set the general
options for the Designer to save MX data. The dependency
information is organized in a format that enables reporting tools
to skip steps such as fetching the entire mapping and parsing
expressions when collecting information for reporting.

Retain Workflow Variable Typical, Retains persistent values.

Persisted Values Advanced

Retain Workflow Run Typical, Retains existing workflow run history in the target repository or
History Advanced folder. When you copy a deployment group, you cannot copy
the workflow run history from the source repository or folder.

Retain Integration Service Typical, Retains the assigned Integration Service for workflows.
Assignment Advanced

Database Connections Typical, Lists all database connections in the folder, indicating the
Advanced connections for which you do not have permission to copy.

Message Queue Typical, Lists all message queue connections in the folder.
Connections Advanced

FTP Connections Typical, Lists all FTP connections in the folder, indicating the
Advanced connections for which you do not have permission to copy.

External Loaders Typical, Lists all external loader connections in the folder, indicating the
Advanced connections for which you do not have permission to copy.

Application Connections Typical, Lists all application connections in the folder, indicating the
Advanced connections for which you do not have permission to copy.

MMD Plug-in Typical, Lists plug-in application information upon which the source
Advanced folder depends if the plug-in information does not exist in the
target repository.

Copying a Deployment Group 107

 Copy Deployment Group
Modes Description
Wizard Dialog Box

Integration Services Typical, Selects an Integration Service to associate with workflows. If the
Advanced target repository contains less than two Integration Services,
the wizard skips this step.

Local Shared Folders Typical Lists local shared folders in the target repository that you need
to copy first. To preserve shortcuts and prevent invalid
mappings, click Cancel and copy all listed local shared folders
before copying the folder.

Outdated Shared Folders Typical Lists outdated folders in the target repository that you need to
copy first. To preserve shortcuts and prevent invalid mappings,
click Cancel and copy all listed local shared folders before
copying the folder.

Select Shared Folders Advanced Lists the folder that contains shortcuts and the folder to which
you can establish shortcuts. You can choose to accept or
override the shared folder.

Override Shared Folder Advanced Lists folders you can select to establish shortcuts if you choose
to override the default folder selection in the Select Shared
Folders dialog box.

Compare Folder Advanced Compares folders if the folders you choose in Override Shared
Folder dialog box are different.

Compare Shared Folder - Advanced Lists the results from the folder compare. Displays objects that
Compare Results exist in the local shared folder but not in the global shared
folder. Also displays objects that are older or newer than
matching objects in the global shared folder.
If there are differences between the folders, a message warns
you that shortcuts to missing objects will be removed. The
wizard takes you back to Select Shared Folders dialog box.

Copy Definition Typical, Copies the deployment group from the source repository to the
Advanced target repository.

Deployment Group Exists Typical, Replaces an existing deployment group in the target repository.
Advanced Shows either the existing copies of the deployment group in the
repository or all the deployment groups in the repository.

Replace Conflicting Objects Typical, Replaces conflicting objects in the target non-versioned
Advanced repository. You can choose to replace the conflicting object in
the target repository with the object in the deployment group.
Does not appear for versioned repositories.

Owner and Group Typical, Selects the owner for the copied deployment group in the target
Advanced repository. Default is the current user.

Post-Validation Typical, Validates the objects in the target repository after you copy a
Advanced deployment group to verify that the objects and dependent
objects are valid.

Complete Deployment Typical, Copies the deployment group immediately after you complete
Advanced the wizard and generates a deployment control file to use with
the pmrep command line program. Or, both copies the
deployment group and creates the deployment control file. You
can select to create the deployment control file without copying
the deployment group.
If you do not specify an absolute path, the Repository Manager
generates the deployment control file in the directory where the
Repository Manager runs.
The Repository Manager generates the deployment control file
encoded in UTF-8 format.

108 Chapter 10: Copying Folders and Deployment Groups

Troubleshooting
When I try to copy a folder or deployment group to another repository, the operation fails and a database error
indicates that insufficient free space exists in the target repository. This error occurs even though the target repository
database has enough free space to accommodate the folder or deployment group that I am copying.
The target repository database needs enough free disk space to accommodate approximately twice the amount
of space required by the folder or deployment group that you are copying. The target repository database
requires the extra free space because the deployment operation first copies the data into temporary tables in the
target database and then moves the data from the temporary tables to the target repository tables.

Troubleshooting 109
110 Chapter 10: Copying Folders and Deployment Groups
CHAPTER 11

Exporting and Importing Objects

This chapter includes the following topics:
♦ Overview, 111
♦ The XML and DTD Files, 113
♦ Exporting and Importing Multiple Objects and Object Types, 114
♦ Working with Dependent Objects, 115
♦ Working with Object Versions, 117
♦ Working with Shortcuts, 117
♦ Exporting Objects, 118
♦ Importing Objects, 121
♦ Steps to Export Objects, 124
♦ Steps to Import Objects, 124
♦ Troubleshooting, 127

Overview
In the PowerCenter Client, you can export repository objects to an XML file and then import repository objects
from the XML file. Use the following client applications to export and import repository objects:
♦ Repository Manager. You can export and import both Designer and Workflow Manager objects.
♦ Designer. You can export and import Designer objects.
♦ Workflow Manager. You can export and import Workflow Manager objects.
♦ pmrep. You can export and import both Designer and Workflow Manager objects. You might use pmrep to
automate exporting objects on a daily or weekly basis.
Exporting and importing an object is similar to copying an object from one folder or repository to another. For
example, when you copy an object between folders or export and import that object, you can resolve object
name conflicts. However, when you copy objects between folders or repositories, you must be connected to
both repositories. When you export an object from one repository and import the object into another
repository, you do not need to be connected to both repositories.
Export and import objects between repositories with the same version. Informatica does not support imported
objects from a different release.

111
 You can export and import repository objects to accomplish the following tasks:
♦ Deploy metadata into production. After you test a mapping in a development repository, you can export it
to an XML file and then import it from the XML file into a production repository. You might export and
import objects to incrementally deploy metadata by exporting and importing part of a composite object.
♦ Archive metadata. You can export objects to an XML file that you no longer need before removing them
from the repository.
♦ Share metadata. You can share metadata with a third party. For example, you want to send a mapping to
someone else for testing or analysis, but you do not want to disclose repository connection information for
security reasons. You can export the mapping to an XML file and edit the repository connection information
before sending the XML file. The third party can import the mapping from the XML file and analyze the
metadata.
♦ Search and replace property names in an entire repository object. You can search for a property name and
replace all occurrences of it with a different name. For example, you have a mapping with an unconnected
Lookup transformation. You want to change the name of a port in the unconnected Lookup transformation.
Several other transformations call the lookup port through an expression, so you want to make sure you
change the port name in all other expressions. You can export the mapping to an XML file and open it in a
text editor. Search for the old port name and replace all references to it with the new port name. Then
import the mapping into the repository.
♦ Copy metadata between repositories. You can copy objects between repositories that you cannot connect to
from the same client. Export the object and transfer the XML file to the target machine. Then import the
object from the XML file into the target repository.
♦ Create mappings. You can export an existing mapping and use Mapping Architect for Visio to turn the
mapping into a mapping template. Once a mapping template is created in Mapping Architect for Visio you
can import multiple mappings into the repository.
You can also export and import relational sources and targets to share metadata with other business intelligence
and data modeling tools.

Working with Objects and Object Types

You can export and import the following repository objects:
♦ Sources
♦ Targets
♦ Transformations
♦ Mapplets
♦ Mappings
♦ User-defined functions
♦ Tasks
♦ Sessions
♦ Schedulers
♦ Session configurations
♦ Worklets
♦ Workflows
When you export and import repository objects, you can choose to export and import the following types of
objects:
♦ Multiple object types. You can export and import one or more object types. The combination of object
types you can export and import depends on the PowerCenter Client you use. For more information, see
“Exporting and Importing Multiple Objects and Object Types” on page 114.
♦ Multiple objects. You can export and import one or more objects. For more information, see “Exporting and
Importing Multiple Objects and Object Types” on page 114.

112 Chapter 11: Exporting and Importing Objects

 ♦ Objects from multiple folders. Using the Repository Manager or pmrep, you can export and import objects
from one or more folders in the same repository. Also, you can do this when you access a query result from
the Designer, Workflow Manager, or Repository Manager.
♦ Dependent objects. You can export and import an object with or without its dependent objects. For more
information, see “Working with Dependent Objects” on page 115.

Code Pages
To ensure no data is lost when you import an object, you can export and import objects between repositories
with compatible code pages with the PowerCenter Client. The code page of the originating repository must be
a subset of the destination repository code page. If the two repository code pages are not compatible, the
PowerCenter Client displays an error message and does not import any object.

The XML and DTD Files

When you export repository objects, the PowerCenter Client creates an XML file that contains the metadata of
the exported repository objects. Use this same file to import the repository objects into a repository.
The XML file has an associated Document Type Definition (DTD) file called powrmart.dtd. When you export
repository objects, the PowerCenter Client creates the XML file based on the structure specified in
powrmart.dtd. When you import repository objects, the PowerCenter Client validates the XML file against
powrmart.dtd.
When you install PowerCenter, the installation program copies powrmart.dtd into the client installation
directory. When you export or import an object, the PowerCenter Client looks for powrmart.dtd in the client
installation directory. If powrmart.dtd is not in the client installation directory, you cannot import repository
objects.
An XML file is valid if it complies with the constraints expressed in its associated DTD. Therefore, an exported
XML file is valid if it complies with the constraints expressed in powrmart.dtd. For example, if powrmart.dtd
states that an element must occur once in an XML file, the XML file is invalid if the element occurs more than
once or not at all.
For more information about XML, see the W3C specifications for XML at http://www.w3.org/.
Note: If you modify an exported XML file, you need to make sure that the XML file conforms to the structure of
powrmart.dtd. You also need to make sure the metadata in the XML file conforms to Designer and Workflow
Manager rules. For example, when you define a shortcut to an object, define the folder in which the referenced
object resides as a shared folder. Although PowerCenter validates the XML file before importing repository
objects from it, it might not catch all invalid changes. If you import into the repository an object that does not
conform to Designer or Workflow Manager rules, you might cause data inconsistencies in the repository.
Do not modify the powrmart.dtd file.

CRCVALUE Codes
Informatica restricts which elements you can modify in the XML file. When you export a Designer object, the
PowerCenter Client might include a Cyclic Redundancy Checking Value (CRCVALUE) code in one or more
elements in the XML file. The CRCVALUE code is another attribute in an element.
When the PowerCenter Client includes a CRCVALUE code in the exported XML file, you can modify some
attributes and elements before importing the object into a repository. For example, VSAM source objects
always contain a CRCVALUE code, so you can only modify some attributes in a VSAM source object. If you
modify certain attributes in an element that contains a CRCVALUE code, you cannot import the object.
For example, if you modify the OWNERNAME attribute in the source object in Figure 11-1, you cannot
import the source into the Designer.

The XML and DTD Files 113

 For more information about which attributes and objects you can modify, see “Modifying an Exported XML
File” on page 119.
Figure 11-1 shows part of the element for a source object with the CRCVALUE code:

Figure 11-1. CRCVALUE Code in an Exported XML File

<SOURCE NAME ="SALES_FILE" DBDNAME ="SALES.CBL" IBMCOMP ="YES"
CRCVALUE ="3108520154" OWNERNAME ="" DESCRIPTION ="" BUSINESSNAME =""
DATABASETYPE ="VSAM" ...> CRCVALUE
... code
</SOURCE>

The CRCVALUE attribute for the element SOURCE in Figure 11-1 is 3108520154.
Note: The PowerCenter Client includes CRCVALUE codes in the XML file when you export Designer objects.

Exporting and Importing Multiple Objects and Object

Types
You can export and import multiple objects and multiple object types at the same time. However, the
combination of object types depends on the PowerCenter Client application you use.
Table 11-1 lists the multiple objects you can export and import:

Table 11-1. Options for Exporting and Importing Multiple Objects

PowerCenter Client
Options for Exporting Options for Importing
Application

Repository Manager - Multiple objects from one folder - Multiple objects from multiple folders
- Multiple object types from one folder - Multiple object types from multiple
For example, you can export multiple folders
mappings to the same file. When you import objects from multiple
folders, you can choose which folders to
import into.

pmrep - Multiple objects from multiple folders - Multiple objects from multiple folders
- Multiple object types from multiple - Multiple object types from multiple
folders folders
For example, you can export reusable When you import objects from multiple
transformations and reusable worklets folders, you can choose which folders to
to the same file. import into using the control file.

Designer - Multiple sources, targets, or reusable - Multiple objects from one folder
transformations from one folder - Multiple object types from one folder
For example, you cannot export both You can only import Designer objects.
sources and targets from the Navigator.
You cannot export multiple mappings or
mapplets.
You cannot export multiple object types.

Workflow Manager - Multiple reusable Email, Session, and - Multiple objects from one folder
Command tasks from one folder - Multiple object types from one folder
- Multiple worklets from one folder You can only import Workflow Manager
- Multiple workflows from one folder objects.
For example, you can export a reusable
Email task and a reusable Session task.
Note: You can export different object types from all PowerCenter Client tools by exporting the results of an object query.

114 Chapter 11: Exporting and Importing Objects

Working with Dependent Objects
When you export an object, the PowerCenter Client exports certain dependent objects by default. The
PowerCenter Client does not export all dependent objects. A dependent object is an object that is used by
another object. For example, a source definition referenced by a shortcut is a dependent object of that shortcut.
A dependent object is a child object to the parent object that uses the dependent object.
Table 11-2 lists the dependent objects that the PowerCenter Client includes in the XML file by default:

Table 11-2. Dependent Objects Exported

Parent Object Dependent Child Objects Exported

Mapping Sources, targets, reusable and non-reusable transformations, mapplets, and

user-defined functions.

Mapplet Sources and reusable transformations.

Source with foreign key Source definition containing the primary key.

Target with foreign key Target definition containing the primary key.

Shortcut The object the shortcut references.

Any repository object Any reusable or non-reusable metadata extension associated with the object.*

Session Session configuration and reusable and non-reusable tasks when you export
from any client application.
Mapping used by the session when you export from the Repository Manager or
pmrep.

Transformation User-defined functions.

User-defined function User-defined functions.

Worklet Reusable and non-reusable tasks, sessions, worklets, and user-defined

functions.

Workflow Scheduler and reusable and non-reusable tasks, sessions, worklets, and user-
defined functions.
*The PowerCenter Client always exports metadata extensions. Verify that you register a plug-in in the destination repository
before you import an object using a vendor-defined metadata extension associated with the plug-in. If the plug-in is not
registered, the PowerCenter Client imports the object without the metadata extension.

When you export and import objects, you can export and import any of the following combination of objects:
♦ Parent object with dependent child objects. The XML file contains metadata for parent and child objects.
The PowerCenter Client exports the dependent child objects listed in Table 11-2 by default.
♦ Parent object without dependent child objects. The XML file contains metadata for the parent object, but
not the child object.

Exporting and Importing Parent Objects

You can choose to export a parent object with or without its dependent child objects. You might want to export
and import an object without its dependent objects if you change a workflow property, such as a workflow
variable, but you did not change any task in the workflow.
You can choose the export options in the Export Options dialog box.

Working with Dependent Objects 115

 The following table describes the options in the Export Options dialog box:

Export Option Description

Export Primary Key Tables When When you export a source or target containing a foreign key, the
Exporting Sources/Targets with PowerCenter Client exports the source or target containing the
Foreign Keys primary key.

Export Original Object Referred by When you export a shortcut, the PowerCenter Client exports the
the Shortcut When Exporting actual object referenced by the shortcut.
Shortcuts

Export Reusable Objects Used by When you export a mapping, mapplet, worklet, or workflow, the
Objects Being Exported PowerCenter Client exports all reusable objects used by the parent
object.
For example, the PowerCenter Client exports all sources, targets, and
reusable transformations when you export a mapping.

Export Non-Reusable Objects Used When you export a mapping, mapplet, worklet, or workflow, the
by Objects Being Exported PowerCenter Client exports all non-reusable objects used by the
parent object.
For example, the PowerCenter Client exports all non-reusable
transformations for a mapping or mapplet, and all non-reusable tasks
for a worklet or workflow.

To access the Export Options dialog box, click the Advanced Options link in the Export dialog box when you
export objects.
When you export an object with its dependent child objects, the PowerCenter Client exports the metadata for
the parent object and the dependent objects. When you export an object without its dependent objects, the
PowerCenter Client exports the metadata for the object, but does not export metadata for the dependent
objects. However, the object you export still references the dependent objects even though they do not exist in
the XML file.
When you import an object that uses dependent objects, the results differ depending on whether the dependent
objects exist in the XML file:
♦ Dependent objects exist in XML file. When you import an object, the PowerCenter Client imports all
dependent objects. For example, you export a mapping including its dependent objects. When you import
the mapping, the PowerCenter Client imports all objects used by the mapping, such as the sources.
♦ Dependent objects do not exist in XML file. When you import an object, the PowerCenter Client looks for
an object in the destination folder with the same name. If the PowerCenter Client finds an object with the
same name, it uses the object in the destination folder. If the PowerCenter Client does not find an object
with the same name, it does not import the object.
For example, you create a workflow with multiple worklets, sessions, and tasks. You change the link
condition between two tasks. You want to update the link condition when you import the workflow into a
different folder. Export the workflow and do not export the reusable and non-reusable tasks. When you
import the workflow, the PowerCenter Client imports the workflow metadata. The PowerCenter Client uses
the worklets, sessions, and tasks that exist in the destination folder.

Working with Sessions

When you export a session, the associated mapping must be valid. However, the session does not need to be
valid before you export it. You might want to export an invalid session to send to someone else to troubleshoot.
When you export a session from the Workflow Manager, the PowerCenter Client exports the session, but not
the associated mapping. However, when you export a session from the Repository Manager, the PowerCenter
Client exports the session and the associated mapping.
You can also create an XML file that contains both the session and mapping objects by using pmrep or the query
results accessed from the Repository Manager to select both objects and export them. Or, use the Designer to
export the mapping and the Workflow Manager to export the session. Then edit one of the XML files to
include both objects.

116 Chapter 11: Exporting and Importing Objects

 To import a session, the associated mapping must exist in the target folder and be valid. If the mapping does
not exist or is invalid, the PowerCenter Client does not import the session. However, when you use the
Repository Manager or pmrep, you can import the session if the XML file contains the metadata for the
associated mapping.

Working with Object Versions

You can export one version of an object at a time. When you export an object from the Navigator or workspace,
the PowerCenter Client exports the latest version of the object. If you want to export an earlier version of an
object, you can select it from a query result or object history. In the View History or Query Results window,
select the objects to export and choose Tools-Export to XML File. You can select multiple object versions to
export, but the PowerCenter Client exports only the latest version selected for that object.
For example, the query results contain two mappings that use different versions of the same source. If you
export both mappings, the PowerCenter Client exports the latest version of the source.
When you import an object that exists in the target folder, the PowerCenter Client handles object versions
differently depending on how you resolve the object conflict. You can resolve an object conflict by replacing,
renaming, or reusing the object.
For example, the target folder contains a target called WEEKLY_ORDERS and the latest version is three. You
import a target with the same name. When you replace the target, the PowerCenter Client changes the existing
target definition to version four. When you reuse the target, the PowerCenter Client does not change the
version of the existing target definition. When you rename the target, the PowerCenter Client creates a new
target definition and assigns it a version of one, and does not change the version of the existing target
definition.
Note: You cannot export deleted objects from a query result or object history.

Working with Shortcuts

You can export and import local and global shortcuts.
When you export a shortcut, you can choose to export the object the shortcut references. You might want to
export the referenced object if it does not exist in the destination repository. You can import the shortcut and
the referenced object concurrently.
When you import a shortcut, you can specify folders for the shortcut and the referenced object. The
PowerCenter Client creates a shortcut in the folder you specify. The new shortcut points to the object in the
folder you specify for the referenced object.
You always specify a folder for the referenced object, whether or not you also import the referenced object into
that folder. The PowerCenter Client searches for the referenced object in the folder you specify to establish the
shortcut. However, the import behavior is based on whether the PowerCenter Client finds the referenced object
in the folder you specify:
♦ The PowerCenter Client finds the referenced object. The PowerCenter Client imports the shortcut object
into the destination repository using the metadata in the XML file. The PowerCenter Client finds the
referenced object in the folder because the object existed in the folder, or because you imported it along with
the shortcut.
♦ The PowerCenter Client does not find the referenced object. When the XML file contains the metadata for
the referenced object, the PowerCenter Client imports the actual object into the destination repository using
the metadata in the XML file. The PowerCenter Client writes a message notifying you that it imported the

Working with Object Versions 117

 actual object instead of the shortcut object. When the XML file does not contain the metadata for the
referenced object, it does not import the shortcut.
When you import a shortcut into a local repository, you can specify a folder from the local repository or the
global repository in the domain. When you import a shortcut into a global repository, you can specify a folder
from the global repository.

Shortcut Types
The type of shortcut the PowerCenter Client creates in the destination repository depends on the folders you
specify for the shortcut and the referenced object. When both the shortcut and referenced object exist in the
same repository, the PowerCenter Client creates a local shortcut. When the shortcut exists in a local repository
and the referenced object exists in a global repository in the same domain, the PowerCenter Client creates a
global shortcut. The type of shortcut the PowerCenter Client creates does not depend on the shortcut type
specified in the XML file.

Importing Shortcuts to Sources

When the PowerCenter Client imports the object instead of the shortcut, the imported object does not inherit
any changes you make to the original object in the source repository. The XML file defines the metadata for the
object.
Use the imported object as you would the original object. However, if the object is a source definition, you
might need to rename the source definition.
For example, you export a shortcut named Shortcut_To_Employees and you also export the referenced object.
You use the Designer to import the shortcut into a different repository. In the Import Wizard, you choose to
import the shortcut, but you do not import the referenced object. Also in the Import Wizard, you choose a
folder in the destination repository to specify the location of an existing referenced object. However, the folder
does not contain an object with the same name as the referenced object specified in the XML file.
The PowerCenter Client does not find an object with the same name in the folder you specified, so it imports
the actual object instead. The Designer creates a new source definition in the destination folder named
Shortcut_To_Employees. This source definition is a copy of the original object, and is not a shortcut. When
you use the source definition in a mapping, the default SQL used to extract data from the source defines the
source as Shortcut_To_Employees. If the source table in the source database is named Employees, you must
rename the source definition (Employees) or enter an SQL override for the source qualifier connected to the
source definition (renaming the source table Employees) for the Integration Service to extract source data.

Exporting Objects
When you export an object, the PowerCenter Client writes the definition of the object to an XML file. The
XML file complies with powrmart.dtd and uses the same code page as the repository from which it was
exported. After you export objects, you can modify the XML file.
When you export the latest version of an object, the PowerCenter Client exports either the version of the object
saved in the repository or the version of the object you have open in the Designer or Workflow Manager:
♦ Version saved in the repository. When you export an object from the Repository Manager, pmrep, or the
query results accessed from the Repository Manager, the PowerCenter Client exports the version of the
object saved in the repository.
♦ Version you have open in the Designer or Workflow Manager. When you export an object from the
Designer, Workflow Manager, or query results accessed from the Designer or Workflow Manager, the
PowerCenter Client exports the latest version of the object, including any change you made to it since you
last saved it to the repository.

118 Chapter 11: Exporting and Importing Objects

 However, when you export shortcuts from the query results accessed from the Designer, the Designer exports
either the version of the referenced object you have open in the Designer or the version of referenced object
saved in the repository, depending on the other objects you export.
For example, you run an object query from the Designer. The query result contains the following objects:
♦ Shortcut_to_Source1 in the Orders folder. The shortcut references Source1 in the Items folder.
♦ Source1 in the Items folder
♦ Mapping1 in the Items folder
♦ Target1 in the Sales folder
The Designer behavior depends on the other objects you export:

Exported Objects Designer Export Behavior

- Shortcut_to_Source1 from the Orders folder Designer exports the saved version of Source1 because you
- Target1 from the Sales folder do not export any object from the same folder that contains
the referenced object, Source1.

- Shortcut_to_Source1 from the Orders folder Designer exports the version of Source1 you have open in
- Mapping1 from the Items folder the Designer because you export an object, Mapping1, from
the same folder that contains the referenced object, Source1.
Therefore, the Designer exports the latest versions of all
objects in the Items folder, including changes you made to
them since you last saved the repository.

Modifying an Exported XML File

After exporting an object, you can modify the XML attributes before importing the object into a repository. For
example, suppose you have inconsistent column names across a mapping. You want to globally search and
replace Cust_ID and Customers_ID with Customer_ID. You can export the mapping into an XML file, modify
the values in the XML file, and then import the mapping with the new values.
Modifying an XML file is an easy way to change the metadata for a repository object. However, Informatica
restricts the elements and attributes you can modify in the XML file.
Use the following rules when you modify XML files:
♦ Define only the metadata that you can create in the Designer or Workflow Manager. For example, do not
associate a Source Qualifier transformation with a VSAM source.
♦ Do not modify powrmart.dtd.
♦ Verify that the structure of the XML file complies with the constraints in powrmart.dtd. For example, if
powrmart.dtd says that an element must include a specified child element, make sure you include the child
element.
♦ You can modify the BUSINESSNAME and DESCRIPTION attributes in any element.
♦ You can modify all attributes listed in Table 11-3 on page 120, regardless of CRCVALUE codes.
♦ You cannot modify attributes in an element containing a CRCVALUE unless the attribute is listed in
Table 11-3 on page 120.
♦ You cannot modify attributes in an element if its parent element contains a CRCVALUE code, unless the
attributes are listed in Table 11-3 on page 120.

Modifiable Objects
You can modify some attributes and elements in an XML file.

Exporting Objects 119

 Table 11-3 lists the repository objects you can modify. The Modifiable Attributes column lists the attributes you
can modify for an exported object and import. The Create New column indicates which objects you can define
directly in the XML file and import.

Table 11-3. Modifiable Repository Objects

Repository Object Type Modifiable Attributes Create New

Source Relational All Yes

Flat File All Yes

VSAM BUSINESSNAME No
DESCRIPTION

MQ BUSINESSNAME No
DESCRIPTION

XML BUSINESSNAME No
DESCRIPTION

PeopleSoft BUSINESSNAME No
DESCRIPTION

SAP table BUSINESSNAME No

DESCRIPTION

SAP ALE IDoc All Yes

TIBCO All Yes

Null source All Yes

Target Relational All Yes

SAP BW BUSINESSNAME No
DESCRIPTION

XML BUSINESSNAME No
DESCRIPTION

MQ BUSINESSNAME No
DESCRIPTION

TIBCO All Yes

Null target All Yes

Reusable Transformation All All Yes

Mapping Relational All Yes

Flat File All Yes

VSAM All No

MQ All No

XML All No

PeopleSoft BUSINESSNAME No
DESCRIPTION

SAP table BUSINESSNAME No

DESCRIPTION

SAP ALE IDoc All Yes

TIBCO All Yes

120 Chapter 11: Exporting and Importing Objects

 Table 11-3. Modifiable Repository Objects

Repository Object Type Modifiable Attributes Create New

Mapplet Relational All Yes

Flat File All Yes

PeopleSoft BUSINESSNAME No
DESCRIPTION

Siebel BUSINESSNAME No
DESCRIPTION

SAP table BUSINESSNAME No

DESCRIPTION

SAP ALE IDoc All Yes

TIBCO All Yes

Session Reusable All Yes

Non-reusable All Yes

Task Reusable All Yes

Non-reusable All Yes

Worklet Reusable All Yes

Non-reusable All Yes

Workflow n/a All Yes

Importing Objects
You can import objects from a valid XML file. The XML file must comply with powrmart.dtd. You can import
objects that you exported from the same repository or a different repository.
When you import an object, the PowerCenter Client performs the following tasks:
1. Validates the XML file against powrmart.dtd.
2. Parses the XML file.
3. Validates the objects in the XML file.
4. Creates the objects in the repository.
When you import an object in the Designer, Workflow Manager, or Repository Manager, the Import Wizard
appears. When you import using pmrep, you use a control file to specify the same import options in the Import
Wizard.
You can complete the following actions in the Import Wizard:
♦ Choose the XML file.
♦ Choose which objects to import. You can choose all or some objects listed in the XML file. If the XML file
contains both Designer and Workflow Manager objects, the Import Wizard shows Designer objects when
you use the Designer, and Workflow Manager objects when you use the Workflow Manager. You can
import all object types using the Repository Manager.
♦ Match folders. When you use the Repository Manager to import, you can match folders listed in the XML
file with folders in the destination repository.

Importing Objects 121

 ♦ Check in the objects and apply a label. When you use the Repository Manager to import objects into a
versioned repository, you can check in the objects after you import them. You can enter check in comments
in the Import Wizard. If you check in the objects, you can apply a label to them. Choose an existing label or
create a new one.
♦ Resolve object conflicts. When you import an object into a folder that contains an object with the same
name, you can choose to rename, replace, or reuse the object.

Validating XML Files Against the DTD

You import objects from a valid XML file. The PowerCenter Client validates the XML file against the DTD
and parses the XML file before importing. If the XML file is not valid, the PowerCenter Client displays an error
message and does not import the objects. The DTD file, powrmart.dtd, is located in the PowerCenter Client
directory.

RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “The XML and DTD Files” on page 113

Validating Objects
You import valid objects into the repository. The PowerCenter Client validates each object in the XML file to
ensure that it conforms to the PowerCenter specifications for that object. For example, a mapplet cannot
contain a target definition.
In addition, the PowerCenter Client validates objects with CRCVALUE codes to ensure that certain elements
and attributes of Designer objects in the XML file have not been modified. The CRCVALUE code determines
whether or not you can modify certain elements and attributes.
The PowerCenter Client does not import objects with CRCVALUE codes that have been modified nor objects
that do not conform to PowerCenter specifications.

RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “The XML and DTD Files” on page 113

Resolving Object Conflicts

When you import objects, sometimes an object in the XML file has the same name as an object in the
destination folder. You can choose to resolve object conflicts in the following ways:
♦ Create general object resolution rules.
♦ Resolve specific object conflicts.

Resolving General Object Conflicts

You can resolve some object conflicts by creating rules that apply to a set of objects. Create rules on the Specify
Rules for Conflict Resolutions page of the Import Wizard. When you create an object resolution rule, the
PowerCenter Client resolves object conflicts for objects to which the rule applies.

122 Chapter 11: Exporting and Importing Objects

The following figure shows where you can resolve general object conflicts in the Import Wizard:

Apply rule to
these objects.

Choose how to
resolve object
conflicts.

You can create multiple rules. Use the buttons in the Import Wizard to move the rules up and down. The
PowerCenter Client applies the rules to objects in order. If multiple rules apply to one object, the PowerCenter
Client applies the uppermost rule.
The following table describes the different columns you define for each rule:

Column Description

Select Choose the set of objects the rule applies to. You can choose the following sets of objects:
Criteria - Objects with label. Applies to all objects with the label you choose. You can select this option
when you import objects into a versioned repository.
- Objects in query. Applies to all objects that result from the object query you choose. You can
select this option when you import objects into a versioned repository.
- Objects of type. Applies to objects of the type you choose.
- All objects. Applies to all objects you import.

Select Value Choose a value that modifies the first column. For example, if you select Objects with label in
the first column, choose the label name in this column.

Select Choose how to resolve the object conflicts. You can resolve conflicts using the following
Resolution methods:
- Replace. Replaces the existing object in the destination folder.
- Reuse. Uses the existing object in the destination folder.
- Rename. Creates a new object in the destination folder with a new name. When you choose
Rename, you can specify a different name in the Conflict Resolution Wizard.
- Prompt User. You can choose a resolution on an object by object basis. When you choose
Prompt User, you can define the specific conflict resolutions in the Conflict Resolution
Wizard.

After you create general object resolution rules, you can resolve specific object conflicts using the Import
Wizard.

Resolving Specific Object Conflicts

Some object conflicts may still exist after you define rules to resolve conflicts. You can resolve specific object
conflicts in the Import Wizard.
The Import Wizard displays all folders listed in the XML file. It also displays the object resolution status for
objects in each folder:
♦ Unresolved. Some objects in this folder conflict with objects in the target folder. Click Resolve to resolve the
object conflicts. You must resolve all object conflicts before you can import objects.

Importing Objects 123

 ♦ Resolved. No object in this folder conflicts with objects in the target folder. The Import Wizard is ready to
import these objects. However, you can view or edit the object conflict resolutions by clicking View/Edit.
When the Import Wizard detects unresolved conflicts for objects in a folder, it opens the Conflict Resolution
Wizard.
The Conflict Resolution Wizard is similar to the Copy Wizard. The user interface is similar and you resolve the
same type of object conflicts in both.
After you resolve object conflicts in the Conflict Resolution Wizard, you return to the Import Wizard.

Steps to Export Objects

You can export objects from the repository using the Designer, Workflow Manager, Repository Manager, query
result, or object history.
To export objects from the query result or object history, select the objects to export and choose Tools-Export
to XML File.

To export an object from the Designer, Workflow Manager, or Repository Manager:

1. Open the folder that contains the objects you want to export.
2. In the Navigator or workspace, select the objects to export.
3. Click Repository > Export Objects.
4. To choose which dependent objects to export, click Advanced Options.
5. In the Export Options dialog box, choose which dependent objects to export and click OK.
6. In the Export dialog box, navigate to the directory where you want to save the XML file. Enter a name for
the XML file and click Save.
The PowerCenter Client exports the objects to an XML file and displays export status in the Exported
Objects dialog box.
7. Click View File to view the XML file that the PowerCenter Client creates.
8. Click Errors and Warnings tabs to view errors that may have occurred.
9. Click Close in the Exported Objects dialog box.

Steps to Import Objects

You can import objects into the repository using the Designer, Workflow Manager, or Repository Manager.
You can compare objects when importing objects with the Import Wizard.

To import an object:

1. Open the folder into which you want to import an object.

2. Click Repository > Import Objects.
The Import Wizard opens to guide you through the process of importing the objects into the target folder.
3. In the Import Wizard, click Browse to locate the XML file. Navigate to the directory where the XML file is
located. Select the XML file and click OK.
4. Click Next.

124 Chapter 11: Exporting and Importing Objects

5. Select the objects to import and click Add.
When you select a node in the Objects in File pane and click Add, the Import Wizard adds all objects listed
under that node. For example, when you select Sources and click Add, the Import Wizard adds all sources
for that folder. Or, when you click a particular database definition node, the Import Wizard imports all
sources listed under that database definition node. After you add an object to the list of objects to import,
the Import Wizard displays a check mark on the icon for objects in the Objects in File pane.
To remove an object from the Objects to Import pane, select the object and click Remove.
You can right-click an object and choose Properties to view the properties associated with an object.
You can filter which objects to view in the Objects in File pane. Select a folder or repository in the Folders
field.
Note: When you import objects using the Designer or Workflow Manager, you can select objects from one
folder. When you import objects using the Repository Manager, you can select objects from multiple
folders from one repository.
6. Click Next.
The Match Folders step of the Import Wizard appears when you import objects using the Repository
Manager, or when you import a shortcut object in the Designer. You can match folders listed in the XML
file to folders in the destination repository.
7. Click the Open button for a folder listed in the Import Wizard.
The Folder Selection dialog box appears.
8. Select a folder in the destination repository and click OK.
You must select a different folder for each folder listed in the Import Wizard.
Tip: You can create a new folder in the destination repository by clicking Create Folder. Specify the folder
properties in the Create Folder dialog box.
9. Click Next.
The Choose Options step of the Import Wizard appears when you use the Repository Manager to import
objects into a versioned repository. You can check in the objects and apply labels to the them after
importing.
10. To check in all objects after importing them, select Check In and enter comments in the comment field.
11. To apply a label to all objects you import, select Apply Label and click Select Label. In the Label Browser
dialog box, choose the label and click OK.
You can only apply a label to the objects if you choose to check them in.
12. Click Next.
The Specify Rules for Conflict Resolutions step of the Import Wizard appears when you import objects
using the Repository Manager. You can create rules to resolve general object conflicts. You can apply rules
to objects with a certain label, objects listed in an object query, objects of the same type, or all objects.
13. To create a new rule, click New Rule. Choose to which objects to apply the rule and select a resolution.
14. Click Next.
The Import Wizard opens the Conflict Resolution Wizard for objects in one of the folders listed in the
XML file. The Conflict Resolution Wizard is similar to the Copy Wizard. Use the Conflict Resolution
Wizard to resolve specific object conflicts.
15. Click Compare Conflict to compare conflicting objects in the XML file and target repository.
The Diff Tool window appears.

Steps to Import Objects 125

 You can save the comparison as a text or HTML file.
If the objects in the XML file exist in the target repository, the Targets window appears instead of the Diff
Tool window.

16. Resolve object conflicts as they appear in the Conflict Resolution Wizard. Click Next to proceed through
the Conflict Resolution Wizard.
17. Click Close when you resolve all the conflicts for this folder.
The Import Wizard opens the Conflict Resolution Wizard for objects in any other folder listed in the XML
file. When you resolve conflicts for all objects in all folders, the Import Wizard proceeds with the import
process.
You can click View/Edit to view or edit the object conflicts for the objects in that folder.
Note: If you cancel the Conflict Resolution Wizard for a folder, the Import Wizard displays the status of
that folder as unresolved. Click Resolve in the Action column for that folder to open the Conflict
Resolution Wizard and resolve the object conflicts.
18. Click Import in the Import Wizard to import the objects into the repository. The PowerCenter Client
imports the objects into the destination repository, and displays the progress of the import process.

126 Chapter 11: Exporting and Importing Objects

 The Output window displays the results of the import process. Errors and warnings are designated by
colored text.
19. Click Done.

Troubleshooting
When I tried to import a shortcut to an object, the Designer imported the actual object instead of the shortcut.
To import a shortcut to an object into a repository, the Designer must be able to connect to the source
repository to reestablish the shortcut. When it cannot connect to the source repository, it imports the object the
shortcut references using the metadata in the XML file.

I imported a mapping from an XML file I modified, but the Designer marked it invalid.
Make sure that the metadata you define in the XML file is valid. You must be able to create the object you
define in the Designer or Workflow Manager. For example, if you edit the metadata for a mapplet, make sure
the source is not a VSAM source. The Designer marks mapplets with VSAM sources as invalid.

Troubleshooting 127
128 Chapter 11: Exporting and Importing Objects
CHAPTER 12

Exchanging Metadata
This chapter includes the following topics:
♦ Overview, 129
♦ Working with Metadata Extensions, 131
♦ Steps to Export Metadata, 132
♦ Steps to Import Metadata, 133
♦ Exchanging Metadata with Business Objects Designer, 134
♦ Troubleshooting, 136

Overview
Use the Repository Manager to share source and target metadata with other business intelligence (BI) and data
modeling tools, such as Business Objects Designer. PowerCenter uses the Meta Integration® Model Bridge
(MIMB) from Meta Integration Technology, Inc. to exchange metadata with other BI and data modeling tools.
MIMB uses the specifications in powrmart.dtd to exchange metadata with PowerCenter.
Use metadata exchange to synchronize definitions between PowerCenter and third-party tools. For example,
you might export some fact and dimension targets to Business Objects Designer and then add a column to each
target using Business Objects Designer. You can then import those targets into a repository to update the target
definitions with the changes you made in Business Objects Designer.
The Repository Manager uses a wizard to guide you through the export or import process. The wizard prompts
you for different options, depending on the BI or data modeling tool. Use the Conflict Resolution Wizard to
resolve conflicts between objects when you import metadata. The Conflict Resolution Wizard is similar to the
Copy Wizard.
To exchange metadata, you export the metadata from the source tool and import the metadata into the target
tool. PowerCenter can be the source or target tool. To exchange metadata between PowerCenter and another
tool, use one of the follow methods:
♦ Use PowerCenter as the source tool. In PowerCenter, export metadata to a file recognized by the target
tool, and then use the target BI or data modeling tool to import metadata from the file.
♦ Use the BI or data modeling tool as the source tool. In the source BI or data modeling tool, export
metadata to a file recognized by the source tool, and then use PowerCenter to import metadata from the file.
To export metadata, select an object and click Repository > Export Metadata. To import metadata, select a
folder and click Repository > Import Metadata.

129
 You can export to and import from the following BI and data modeling tools:
♦ Adaptive Repository Foundation
♦ Business Objects Data Integrator
♦ Business Objects Designer
♦ CA ERwin Data Modeler 4.x and CA ERwin Data Modeler 7.x
♦ CA ERwin 3.0 (export only), CA ERwin 3.x (ERX), and CA ERwin 3.5x (export only)
♦ CA Gen
♦ Cognos Impromptu (import only)
♦ Cognos ReportNet Framework Manager
♦ Embarcadero ER/Studio
♦ Hyperion Application Builder
♦ Hyperion Essbase Integration Services
♦ IBM DB2 Cube Views
♦ IBM DB2 Warehouse Manager
♦ IBM Rational Rose
♦ Microsoft Visio Database
♦ MicroStrategy
♦ OMG CWM
♦ Oracle Designer
♦ Oracle Warehouse Builder
♦ Popkin System Architect
♦ SAS ETL Studio
♦ Select SE
♦ Silverrun-RDM
♦ Sybase PowerDesigner
Note: You can also exchange metadata with BI and data modeling tools by using the Export Objects and Import
Objects menu commands. You do not need a PowerCenter Metadata Exchange option license key, but you
must be able to export or import XML files that conform to powrmart.dtd.

RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “Exporting and Importing Objects” on page 111

♦ “Steps to Export Metadata” on page 132

♦ “Steps to Import Metadata” on page 133

Working with Column Properties

Not all BI and data modeling tools use all column properties that PowerCenter uses, such as precision and scale.
Also, not all tools support all datatypes that PowerCenter supports. For example, Business Objects Designer
does not support binary datatypes and it does not use precision, scale, and not null information. When you
export a binary column to Business Objects Designer, Business Objects Designer changes the datatype to a
string and does not preserve the values for the precision, scale, or not null properties.
When you import metadata into PowerCenter from a tool that does not use all column properties, the
Metadata Import Wizard uses default values for the column properties. However, you can retain the column
properties if a source or target of the same name exists in the folder. To retain the column properties, enable the
Retain Physical Properties attribute in the Metadata Import Wizard. You might want to do this if you export
metadata to a tool that does not use all column properties, modify the metadata in the other tool, and then
import the modified metadata back into PowerCenter.

130 Chapter 12: Exchanging Metadata

 Rules and Guidelines
Consider the following rules and guidelines when you exchange metadata with BI or data modeling tools:
♦ You can export and import relational source and target definitions.
♦ You can import multiple source and target definitions at a time.
♦ You can export multiple source definitions or multiple target definitions at a time. You cannot export source
and target definitions at the same time.
♦ You cannot export cubes and dimensions. However, you can export targets to some tools as dimensions.
♦ You cannot export shortcuts.
♦ When you export a source or target with a foreign key, the Repository Service also exports the source or
target containing the corresponding primary key.
♦ When you import metadata into PowerCenter through MIMB, keys and referential integrity constraints are
not persisted.
♦ You must have a Metadata Exchange option license to exchange metadata for a specific tool.

Working with Metadata Extensions

Some third-party tools store user-defined properties. A user-defined property is metadata you define for an
object within the tool, such as metadata extensions you define in PowerCenter. MIMB preserves user-defined
properties when you exchange metadata with third-party tools that support user-defined properties.
For example, when you export metadata to IBM Rational Rose, MIMB converts user-defined metadata
extensions to user-defined properties in Rational Rose. Rational Rose creates a tab labeled Informatica with a
user-defined property for each user-defined metadata extension. Also, when you import metadata into
PowerCenter from Rational Rose, MIMB converts each user-defined property on the Informatica tab into a
user-defined metadata extension.
You might want to create user-defined metadata extensions in the source and target definitions to specify fact
and dimension tables in a start schema.
For more information about which third-party tools support user-defined properties, consult the third-party
tool documentation.

Working with Star Schemas

Use PowerCenter to create a star schema of fact and dimension tables. You can create these definitions in the
Target Designer, or you can use the mapping wizards. When you export relational target definitions in a star
schema to a third-party tool, by default, MIMB does not store the dimensional role of each definition, such as
fact or dimension.
You can create user-defined metadata extensions in the source and target definitions to define the dimensional
role of each definition. When you export source and target definitions with these user-defined metadata
extensions, MIMB converts the information in the metadata extensions to dimensional role information in
third-party tools that work with dimensional metadata, such as IBM DB2 Cube Views.
Also, when you import metadata into PowerCenter from a third-party tool that works with dimensional
metadata, MIMB converts the dimensional information into user-defined metadata extensions in PowerCenter.

Working with Metadata Extensions 131

 The following table lists the metadata extension names and values that MIMB uses when you export and import
dimensional metadata:

Metadata Extension Name Possible Metadata Extension Values

DimensionalRoleType UNDEFINED
FACT
DIMENSION
OUTRIGGER
BRIDGE
HIERARCHY_NAVIGATION

DimensionalType FIXED
TYPE_1
TYPE_2
TYPE_3
Note: Not all third-party tools that work with dimensional metadata support all dimensional role and
dimensional type values.

For example, you have the following relational target definitions with metadata extensions in PowerCenter:

Target Name Metadata Extension Name Metadata Extension Value

Customer DimensionalRoleType FACT

CustAddress DimensionalRoleType DIMENSION

CustPhone DimensionalRoleType DIMENSION

You export the target definitions to IBM DB2 Cube Views. You import the PowerCenter metadata into Cube
Views. Cube Views imports the Customer table as a fact table, and the CustAddress and CustPhone tables as
dimension tables.

Steps to Export Metadata

Use the following procedure to export metadata from PowerCenter to a file recognized by the target BI or data
modeling tool.

To export metadata:

1. In the Repository Manager Navigator, select the object or objects you want to export, and click Repository
> Export Metadata.
The Metadata Export Wizard appears.
2. Choose the target tool you want to export the object to.
Click More Info to read about the tool requirements.
3. Click Next.
The Metadata Export Wizard displays options specific to the tool you select.
4. Enter the options specific for the tool to which you are exporting.
Choose a path and file name for the target file, if needed.
5. Click Export.
Click Show Details to view detailed messages about the metadata conversion. Click Save Log to save the
message log to a text file.
6. Click Finish to close the wizard.

132 Chapter 12: Exchanging Metadata

Steps to Import Metadata
Use the following procedure to import metadata from a file created by another BI or data modeling tool.

To import metadata:

1. In the Repository Manager, select the folder into which you want to import metadata, and click Repository
> Import Metadata.
The Metadata Import Wizard appears.
2. Choose the source tool to import the object.
Click More Info for information about the tool and the usage.
3. Click Next.
The Metadata Import Wizard displays options specific to the tool you select.
4. Enter the options specific for the tool from which you are importing.
Choose a path and file name for the file that contains the metadata, if needed.
5. Click Next.
The PowerCenter Options page of the wizard appears.
6. Enter the PowerCenter options.
The following table describes the PowerCenter options you define in the Metadata Import Wizard:

Option Description

Export Objects Type of repository object or objects to create. You can create following definitions:
source, target, or source, target, and mappings
Default is source.

Database Type Database type for the source or target definitions the wizard creates.
The wizard can define the object definition database type based on the metadata
defined in the file, or you can override the database type by choosing a database
type here.
Default is auto detect.

Database Name Database name under which you want to group the repository objects in the
Navigator. If you do not specify a database name, the Metadata Import Wizard
groups all objects based on the source database.

Codepage Code page of the PowerCenter repository you import the metadata into.
Default is MS1252.

Export Metadata Export additional descriptions, comments or notes as PowerCenter Metadata

Extensions Extensions.
Default is True.

7. Click Next. The Metadata Import Wizard converts the metadata in the file to a format recognized by
PowerCenter.
The Metadata Import Wizard displays the import results.
Click Show Details to view detailed messages about the metadata conversion. Click Save Log to save the
message log to a text file.
8. Click Next.
The Object Selection page of the wizard appears.
9. Select the objects to import into the repository, and click Finish.

Steps to Import Metadata 133

 The Metadata Import Wizard adds the objects to the folder in the repository. If the folder contains objects
with the same name as those you import, the Metadata Import Wizard opens the Conflict Resolution
Wizard. Use the Conflict Resolution Wizard to resolve specific object conflicts.
10. Click Compare Conflict to compare conflicting objects in the import file and target repository.
Resolve object conflicts as they appear in the Conflict Resolution Wizard.
11. Click Next to proceed through the Conflict Resolution Wizard.
12. Click Close when you resolve all conflicts.
The Metadata Import Wizard imports all objects.

Exchanging Metadata with Business Objects Designer

You can exchange metadata with Business Objects Designer by exporting metadata from PowerCenter into
Business Objects Designer or by importing metadata from Business Objects Designer into PowerCenter. You
can exchange source and target definitions, including facts and dimensions, between PowerCenter and Business
Objects Designer.
When you exchange metadata between PowerCenter and Business Objects Designer, PowerCenter uses MIMB
to convert metadata to or from a Business Objects universe. A Business Objects universe is a mapping of the
data structure of database tables, columns, and joins. For PowerCenter metadata, a universe is a representation
of the metadata from PowerCenter source and target definitions. When you export metadata, you can choose to
update an existing universe or create a new universe. Use a universe to build queries and generate and perform
analysis in Business Objects.

RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “Steps to Export Metadata” on page 132

♦ “Steps to Import Metadata” on page 133

Metadata and Datatype Conversion

Metadata names and datatypes are converted between PowerCenter and Business Objects Designer when you
exchange metadata. MIMB converts metadata types to classes and objects in Business Objects Designer.
If Business Objects Designer does not support a specific PowerCenter metadata name or column property,
PowerCenter does not export the metadata. For example, a source definition in PowerCenter might use the
HIDDEN property for a column, which Business Objects Designer does not support. PowerCenter does not
export the column property to Business Objects Designer.
When you export metadata from PowerCenter to Business Objects Designer, MIMB converts PowerCenter
metadata names and datatypes to the corresponding values in Business Objects Designer. Likewise, when you
import metadata from Business Objects Designer, MIMB converts Business Objects Designer metadata object
name and datatypes to the corresponding PowerCenter values. If PowerCenter supports a Business Objects
datatype, MIMB does not convert the Business Objects datatype when it imports the metadata.
When you export source or target definitions that contain foreign keys, PowerCenter also exports the metadata
referenced by the foreign keys to Business Objects Designer. You can define the types of joins PowerCenter
performs when it exports metadata that includes foreign keys when you export the metadata in PowerCenter.
Business Objects Designer does not support all metadata names, column properties, and datatypes supported by
PowerCenter.

134 Chapter 12: Exchanging Metadata

 The following table lists the PowerCenter metadata names and the corresponding Business Objects Designer
metadata:

PowerCenter Metadata Name Business Objects Designer Name

Powermart Universe

Object Name (source or target) Class Name (represented in Business Objects

Designer by a folder icon)

Attribute Name Object Name (represented by an icon under the

Class Name in Business Objects Designer)

Business Name Object Name

Attribute Dimension

Fact Measure

The following table lists the PowerCenter datatypes and the corresponding Business Objects Designer
datatypes:

PowerCenter Datatype Business Objects Designer Datatype

LONG Numeric

NUMBER Numeric

RAW Blob

CHAR Character

VARCHAR Character

NCHAR Character

DATE Date

Exporting Metadata to Business Objects Designer

Export metadata from PowerCenter to Business Objects Designer using the Repository Manager. You must
have Business Objects installed and the Metadata Exchange option license key to export metadata to Business
Objects Designer. When you export metadata from PowerCenter, PowerCenter uses MIMB to export the
metadata to a Business Objects universe, and then opens Business Objects Designer with the exported universe.
Before you export metadata from PowerCenter, you must create a connection in Business Objects Designer to
the database you want to export metadata from. For more information about creating a connection, see the
documentation for Business Objects Designer.
The following table lists the export options in the Metadata Export Wizard for Business Objects Designer:

Option Description

Connection Name Connection to the database from which you want to export metadata. You must
define this connection name in Business Objects Designer before you export
metadata.

Login User Login name for a repository installation of Business Objects Designer.
Business Objects Designer prompts for a user and password when you export
metadata to repository installation of Business Objects Designer. Leave this field
blank if you use a standalone version of Business Objects Designer or you want to
manually enter the user name and password.

Login Password Password for a repository installation of Business Objects Designer.

Login Offline Login offline to a local universe. You can store a Business Objects universe locally
or in a repository. You can select the following options:
- True. The repository is stored locally.
- False. The universe is stored locally or in a repository.

Exchanging Metadata with Business Objects Designer 135

 Option Description

Login Repository Name of the repository that contains the universe.

Name

Close Designer Closes Business Objects Designer after importing the universe from PowerCenter.
Use this option to stop Business Objects Designer when it runs on a remote
location.

Schema Export Updates the tables and joins in the exported universe.
Algorithm

Allow Outer Joins Type of joins performed by PowerCenter when exporting metadata with tables that
have foreign key columns. You can select the following options:
- True. Use the foreign key relationship defined for the column.
- False. Only allow inner joins when exporting tables referenced by a foreign key.

Fact Table Name of the table to be treated as a fact table by Business Object Designer. Use
this option to identify a source or target definition as a fact table when exporting
metadata.

Assume Tables are Exports metadata as a dimension. You can select the following options:
Dimensions - True. Exports metadata as a dimension.
- False. Does not export metadata as a dimension.

Dimensions Export Exports and updates dimensions in an existing Business Objects Designer
Algorithm universe. You can select the following options:
- Don’t export dimensions
- Replace dimensions
- Create new dimensions
- Update dimension’s description

Export Hierarchies Exports the OLAP hierarchies in the exported source or targets definitions.

Naming Exports the class and object names in the universe. You can leave the names as
Conventions defined in PowerCenter or change them to all uppercase or all lowercase.

Troubleshooting
Enable Retain Physical Properties when you import PowerCenter metadata from a third-party tool that does not use all
column properties.
When you import metadata into PowerCenter from a tool that does not use all column properties, the
Metadata Import Wizard uses default values for the column properties. However, you can retain the column
properties if a source or target of the same name exists in the folder. To retain the column properties, enable the
Retain Physical Properties attribute in the Metadata Import Wizard. You might want to do this if you export
metadata to a tool that does not use all column properties, modify the metadata in the other tool, and then
import the modified metadata back into PowerCenter.

Choose Enable for the Reverse Engineer BI Properties option when you import metadata from Business Objects
Designer that originated in PowerCenter.
When you export metadata to Business Objects Designer and then import that metadata into PowerCenter, you
lose business name information if you choose Disabled. However, when you choose one of the Enable values for
this property, MIMB preserves the business name information for the metadata.

136 Chapter 12: Exchanging Metadata

CHAPTER 13

Copying Objects
This chapter includes the following topics:
♦ Overview, 137
♦ Resolving Copy Conflicts, 139
♦ Steps to Copy Objects, 140
♦ Copying Dependent Objects, 141
♦ Copying Workflow Manager Objects, 141
♦ Copying Designer Objects, 144

Overview
The Workflow Manager, Designer, and Repository Manager provide a Copy Wizard that you use to copy
repository objects. You can copy repository objects such as workflows, worklets, tasks, sessions, mappings,
mapplets, sources, targets, and transformations. You can also copy segments of workflows or mappings.
You can copy objects within the same folder, to a different folder, or to a different repository. If you want to
copy an object to another folder, you must first open the target folder.

Code Pages
To ensure no data is lost when you copy an object from one repository to another, you can copy objects
between repositories with the PowerCenter Client. This is done when the code page of the originating
repository is identical to or a subset of the destination repository code page.

Copy Wizard
The Copy Wizard checks for conflicts in the target folder and provides choices to resolve the conflicts. For
example, if an item exists in the target folder, a description of the conflict appears in the Conflict Message
section of the screen. The Copy Wizard displays possible resolutions in the Resolution area of the screen. For a
duplicate object you can rename, reuse, replace, or skip copying the object.

137
 The following figure shows the Copy Wizard:

Copy
From/Copy To

Conflict
Message

Edit name.
Compare
Conflict Link
Apply resolution
to other conflicts.
Next
Conflict/Option

View object Overview

dependencies. Area

The following table describes the areas of the Copy Wizard:

Area Description

Copy From/Copy To Displays the original repository and folder name and the target repository and folder
name.

Overview Area Displays the items to copy, existing conflicts, original instance name, target instance
name, and action taken to resolve the conflict. It displays a red icon next to each
object with a conflict, and a green icon next to each object without a conflict.

Conflict Message Identifies the current conflict and the name of the object with the conflict, if any. After
you choose a resolution, the message describes the resolution.

Resolution Displays the elected resolution or a list of choices for resolution. Choices might be
different, depending on the conflict.

Edit You can edit the object name if you choose to rename the object.

Apply This Resolution Applies the resolution to all unresolved conflicts or just the conflicts for the same
to Other Conflicts object type.

Compare Conflict Compares duplicate objects in the target folder to the objects you are copying.

Next Conflict/Option You can choose additional options for session and workflow resolutions, such as
applying default connections or retaining connections during the copy. Next
Conflict/Option displays with session or workflow conflicts that you resolve by
renaming or replacing the target.

View Dependency Displays object dependencies for the current object.

You can configure display settings and functions of the Copy Wizard by clicking Tools > Options in the
Designer or Workflow Manager.

RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “Comparing Repository Objects” on page 29

♦ “Copying Dependent Objects” on page 141

138 Chapter 13: Copying Objects

Resolving Copy Conflicts
When the Copy Wizard encounters a conflict, it prompts you to resolve the conflict before continuing the copy
process. The Copy Wizard provides you with the resolutions depending on the type of conflict.
The following table describes the Copy Wizard resolutions:

Resolution
Description Availability
Name

Copy Copy a connection object. When the Copy Wizard cannot find a
connection object in the target repository.

Browse Click Browse to choose a server, When the Copy Wizard cannot find a server,
connection, or mapping. You must select connection, or mapping in the target folder it
a valid object in the target folder for the displays the Browse button.
copy process to succeed.

Rename Change the object name when copying it When an object with the same name exists in
to the target folder. the target folder.

Replace Replace the existing object in the target When copying to another folder in the same
folder. repository or another folder in a different
repository and an object with the same name
exists in the target folder.

Reuse Use the existing object in the target When a reusable object exists in the target
folder. folder.

Skip Skips copying the object. When an object with the same name exists in
the target folder.

If the target folder has duplicate objects, you can compare them to the objects you are copying to determine the
differences. Click the Compare Conflict link in the Copy Wizard to display source and target views of the
objects.

RELATED TOPICS:
♦ “Comparing Repository Objects” on page 29

The following figure shows the conflict that occurs when you try to copy an object to a folder that contains an
object of the same name. The selected resolution reuses the object.

The wizard prompts you to select a resolution for each unresolved object in the copy. Optionally, you can apply
the resolution to all unresolved objects of the same type, or to all conflicts in the copy. To apply the resolution
to more objects, click Apply This Resolution To and choose either All Conflicts or conflicts for just the
specified object type.

Resolving Copy Conflicts 139

Steps to Copy Objects
Use the following procedure to copy an object using the Copy Wizard. To cancel the copy operation, click the
Cancel button or press the Esc key.

To copy an object using the Copy Wizard:

1. Open the target folder.

2. In the Navigator, select the object you want to copy.
3. Drag or copy the object into the target folder.
4. Click Yes in the Copy Confirmation dialog box.
The Copy Wizard appears. The Copy Wizard displays objects by type. For example, the sessions display
under the Sessions node, and mappings display under the Mappings node.
The Copy Wizard displays a red icon on objects with conflicts. It displays conflicts one object type at a
time.
5. Click Next if you do not encounter a conflict.
If you encounter a conflict, choose a resolution from the Resolution options.
The following figure shows the first of two unresolved mapping conflicts to resolve. The resolution option
requires you to browse for an appropriate mapping. Click Browse to select a mapping.

Copy
Conflict

6. Click Next to view the next conflict.

If you work with session or workflow conflicts, you can click Next Conflict/Option to configure additional
options for sessions or workflows with conflicts. For example, use Next Conflict/Option if you want to
apply default connections in the target during the copy. Next Conflict/Option appears when you have
session and workflow conflicts, and you choose to Rename or Replace the target objects.
7. Repeat steps 5 to 6 until you resolve all conflicts.
The Copy Summary information appears.
8. Click Finish to complete the copy process.

140 Chapter 13: Copying Objects

Copying Dependent Objects
When you copy an object, the Copy Wizard copies all dependent objects. While you set up a copy, you might
want to view the objects or instances that depend on the object you are copying. For example, if you are going
to copy a session and an associated connection object in a workflow, you can select the connection object in the
Copy Wizard and see which sessions in the workflow use the connection.
The Dependency dialog box displays the objects that use a selected object. The objects display upward in a
hierarchy. For example, if you view the object dependencies of a connection object when you copy a workflow,
the Dependency dialog box shows the session that uses the source object and the workflow that uses the session.
If there are no object dependencies, the View Object Dependencies dialog box displays the following message:
<<No dependencies found for this object.>>

To view dependencies for an object:

1. Select the object from the Overview area of the Copy Wizard.
2. Click the View Object Dependencies button.
The Dependency dialog box appears.
Object You Select in the
Overview Area

Dependent Objects

Copying Workflow Manager Objects

In the Workflow Manager, you can copy workflows, worklets, workflow segments, and sessions using the Copy
Wizard. You can also use the Copy Wizard to copy segments of a workflow. To copy these objects, you must
resolve all conflicts that occur in the target folder.
Note: The Workflow Manager provides an Import Wizard in which you can import objects from an XML file.
The Import Wizard also provides options to resolve conflicts.

Copying Workflows and Worklets

When you copy a workflow or a worklet, the Copy Wizard copies all of the worklets, sessions, and tasks
included in the original workflow or worklet.
When you copy a workflow or worklet, you might encounter the following copy conflicts:
♦ Duplicate name. A workflow, worklet, or workflow component with the same name exists in the target
folder.

Copying Dependent Objects 141

 ♦ Cannot find connection. Connections from the original workflow do not exist for the target. If a connection
object does not exist, you can select a connection object or skip the conflict and choose a connection object
after you copy the workflow. You cannot copy connection objects.
♦ Session conflicts. When you copy a workflow, the Copy Wizard checks session components for possible
conflicts. This includes the associated mapping and the database connection.

Copying Sessions
When you copy a Session task, the Copy Wizard looks for the database connections and associated mappings in
the target folder. If the mapping or connection does not exist, you can select a new mapping or connection. If
the target folder has no mappings, you must first copy a mapping to the target folder in the Designer before you
can copy the session.
When you copy a session, you might encounter the following copy conflicts:
♦ Duplicate name. A session with the same name exists in the target folder. You can rename the existing
session, reuse the session in the target folder or replace it. If you rename or replace the session use the default
mappings and connections. Otherwise, you may need to choose the connections and mappings after you
copy the session.
♦ Cannot find connection. The connection object for this session does not exist in the target.
♦ Cannot find mapping. The associated mapping is not in the target folder. You can select an available
mapping in the target folder. If you have no mappings in the target, you must cancel the session copy.
♦ Cannot find database connections. A database connection object does not exist in the target repository.
Select connections from the target repository.

Mapping Conflicts
When you copy a session, the Copy Wizard verifies that the associated mapping exists in the target folder. If the
mapping does not exist, you can choose a different mapping from the target folder.
To find available mappings in the target folder, click Browse. If the target folder does not have any mapping in
it, the Copy Wizard prompts you to create one:
There are no mappings in this folder. Please create a mapping in the Mapping Designer.

You must cancel the copy process to create a mapping. When you cancel, the Copy Wizard does not copy any
object. To avoid this problem you can copy the mapping to the target folder in the Designer before copying the
session. If you replace a mapping with an invalid mapping, the associated sessions become invalid.

Database Connection Conflicts

When you copy a session to a different repository, the session uses the same database connection name and type
as it has in the source folder. If a connection of the same name does not exist in the target, you can do one of
the following:
♦ Select any connection of the same type in the target folder.
♦ Copy the connection to the target repository.
♦ Skip the connection conflict.
If you override the lookup or stored procedure database connection in the session properties, the Copy Wizard
prompts you to either copy the connection information or choose another connection. Otherwise it uses the
connection name in the session properties, even if the connection does not exist in the target folder. After you
copy the session, you must verify that the lookup or stored procedure database connection exists in the target
folder to validate the session.
Note: You cannot copy connection objects when you copy workflows.

142 Chapter 13: Copying Objects

 Mapping Variables
When you copy a session that uses mapping variable values, the Copy Wizard either copies the variables to the
target folder or retains the saved variable values in the folder.
The Workflow Manager copies the variable values to the target folder under the following conditions:
♦ You copy a session into a folder to create a new session. The new session contains a mapping that has an
associated mapping variable from the copied session.
♦ You copy a session into a folder to replace an existing session. The replaced session in the target folder does
not have saved variable values.
The Workflow Manager retains the saved variable values in the target folder if you replace a session that has
saved variable values.

Copying Workflow Segments

You can copy segments of workflows and worklets when you want to reuse a portion of workflow logic. A
segment consists of one or more tasks, the links between the tasks, and any condition in the links. You can copy
reusable and non-reusable objects in segments. You can copy segments into workflows and worklets within the
same folder, within another folder, or within a folder in a different repository. You can also paste segments of
workflows or worklets into an empty Workflow or Worklet Designer workspace.
Note: You can copy individual non-reusable tasks by selecting the task and following the instructions for
copying segments.
When you copy a segment, you might encounter the following copy conflicts:
♦ Duplicate name. You paste a segment into another workflow or worklet containing a task instance with the
same name as the one you are copying. For example, if you copy a segment from Workflow_A containing
s_Session1 into Workflow_B containing a session named s_Session1.
For reusable objects, you can resolve this conflict by replacing the task instance or renaming the task
instance with a unique name. If you replace the task instance, the Copy Wizard overwrites the task instance
in the target workspace. When you overwrite the segment, the conditions in the copied link overwrite the
link conditions in the target workflow or worklet. If you copy and paste a task within the same workflow or
worklet, you cannot overwrite the original task with the copied task. The Copy Wizard creates a copy of the
task and assigns it a new name. To avoid overwriting an object instance in a target workflow or worklet,
choose to create a copy of the instance instead of replace it. Each time the Copy Wizard locates a duplicate
instance in the target workflow or worklet, it creates a new copy of the object you are pasting and renames it
so that it does not overwrite any objects.
♦ Cannot find mapping. You paste a segment to another folder without the associated mappings in the target
folder. You must select a new mapping. If the target folder does not contain a mapping, you must copy a
mapping to the target folder before you can copy the segment.
♦ Cannot find database connection. You paste a segment to another folder, but the target folder does not
contain the associated database connection. If you copy to a folder in a different repository, and a
connection of the same name does not exist, select any connection of the same type in the target folder, copy
the connection to the target repository, or skip the connection conflict.
♦ Segment contains user-defined workflow variable. If you paste a segment containing a user-defined
workflow or worklet variable, expressions using the variable become invalid. User-defined workflow
variables are valid in the workflow or worklet in which they were created.

To copy a segment from a workflow or worklet:

1. Open the workflow or worklet.

2. Select a segment by highlighting each task you want to copy. You can select multiple reusable or non-
reusable objects. You can also select segments by dragging the pointer in a rectangle around objects in the
workspace.
3. Copy the segment to the clipboard.

Copying Workflow Manager Objects 143

 4. Open the workflow or worklet into which you want to paste the segment. You can also copy the object into
the Workflow or Worklet Designer workspace.
5. Click Edit > Paste or press Ctrl+V.
The Copy Wizard opens and notifies you if it finds copy conflicts.

Copying Designer Objects

You can copy Designer objects within the same folder, to a different folder, or to a different repository. You can
copy any of the Designer objects such as sources, targets, mappings, mapplets, transformations, and
dimensions. You must open the target folder before you can copy to it. To copy these objects, you must resolve
all conflicts that occur in the target folder.
When you copy Designer objects, you might have the following copy conflicts or options:
♦ Duplicate item name. When you copy objects you might have duplicate objects in the target folder. When
you copy a mapping or mapplet, the wizard attempts to copy all the components of the mapping to the
target. You might have some duplicate components in the target folder. You can resolve these conflicts
individually, or you select resolutions all at once.
♦ Copy a source included in a primary key-foreign key relationship that is not included in the mapping.
When you copy a mapping with a source object that has a primary key-foreign key relationship with another
object not included in the mapping, the Copy Wizard asks you if you want to copy the referenced object.
♦ Retain current values in reusable Sequence Generator or Normalizer transformations. If you copy
Sequence Generator transformations, select the Sequence Generator and Normalizer Current Value to retain
the current value of the sequence number. When copying a Normalizer transformation, select this option to
retain the current value of the generated key sequence. This option appears when you copy Sequence
Generator or Normalizer transformations.
♦ Copy SAP Program information. If you copy an SAP mapping, you can choose to copy the associated
installed ABAP program. Choose the Copy SAP Program Information check box. This option appears when
you copy an SAP mapping across repositories. For more information about ABAP programs, see the
PowerExchange for SAP NetWeaver User Guide.

Copying Mapping and Mapplets Segments

You can copy segments of mappings and mapplets when you want to reuse a portion of the mapping logic. A
segment consists of one or more objects in a mapping or mapplet. A segment can include a source, target,
transformation, mapplet, or shortcut. To copy mapping segments, select and copy the segments from the
Mapping Designer and paste them into a target mapping or an empty mapping or mapplet workspace. You can
copy segments across folders or repositories.

To copy a segment of a mapping or mapplet:

1. Open a mapping or mapplet.

2. Select a segment by highlighting each object you want to copy. You can select multiple objects. You can
also select segments by dragging the pointer in a rectangle around objects in the workplace.
3. Copy the segment to the clipboard by pressing Ctrl+C or clicking Edit > Copy.
4. Open a target mapping or mapplet. You can also paste the segment into an empty workspace.
5. Click Edit > Paste or press Ctrl+V.
If you are creating duplicate objects in a folder, the Designer assigns a unique name to the new object.

144 Chapter 13: Copying Objects

CHAPTER 14

Metadata Extensions
This chapter includes the following topics:
♦ Overview, 145
♦ Working with Metadata Extensions, 146
♦ Creating Reusable Metadata Extensions, 146
♦ Editing Reusable Metadata Extensions, 148
♦ Deleting Reusable Metadata Extensions, 148

Overview
PowerCenter allows end users and partners to extend the metadata stored in the repository by associating
information with individual objects in the repository. For example, when you create a mapping, you can store
the contact information with the mapping. You associate information with repository metadata using metadata
extensions.
PowerCenter Client applications can contain the following types of metadata extensions:
♦ Vendor-defined. Third-party application vendors create vendor-defined metadata extensions. You can view
and change the values of vendor-defined metadata extensions, but you cannot create, delete, or redefine
them.
♦ User-defined. You create user-defined metadata extensions using PowerCenter. You can create, edit, delete,
and view user-defined metadata extensions. You can also change the values of user-defined extensions.
All metadata extensions exist within a domain. You see the domains when you create, edit, or view metadata
extensions. Vendor-defined metadata extensions exist within a particular vendor domain. If you use third-party
applications or other Informatica products, you may see domains such as Ariba. You cannot edit vendor-
defined domains or change the metadata extensions in them.
User-defined metadata extensions exist within the User Defined Metadata Domain. When you create metadata
extensions for repository objects, you add them to this domain.
Both vendor and user-defined metadata extensions can exist for the following repository objects:
♦ Source definitions
♦ Target definitions
♦ Transformations
♦ Mappings
♦ Mapplets

145
 ♦ Sessions
♦ Tasks
♦ Workflows
♦ Worklets

Working with Metadata Extensions

You can create reusable or non-reusable metadata extensions. You associate reusable metadata extensions with
all repository objects of a certain type. So, when you create a reusable extension for a mapping, it is available for
all mappings. Vendor-defined metadata extensions are always reusable.
Non-reusable extensions are associated with a single repository object. Therefore, if you edit a target and create
a non-reusable extension for it, that extension is available for the target you edit. It is not available for other
targets.
You can promote a non-reusable metadata extension to reusable, but you cannot change a reusable metadata
extension to non-reusable.
You can create, edit, and delete user-defined metadata extensions using the following tools:
♦ Designer. Create, edit, and delete non-reusable metadata extensions for sources, targets, transformations,
mappings, and mapplets. You can also promote non-reusable metadata extensions to reusable extensions.
♦ Workflow Manager. Create, edit, and delete non-reusable metadata extensions for sessions, workflows, and
worklets. You can also promote non-reusable metadata extensions to reusable extensions.
♦ Repository Manager. Create, edit, and delete reusable metadata extensions for all types of repository objects.
If you want to create, edit, and delete metadata extensions for multiple objects at one time, use the
Repository Manager.

Creating Reusable Metadata Extensions

You can create reusable metadata extensions for repository objects using the Repository Manager.
When you create a reusable metadata extension for any type of repository object, the metadata extension
becomes part of the properties of that type of object. For example, you create a reusable metadata extension for
source definitions called SourceCreator. When you create or edit any source definition in the Designer, the
SourceCreator extension appears on the Metadata Extensions tab. Anyone who creates or edits a source can
enter the name of the person that created the source into this field.

To create a reusable metadata extension:

1. In the Repository Manager, connect to the appropriate repository.

2. Choose Edit > Metadata Extensions.

146 Chapter 14: Metadata Extensions

 The Edit Metadata Extensions dialog box opens.

User-Defined
Metadata
Extensions

This dialog box lists the existing user-defined and vendor-defined metadata extensions. User-defined
metadata extensions appear in the User Defined Metadata Domain. If vendor-defined metadata extensions
exist, they appear in their own domains.
3. Open the User Defined Metadata Domain.
4. Click Add.
The Add Metadata Extensions dialog box opens.
5. Enter the metadata extension information.
The following table describes the options available in the Add Metadata Extension dialog box:

Field Description

Extension Name of the metadata extension. Metadata extension names must be unique
Name for each type of object in a domain.
Metadata extension names cannot contain any special character except
underscore, and they cannot begin with a number.

Object Type Type of repository object to which the metadata extension is associated. This
can be a source definition, target definition, transformation, mapping, mapplet,
session, workflow, worklet, or all of these objects.
You associate metadata extensions with specific types of transformations. For
example, if you create a metadata extension for Expression transformations, it
is available for Expression transformations.

Database Database type. The database type is required for source and target definition
Type objects. You can select a single database type or all database types. Required
for source and target definition objects.

Datatype Datatype: numeric (integer), string, or boolean.

Default Value An optional default value.

For a numeric metadata extension, the value must be an integer between
-2,147,483,647 and 2,147,483,647.
For a boolean metadata extension, choose true or false.
For a string metadata extension, you can enter a default value of more than
one line, up to 2,147,483,647 bytes.

Maximum Maximum length for string metadata extensions. Required for string objects.
Length

Client Visible Specifies whether the metadata extension is visible in PowerCenter.

Client Specifies whether the value of the metadata extension is editable in

Editable PowerCenter. If you select this option, the Repository Manager grants Client
Visible permission as well.

Share Read Specifies whether the metadata extension is visible in vendor domains.

Creating Reusable Metadata Extensions 147

 Field Description

Share Write Specifies whether the value of the metadata extension is editable across
vendor domains. If you enable Share Write permission, the Repository
Manager grants Share Read permission as well.

Private Specifies whether the metadata extension is private to the domain in which it is
created. The Repository Manager enables this option when third-party
application vendors create vendor-defined metadata extensions.

Description Optional description of the metadata extension.

6. Click Create.

Editing Reusable Metadata Extensions

You can edit user-defined, reusable metadata extensions for repository objects using the Repository Manager.
When you edit a reusable metadata extension, you change the properties of the metadata extension. To change
the value of a metadata extension, edit the repository object using the Designer or Workflow Manager.
Note: You cannot edit vendor-defined metadata extensions.

To edit a reusable metadata extension, select the appropriate metadata extension in the Metadata Extensions
dialog box, and then click Edit.
You can modify the following fields:
♦ Default Value
♦ Permissions
♦ Description

Deleting Reusable Metadata Extensions

You can delete user-defined, reusable metadata extensions for repository objects using the Repository Manager.
When you delete a reusable metadata extension for a repository object, you remove the metadata extension and
its values from the properties of all objects of that type.
Note: You cannot delete vendor-defined metadata extensions.

To delete a reusable metadata extension, select the appropriate extension in the Metadata Extensions dialog box
and click Delete.

148 Chapter 14: Metadata Extensions

CHAPTER 15

Using Metadata Exchange (MX)

Views
This chapter includes the following topics:
♦ Viewing the Repository Metadata, 149
♦ Database Definition View, 152
♦ Source Views, 152
♦ Target Views, 158
♦ Mapping and Mapplet Views, 163
♦ Metadata Extension Views, 172
♦ Transformation Views, 173
♦ Workflow, Worklet, and Task Views, 177
♦ Security Views, 193
♦ Deployment Views, 193
♦ Repository View, 195
♦ Integration Service Views, 195
♦ Change Management Views, 196
♦ Folder View, 198

Viewing the Repository Metadata

PowerCenter Metadata Exchange (MX) provides a set of relational views that allow easy SQL access to the
PowerCenter metadata repository. The Repository Manager generates these views when you create or upgrade a
repository.
Warning: The PowerCenter repository tables have an open architecture. Although you can view the repository
tables, Informatica strongly advises against altering the tables or data within the tables. Informatica is not
responsible for corrupted data that is caused by customer alteration of the repository tables or data within those
tables. Therefore, do not directly access the actual repository tables. Instead, use MX to access the repository.

149
 MX View Categories
MX views provide information to help you analyze metadata stored in the repository. The following table lists
the available MX views by category:

Category Description

Database Provides a list of database definitions in the repository. For more information, see
“Database Definition View” on page 152.

Sources Provides a list of source definitions by folder. For more information, see “Source
Views” on page 152.

Targets Provides a list of target definitions by folder. For more information, see “Target
Views” on page 158.

Mappings and Mapplets Provides a list of sources, targets, and transformations used in mappings and
mapplets by folder. For more information, see “Mapping and Mapplet Views” on
page 163.

Metadata Extensions Provides details of metadata extensions defined for objects. For more information,
see “Metadata Extension Views” on page 172.

Transformations Provides details of transformation instances by folder. For more information, see
“Transformation Views” on page 173.

Workflows, Worklets, and Provides static and run time details for workflows and worklets by folder. For more
Tasks information, see “Workflow, Worklet, and Task Views” on page 177.

Security Provides user information. For more information, see “Security Views” on
page 193.

Deployment Provides deployment details such as deployment groups and objects that were
deployed from one repository to another. For more information, see “Deployment
Views” on page 193.

Repository Provides repository details such as repository name and connection information.
For more information, see “Repository View” on page 195.

Integration Service Provides details such as server name and host name. For more information, see
“Integration Service Views” on page 195.

Change Management Provide version history of object and label details. For more information, see
“Change Management Views” on page 196.

Folders Provides details such as folder name and description. For more information, see
“Folder View” on page 198.

For example, if a source table changes, and you need to re-import the source definition into the repository, you
could use the REP_SRC_MAPPING view to see how many mappings include this source. Likewise, if you want
to view source and target dependencies for a mapping, you could use REP_TBL_MAPPING.
Almost all views support access to comment information. You can add comments to any object within
PowerCenter through the Designer and Workflow Manager. You can access comments about individual tables,
table relationships, data fields, and data transformations.
Use these views to create reports using third-party reporting tools, such as Crystal Reports.
MX facilitates the integration of decision support metadata between the PowerCenter repository and popular
Decision Support System (DSS) tools, data modeling tools, and any other metadata resources. With MX, you
can drill down to the operational metadata level and expose information needed to support decisions. MX also
helps you make precise information requests that draw from data models, mappings, and transformation data.
For IS professionals, the MX architecture provides the following benefits:
♦ Improves warehouse maintenance and management capability.
♦ Reduces time and resources required to support end-user requests.
♦ Expands the ability to provide information resources in a controlled manner.
Note: The Designer includes options to save MX data.

150 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

Using PowerCenter Repository Reports
You can browse and analyze PowerCenter metadata with PowerCenter Repository Reports.
PowerCenter Repository Reports prepackages a set of reports and dashboards, which can be easily customized
to meet business needs. The prepackaged dashboards and reports enable you to analyze the following types of
metadata stored in a PowerCenter repository:
♦ Source and target metadata
♦ Transformation metadata
♦ Mapping and mapplet metadata
♦ Workflow and worklet metadata
♦ Session metadata
♦ Change management metadata
♦ User metadata
♦ Operational metadata

SQL Definition of Views

PowerCenter provides two sets of SQL scripts: one to create the MX views and one to drop MX views.

Creating MX Views
Each time you create or upgrade a repository, the Repository Service executes an SQL script that creates the MX
views.
The following table lists the SQL scripts to create MX views:

Repository Database SQL Script

DB2 db2mxbld.sq_

Oracle oramxbld.sq_

Microsoft SQL Server sqlmxbld.sq_

Sybase sybmxbld.sq_

These SQL scripts are stored in the Repository Service installation directory.

Dropping MX Views
If you delete a repository, the Repository Service executes an SQL script that drops the MX views. You can run
these SQL scripts (*mxdrp.sq_) in the Designer.
The following table lists the SQL scripts to drop MX views:

Repository Database SQL Script

DB2 db2mxdrp.sq_

Oracle oramxdrp.sq_

Microsoft SQL Server sqlmxdrp.sq_

Sybase sybmxdrp.sq_

These SQL scripts are stored in the Repository Service installation directory.

Viewing the Repository Metadata 151

 Integrating MX Views with Third-Party Software
With MX software and support from Informatica, vendors of popular query and reporting tools can quickly
create a metadata link between their products and the PowerCenter repository.
Software vendors can integrate PowerCenter metadata with their products through different methods, from
pulling the PowerCenter metadata into product or user repositories to providing dynamic desktop pass-through
access.
The next generation of MX, called Metadata Exchange SDK, provides an object-based application
programming interface (API) to read and write metadata in Informatica repositories.

Database Definition View

The database definition view provides a list of all database definitions in the repository. A database definition
includes the source database names, flat file or RDBMS, and the folder where the database definition resides.
MX provides the REP_DATABASE_DEFS view to help you analyze database definitions.

REP_DATABASE_DEFS
The following table lists database definition details:

Column Name Datatype Description

DATABASE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Database definition name.

DEF_SOURCE VARCHAR2 (240) Source of the definition.

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

VERSION_ID INTEGER Version ID of the source.

DATABASE_VERSION_NUMB NUMBER Version number of the database.

ER
Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

Source Views
Source views provide a list of the latest version of all source definitions defined by folder of any PowerCenter
repository. Source definitions can be defined for both relational and non-relational sources. These views also
show source properties such as shortcuts, creation date, version, description, and business name. They also
provide information such as source columns, column properties, source metadata extensions, and mappings and
mapplets where these sources are used.
The following table lists the different views that help you analyze source metadata:

View Description

REP_ALL_SOURCES This view provides a list of the latest version of sources defined in each folder
of a repository. For more information, see “REP_ALL_SOURCES” on
page 153.

REP_ALL_SOURCE_FLDS This view provides all the fields and field properties for all sources defined in
REP_ALL_SOURCES MX View. For more information, see
“REP_ALL_SOURCE_FLDS” on page 154.

152 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

 View Description

REP_SRC_FILES This view provides a list of all file definitions in the repository. For more
information, see “REP_SRC_FILES” on page 156.

REP_SRC_TBLS This view provides a list of relational database table sources that have been
analyzed through the Source Analyzer tool or imported from a DDL (Data
Definition Language) file. For more information, see “REP_SRC_TBLS” on
page 156.

REP_SRC_FILE_FLDS These views provide access to the fields in a non-relational source. For more
REP_SEG_FLDS information, see “REP_SRC_FILE_FLDS and REP_SEG_FLDS” on page 157.

REP_SRC_TBL_FLDS This view provides access to the fields in relational sources. Use the source
name to retrieve all the fields belonging to the source. For more information,
see “REP_SRC_TBL_FLDS” on page 158.

REP_ALL_SOURCES
This view provides a list of the latest version of sources defined in each folder of a repository. Sources include
both relational sources and non-relational sources such as XML files and flat files.
The following table lists source information in the REP_ALL_SOURCES view:

Column Name Datatype Description

PARENT_SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

PARENT_SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

PARENT_SOURCE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the parent source.

PARENT_SOURCE_BUSINESS_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of the parent source.

PARENT_SOURCE_ID NUMBER ID of the parent source.

PARENT_SOURCE_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of the parent source.

PARENT_SOURCE_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Source version number.

PARENT_SOURCE_VERSION_STATUS NUMBER Parent source version status.

PARENT_SOURCE_UTC_CHECKIN NUMBER UTC time (Coordinated Universal Time)

when the parent source was checked in.

PARENT_SOURCE_UTC_LAST_SAVED NUMBER UTC time when the parent source was

last modified.

PARENT_SOURCE_LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Time when the parent source was last
saved.

PARENT_SOURCE_SCHEMA_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the source schema.

PARENT_SOURCE_FIRST_FIELD_ID NUMBER ID of the first field in the source.

PARENT_SOURCE_SELECT_INFO_ID NUMBER File organization information.

PARENT_SOURCE_DISPLAY_SIZE NUMBER Parent source display size

(uncompressed binary).

PARENT_SOURCE_PHYSICAL_SIZE NUMBER Parent source physical size

(compressed binary).

PARENT_SRC_MIN_PHYSICAL_SIZE NUMBER Physical size (compressed binary).

PARENT_SOURCE_DATABASE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Database name of the parent source.

PARENT_SOURCE_TYPE NUMBER Specifies whether the source is a

relational or a non-relational source.

PARENT_SOURCE_DATABASE_TYPE VARCHAR2 (50) Name of the database type of the parent

source.

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

Source Views 153

 Column Name Datatype Description

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

SOURCE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Source name.

SOURCE_ID NUMBER Source ID.

SOURCE_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Source description.

SOURCE_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Source version number.

SOURCE_VERSION_STATUS NUMBER Specifies whether the source version is

active or has been deleted.

SOURCE_UTC_CHECKIN NUMBER UTC time for source checkin.

SOURCE_UTC_LAST_SAVED NUMBER UTC time when the source display was

last saved.

SOURCE_LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Time when the source was last saved.

SOURCE_DATABASE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Source database name.

REPOSITORY_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) The repository name.

IS_SHORTCUT NUMBER Specifies whether the source is a

shortcut.
1 = shortcut; 0 = not a shortcut.

IS_GLOBAL_SHORTCUT NUMBER Specifies whether the source is a global

shortcut.
1 = shortcut; 0 = not a shortcut.
Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_ALL_SOURCE_FLDS
This view provides all the fields and field properties for all sources defined in REP_ALL_SOURCES MX View.
For global shortcuts, the name of the shortcut appears. For local shortcuts, the names of shortcut and the parent
targets display.
The following table lists source field information in the REP_ALL_SOURCE_FLDS view:

Column Name Datatype Description

PARENT_SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Parent folder name.

PARENT_SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Parent folder ID.

PARENT_SOURCE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Parent source name.

PARENT_SOURCE_BUSINESS_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of the parent source.

PARENT_SOURCE_ID NUMBER Parent source ID.

PARENT_SOURCE_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of the parent source.

PARENT_SOURCE_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Version number of the parent source.

PARENT_SOURCE_VERSION_STATUS NUMBER Status of the parent source version.

PARENT_SOURCE_UTC_CHECKIN NUMBER UTC time when the parent source

was checked in.

PARENT_SOURCE_UTC_LAST_SAVED NUMBER UTC time when the parent source

was last saved.

PARENT_SOURCE_LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Time when the parent source was

last saved.

PARENT_SOURCE_TYPE NUMBER Source type such as relational

database or flat file.

PARENT_SOURCE_DATABASE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Database name of the parent source.

154 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

Column Name Datatype Description

PARENT_SOURCE_DATABASE_TYPE VARCHAR2 (50) Database type of the parent source.

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

SOURCE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Source name.

SOURCE_ID NUMBER Source ID.

SOURCE_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Source description.

SOURCE_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Source version number.

SOURCE_VERSION_STATUS NUMBER Specifies whether the source version

is active or has been deleted.

SOURCE_UTC_CHECKIN NUMBER UTC time when the source was last

checked in.

SOURCT_UTC_LAST_SAVED NUMBER UTC time when the source was last

saved.

SOURCE_LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Time when the source was last

saved.

SOURCE_DATABASE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the database for the source.

SOURCE_FIELD_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Source field name.

SOURCE_FIELD_BUSINESS_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of the source field.

SOURCE_FIELD_ID NUMBER ID of the source field (primary key).

SOURCE_FIELD_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of the source field.

SOURCE_FIELD_NUMBER NUMBER Source field number.

SOURCE_FIELD_NEXT_FIELD_ID NUMBER ID of the field that follows the current

field.

SOURCE_FIELD_LEVEL NUMBER Field level number for non-relational

sources.

SOURCE_FIELD_PICTURE_TEXT VARCHAR2 (240) Picture text that a COBOL source

uses. Null for relational sources.

SOURCE_FIELD_OCCURS_TIME NUMBER Number of time that the field (or

record) occurs in the source.

SOURCE_FIELD_REDEFINES_FIELD VARCHAR2 (240) Identifies the field/record that this

field/record redefines.

SOURCE_FIELD_DISPLAY_OFFSET NUMBER Offset of this field within the source.

SOURCE_FIELD_DISPLAY_LENGTH NUMBER Display field length.

SOURCE_FIELD_PHYSICAL_OFFSET NUMBER Offset of this field within this FD.

SOURCE_FIELD_PHYSICAL_LENGTH NUMBER Physical field length.

SOURCE_FIELD_CHILD_FIELD_ID NUMBER The next child, if any, for a non-

relational COBOL source.

SOURCE_FIELD_KEY_TYPE VARCHAR2 (50) Specifies whether the source field

key is a primary key or a foreign key.

SOURCE_FIELD_DATATYPE VARCHAR2 (40) Field datatype.

SOURCE_FIELD_PRECISION NUMBER Length or precision for the field.

SOURCE_FIELD_SCALE NUMBER Scale for the field.

SOURCE_FIELD_PIC_USAGE_NAME NUMBER Source field picture usage name.

Source Views 155

 Column Name Datatype Description

SOURCE_FIELD_NULLTYPE NUMBER Specifies whether nulls are allowed.

0= nulls allowed; 1 = nulls not
allowed.

REPOSITORY_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Repository name.

IS_SHORTCUT NUMBER Specifies whether the source is a

shortcut.
1 = shortcut; 0 = not a shortcut.

IS_GLOBAL_SHORTCUT NUMBER Specifies whether the source is a

global shortcut.
1 = shortcut; 0 = not a shortcut.
Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_SRC_FILES
This view provides a list of all file definitions in the repository. Use FIRST_FIELD_ID to retrieve the fields
belonging to a non-relational source by following the links in the REP_SRC_FILE_FLDS view. Any flat file
imported through the Source Analyzer has an entry.
The following table lists file information in the REP_SRC_FILES view:

Column Name Datatype Description

FILE_ID INTEGER Source ID (primary key).

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

DATABASE_TYPE VARCHAR2 (240) Type of database extracted from.

DATABASE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of database extracted from (DSN).

FILE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of file definitions.

SCHEMA_FILE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) File from which schema was extracted.

SELECT_INFO_ID INTEGER File organization information.

DISPLAY_SIZE INTEGER Display size (uncompressed).

PHYSICAL_SIZE INTEGER Physical size (compressed binary).

MIN_PHYSICAL_SIZE INTEGER Minimum physical size (varying records).

FIRST_FIELD_ID INTEGER Link to first field of file definitions.

SOURCE_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Source description.

VERSION_ID INTEGER Version ID.

SOURCE_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Source version number.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_SRC_TBLS
This view provides a list of relational database table sources that have been analyzed through the Source
Analyzer tool or imported from a DDL (Data Definition Language) file.
The following table lists relational database table information in the REP_SRC_TBLS view:

Column Name Datatype Description

TABLE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Table name.

TABLE_BUSNAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of the table.

TABLE_ID NUMBER Unique key.

156 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

 Column Name Datatype Description

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

DATABASE_TYPE VARCHAR2 (240) Type of database extracted from.

DATABASE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of database extracted from.

SCHEMA_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of schema extracted from.

FIRST_FIELD_ID NUMBER Link to first field.

SOURCE_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Source description.

VERSION_ID INTEGER Folder version ID.

VERSION_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Folder version name.

LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Last time the source table was saved.

SOURCE_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Source version number.

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_SRC_FILE_FLDS and REP_SEG_FLDS

These views provide access to the fields in a non-relational source. Each field is contained in the scanned tables
listed in the REP_SEG_FLDS view.
The following table lists source field information in the REP_SRC_FILE_FLDS and REP_SEG_FLDS views:

Column Name Datatype Description

FIELD_ID INTEGER Field ID (primary key)

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

FILE_ID INTEGER Source ID (primary key).

FIELD_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Field name.

FIELD_LEVEL NUMBER Field level (for example, 01 and 02).

FIELD_NUMBER NUMBER Order number of the field.

FIELD_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Comments for this field.

PICTURE_TEXT VARCHAR2 (240) PIC clause.

OCCURS NUMBER Number of OCCURS.

REDEFINES_FIELD VARCHAR2 (240) Redefines this field.

KEY_TYPE NUMBER Key type. 1 = primary key; 0 = not a key.

DISPLAY_OFFSET NUMBER Offset using display length.

DISPLAY_LENGTH NUMBER Display length.

PHYSICAL_OFFSET NUMBER Physical offset.

PHYSICAL_LENGTH NUMBER Physical length.

USAGE_TYPE VARCHAR2 (240) COMP type (binary compressed fields).

DATA_PRECISION NUMBER Decimal precision for numeric fields or field

length for CHAR fields.

DATA_SCALE NUMBER Decimal scale for numeric fields.

CHILD_ID NUMBER Link to child field if this is a group item.

SIBLING_ID NUMBER Link to next field at this level.

VERSION_ID NUMBER Link to next field at this level.

Source Views 157

 Column Name Datatype Description

SRC_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Version number of the source.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_SRC_TBL_FLDS
This view provides access to the fields in relational sources. Use the source name to retrieve all the fields
belonging to the source. The columns in this view are part of the tables listed in the REP_SRC_TBLS views.
The following table lists relational source fields in the REP_SRC_TBL_FLDS view:

Column Name Datatype Description

COLUMN_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Field name.

COLUMN_BUSNAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of the field.

COLUMN_ID INTEGER Field ID (primary key).

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

TABLE_ID INTEGER Source table ID.

TABLE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Table name.

TABLE_BUSNAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of the table.

COLUMN_NUMBER INTEGER Order number of the column.

COLUMN_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of the column.

KEY_TYPE VARCHAR2 (50) Key type for this column.

SOURCE_TYPE VARCHAR2 (40) Data type for this column.

DATA_PRECISION INTEGER Decimal precision for numeric fields or field

length for CHAR fields.

DATA_SCALE INTEGER Decimal scale for numeric fields.

NEXT_COLUMN_ID INTEGER Link to next field in source table.

VERSION_ID INTEGER Folder version ID.

VERSION_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Folder version name.

SOURCE_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Source version number.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

Target Views
Target views provide a list of the latest version of all target definitions defined by folder of a PowerCenter
repository for both relational and non-relational sources. These views also show target properties such as
shortcuts, creation date, version, description, and business name. They also provide information such as target
columns, column properties, target metadata extensions, and mappings and mapplets where these target are
used.

158 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

 The following table lists the different views that help you analyze target metadata:

View Description

REP_ALL_TARGETS This view provides a list of the latest version of all targets defined in each
folder of a repository. For more information, see “REP_ALL_TARGETS” on
page 159.

REP_ALL_TARGET_FLDS This view provides all the fields and field properties for targets defined in
REP_ALL_TARGETS view. For more information, see
“REP_ALL_TARGET_FLDS” on page 160.

REP_TARG_TBLS This view provides a list of targets in the repository. FIRST_COLUMN_ID is a

link to the set of columns for this table. For more information, see
“REP_TARG_TBLS” on page 162.

REP_TARG_TBL_COLS This view provides the properties of columns defined for the target tables in a
data warehouse or data mart. For more information, see
“REP_TARG_TBL_COLS” on page 162.

REP_ALL_TARGETS
This view provides a list of the latest version of all targets defined in each folder of a repository. Targets include
both relational and non-relational targets such as XML files and flat files. For global shortcuts, the name of the
shortcut appears. For local shortcuts, the names of shortcut and the parent targets display.
The following table lists target details in the REP_ALL_TARGETS view:

Column Name Datatype Description

PARENT_SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Parent folder name.

PARENT_SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

PARENT_TARGET_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Target name.

PARENT_TARGET_BUSINESS_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name for the target.

PARENT_TARGET_ID NUMBER Target ID (primary key).

PARENT_TARGET_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Target description.

PARENT_TARGET_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Target version number.

PARENT_TARGET_VERSION_STATUS NUMBER Status of the parent target

version.

PARENT_TARGET_UTC_CHECKIN NUMBER UTC time (Coordinated Universal

Time) when the parent target was
checked in.

PARENT_TARGET_UTC_LAST_SAVED NUMBER UTC time when the target was last

saved.

PARENT_TARGET_LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Time when the target was last

saved.

PARENT_TARGET_FIRST_FIELD_ID VARCHAR2 Link to first field of this table.

PARENT_TARGET_CONSTRAINT VARCHAR2 (2000) User-specified constraint string

used when the DDL is generated.

PARENT_TARGET_CREATE_OPTIONS VARCHAR2 (2000) Options for use when generating

DDL.

PARENT_TARGET_FIRST_INDEX_ID NUMBER Link to first field of this table.

PARENT_TARGET_FILE_ID NUMBER ID for the parent target file.

PARENT_TARGET_DATABASE_TYPE VARCHAR2 (50) Database type for the parent

target.

Target Views 159

 Column Name Datatype Description

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

TARGET_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Target name.

TARGET_ID NUMBER Target ID.

TARGET_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Target description.

TARGET_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Target version number.

TARGET_VERSION_STATUS NUMBER Status of the target version.

TARGET_UTC_CHECKIN NUMBER UTC time (Coordinated Universal

Time) when the target was last
checked in.

TARGET_UTC_LAST_SAVED NUMBER UTC time when the target was last

saved.

TARGET_LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Time when the target was last

saved.

REPOSITORY_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Repository name.

IS_SHORTCUT NUMBER Specifies whether the target is a

shortcut.
1 = shortcut; 0 = not a shortcut.

IS_GLOBAL_SHORTCUT NUMBER Specifies whether the target is a

global shortcut.
1 = shortcut; 0 = not a shortcut.
Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_ALL_TARGET_FLDS
This view provides all the fields and field properties for targets defined in REP_ALL_TARGETS view. For
global shortcuts, the shortcut name appears. For local shortcuts, the names of the shortcut and the parent
targets display.
The following table lists target field data in the REP_ALL_TARGET_FLDS view:

Column Name Datatype Description

PARENT_SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

PARENT_SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

PARENT_TARGET_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of parent target.

PARENT_TARGET_BUSINESS_NAME VARCHAR2 (2000) Business name of the parent target.

PARENT_TARGET_ID NUMBER Parent target ID.

PARENT_TARGET_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of parent target.

PARENT_TARGET_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Target version number.

PARENT_TARGET_VERSION_STATUS NUMBER Status of the parent target version.

PARENT_TARGET_UTC_CHECKIN NUMBER UTC time (Coordinated Universal

Time) when the parent target was last
checked in.

PARENT_TARGET_UTC_LAST_SAVED NUMBER UTC time when the parent target was

last saved.

PARENT_TARGET_LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Time when the parent target was last
modified.

160 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

Column Name Datatype Description

PARENT_TARGET_FILE_ID NUMBER ID of parent target file.

PARENT_TARGET_DATABASE_TYPE VARCHAR2 (50) Database type of parent target.

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

TARGET_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Target name.

TARGET_ID NUMBER Target ID.

TARGET_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Target description.

TARGET_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Target version number.

TARGET_VERSION_STATUS NUMBER Status of the target version.

TARGET_UTC_CHECKIN NUMBER UTC time when the target was last

checked in.

TARGET_UTC_LAST_SAVED NUMBER UTC time when the target was last

saved.

TARGET_LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Time when target was last saved.

TARGET_FIELD_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Target field name.

TARGET_FIELD_BUSINESS_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of target field.

TARGET_FIELD_ID NUMBER Target field ID.

TARGET_FIELD_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of target field.

TARGET_FIELD_NUMBER VARCHAR2 (240) Target field number.

TARGET_FIELD_NEXT_FIELD_ID NUMBER ID of the next field in target.

TARGET_FIELD_PICTURE_TEXT VARCHAR2 (240) Picture text that COBOL sources use.

TARGET_FIELD_IS_NULLABLE NUMBER Specifies whether target field is null.

0 = Null; 1 = Not Null.

TARGET_FIELD_SOURCE_FIELD_ID NUMBER Link to source from which this field was

created.

TARGET_FIELD_KEY_TYPE NUMBER Key type of target field.

TARGET_FIELD_DATATYPE VARCHAR2 (240) Datatype of target field.

TARGET_FIELD_DATATYPE_GROUP CHAR (1) Datatype group codes.

B = Binary and Bit
C = Character, String, Text, and Byte
D = Date
N = Numeric and Money

TARGET_FIELD_PRECISION NUMBER Precision for target field.

TARGET_FIELD_SCALE NUMBER Scale for target field.

REPOSITORY_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Repository name.

IS_SHORTCUT NUMBER Specifies whether the target is a

shortcut.
1 = shortcut; 0 = not a shortcut.

IS_GLOBAL_SHORTCUT NUMBER Specifies whether the target is a global

shortcut.
1 = shortcut; 0 = not a shortcut.
Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

Target Views 161

 REP_TARG_TBLS
This view provides a list of targets in the repository. FIRST_COLUMN_ID is a link to the set of columns for
this table. All tables contained in the target table model are part of this view. It is the primary table list used to
delineate a PowerCenter data model. The tables are virtual, not physically created. Therefore, verify that the
table exists before you use this view.
The following table lists the columns in the REP_TARG_TBLS view:

Column Name Datatype Description

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

TABLE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Table name.

BUSNAME VARCHAR2 (240) Table business name.

VERSION_ID INTEGER Folder version ID.

VERSION_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Folder version name.

DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of the table.

FIRST_COLUMN_ID INTEGER Link to first field of this table.

TABLE_CONSTRAINT VARCHAR2 (2000) Table constraint specified in the Target Designer.

CREATE_OPTIONS VARCHAR2 (2000) Table creation options specified in the Target

Designer.

FIRST_INDEX_ID INTEGER Link to first index.

LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Time target table was last saved.

TARGET_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Target version number.

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

TABLE_ID NUMBER Table ID.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_TARG_TBL_COLS
This view provides the properties of columns defined for the target tables in a data warehouse or data mart.
The following table lists target table column properties for the REP_TARG_TBL_COLS view:

Column Name Datatype Description

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

TABLE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Table this column belongs to.

TABLE_BUSNAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of the table.

COLUMN_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Column name.

COLUMN_BUSNAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of this column.

COLUMN_NUMBER INTEGER Order number of the column.

COLUMN_ID INTEGER Column ID (primary key).

VERSION_ID INTEGER Folder version ID.

VERSION_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Folder version name.

DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Column description.

COLUMN_KEYTYPE VARCHAR2 (50) Primary Key, Not a Key, Foreign Key, Primary
and Foreign Key.

DATA_TYPE VARCHAR2 (40) Native database datatype.

162 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

 Column Name Datatype Description

DATA_TYPE_GROUP CHAR (1) Datatype group.

C = Character
D = Date
N = Numeric

DATA_PRECISION INTEGER Decimal precision for numeric fields or field

length for CHAR fields.

DATA_SCALE INTEGER Decimal scale for numeric columns.

NEXT_COLUMN_ID INTEGER Link to next column.

IS_NULLABLE INTEGER Whether NULLs are accepted.

SOURCE_COLUMN_ID INTEGER Link to source this column was created from.

TARGET_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Target version number.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

Mapping and Mapplet Views

Mapping and mapplet views allow you to see the sources, targets, and transformations used in a mapping or a
mapplet by folder in a PowerCenter repository. These views also display properties of mappings and mapplets
such as description, version and creation date, validity of the mapping or mapplet, and whether the mapping or
mapplet is a shortcut.
When you save MX data for mappings, PowerCenter creates a field expression for each target field in the
mappings. The field expression describes the source definition and transformation corresponding to the target
field. In addition to viewing the MX data in MX views, you can view the field expressions in the Main window
of the Repository Manager when you analyze source-target dependencies.
Note: MX views do not provide field expressions for all transformations. MX views provide field expressions for
Expression, Aggregator, Rank, Lookup, Stored Procedure, External Procedure, Router, Custom, and
Normalizer transformations. All other transformations produce NULL values in the TRANS_EXPRESSION
column for views such as the REP_TARG_FLD_MAP view.
The following table lists the different views that help you analyze mapping and mapplet metadata:

View Description

REP_ALL_MAPPINGS This view provides a list of the latest version of all mappings defined in
each folder of a repository. For more information, see
“REP_ALL_MAPPINGS” on page 164.

REP_ALL_MAPPLETS This view provides a list of the latest version of all mapplets defined in
each folder of a repository. For more information, see
“REP_ALL_MAPPLETS” on page 165.

REP_TARG_MAPPING This view provides access to the compound table-level transformation

expressions for each target table. For more information, see
“REP_TARG_MAPPING” on page 166.

REP_TARG_FLD_MAP This view shows compound field-level transformation expressions

associated with a target. For more information, see
“REP_TARG_FLD_MAP” on page 167.

REP_FLD_MAPPING This view shows the source fields used by the target fields in a
mapping. This is the companion view for the REP_TBL_MAPPING
view. For more information, see “REP_FLD_MAPPING” on page 167.

REP_SRC_MAPPING This view shows all sources used in a mapping. For more information,
see “REP_SRC_MAPPING” on page 168.

Mapping and Mapplet Views 163

 View Description

REP_SRC_FLD_MAP This view shows all of the source fields used in a mapping. For more
information, see “REP_SRC_FLD_MAP” on page 169.

REP_TBL_MAPPING This view shows all of the target tables used in a mapping and
provides source to target mapping information. For more information,
see “REP_TBL_MAPPING” on page 169.

REP_TARG_TBL_JOINS This view contains join information between target tables. For more
information, see “REP_TARG_TBL_JOINS” on page 170.

REP_MAPPING_CONN_PORTS This view displays the port-level connections between the objects of a
mapping. For more information, see
“REP_MAPPING_CONN_PORTS” on page 171.

REP_MAPPING_UNCONN_PORTS This view displays the unconnected ports in sources, targets, and
transformations in a mapping. For more information, see
“REP_MAPPING_UNCONN_PORTS” on page 171.

REP_ALL_MAPPINGS
This view provides a list of the latest version of all mappings defined in each folder of a repository. For local
shortcuts, the names of the shortcut and the parent mappings display. For global shortcuts, the name of the
shortcut appears.
The following table lists mapping information in the REP_ALL_MAPPINGS view:

Column Name Datatype Description

PARENT_SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Parent folder name.

PARENT_SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Parent folder ID.

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

PARENT_MAPPING_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the parent mapping.

PARENT_MAPPING_ID NUMBER Sequence ID of the parent mapping.

PARENT_MAPPING_VERSION_NUMBER INTEGER Parent mapping version number.

PARENT_MAPPING_VERSION_STATUS NUMBER Parent mapping version status.

PARENT_MAPPING_UTC_CHECKIN NUMBER UTC time (Coordinated Universal Time)

when the parent mapping was checked
in.

PARENT_MAPPING_UTC_LAST_SAVED NUMBER UTC time when mapping was last

saved.

PARENT_MAPPING_LAST_SAVED NUMBER Date and time when parent mapping

was last saved.

PARENT_MAPPING_IS_VALID NUMBER Specifies whether the parent mapping

is valid.

PARENT_MAPPING_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Parent mapping description.

MAPPING_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of mapping.

MAPPING_ID NUMBER Sequence ID for mapping.

MAPPING_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Mapping version number.

MAPPING_VERSION_STATUS NUMBER Status of the mapping version.

MAPPING_UTC_CHECKIN NUMBER UTC time when the mapping was

checked in.

164 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

 Column Name Datatype Description

MAPPING_UTC_LAST_SAVED NUMBER UTC time when the mapping was last

saved.

MAPPING_LAST_SAVED NUMBER Time when the mapping was last

saved.

MAPPING_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Mapping description.

REPOSITORY_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Repository name.

IS_GLOBAL_SHORTCUT NUMBER Specifies whether the mapping is a

global shortcut.
1 = shortcut; 0 = not a shortcut.

IS_SHORTCUT NUMBER Specifies whether the mapping is a

shortcut.
1 = shortcut; 0 = not a shortcut.
Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_ALL_MAPPLETS
This view provides a list of the latest version of all mapplets defined in each folder of a repository. For local
shortcuts, the names of the shortcut and the parent mapplets display. For global shortcuts, the name of the
shortcut appears.
The following table lists mapplet metadata in the REP_ALL_MAPPLETS view:

Column Name Datatype Description

PARENT_SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Parent folder name.

PARENT_SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Parent folder ID.

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

PARENT_MAPPLET_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of parent mapplet.

PARENT_MAPPLET_ID NUMBER Sequence ID of parent mapplet.

PARENT_MAPPLET_VERSION_NUMBER INTEGER Field ID (primary key).

PARENT_MAPPLET_VERSION_STATUS NUMBER Parent mapplet version status.

PARENT_MAPPLET_UTC_CHECKIN NUMBER UTC time (Coordinated Universal

Time) when the parent mapplet was
checked in.

PARENT_MAPPLET_UTC_LAST_SAVED NUMBER The UTC time when mapplet was last

saved.

PARENT_MAPPLET_LAST_SAVED NUMBER The date and time when parent

mapplet was last saved.

PARENT_MAPPLET_IS_VALID NUMBER Specifies whether the parent mapplet

is valid.

PARENT_MAPPLET_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Parent mapplet description.

MAPPLET_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of mapplet.

MAPPLET_ID NUMBER Mapplet ID.

MAPPLET_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Mapplet version number.

MAPPLET_VERSION_STATUS NUMBER Status of the mapplet version.

MAPPLET_UTC_CHECKIN NUMBER UTC time when the mapplet was

checked in.

Mapping and Mapplet Views 165

 Column Name Datatype Description

MAPPLET_UTC_LAST_SAVED NUMBER UTC time when the mapplet was last

saved.

MAPPLET_LAST_SAVED NUMBER Time when the mapplet was last

saved.

MAPPLET_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Mapplet description.

REF_WIDGET_ID NUMBER Foreign key that points to generated

mapplet transformation.

REPOSITORY_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Repository name.

IS_GLOBAL_SHORTCUT NUMBER Specifies whether the mapplet is a

global shortcut.
1 = shortcut; 0 = not a shortcut.

IS_SHORTCUT NUMBER Specifies whether the mapplet is a

shortcut.
1 = shortcut; 0 = not a shortcut.
Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_TARG_MAPPING
This view provides access to the compound table-level transformation expressions for each target table. This
view pulls information from all the transformation objects that contribute to the target table in a valid
mapping. This view contains information about mappings defined for target tables. It does not contain
information about sources.
Note: Use the REP_TBL_MAPPING view to analyze source and target relationships. Join
REP_TBL_MAPPING and REP_TARG_MAPPING by MAPPING_NAME to include column-level mapping
information in the REP_FLD_MAPPING view.
The following table lists expression information in the REP_TARG_MAPPING view:

Column Name Datatype Description

TARGET_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Target name.

TARG_BUSNAME VARCHAR2 (240) Target business name.

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

MAPPING_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Mapping name.

VERSION_ID INTEGER Folder version ID.

VERSION_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Folder version name.

SOURCE_FILTER VARCHAR2 (2000) Compound source filter condition.

CONDITIONAL_LOAD VARCHAR2 (2000) Compound conditional load.

GROUP_BY_CLAUSE VARCHAR2 (2000) Compound group by expression.

SQL_OVERRIDE VARCHAR2 (2000) Compound SQL override expression.

DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of transformation expression.

MAPPING_COMMENT VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of mapping.

MAPPING_LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Time the mapping was saved last.

MAPPING_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Mapping version number.

TARGET_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Target version number.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

166 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

REP_TARG_FLD_MAP
This view shows compound field-level transformation expressions associated with a target. This view pulls
information from all transformation objects that contribute to the target table in a valid mapping. There might
be many mappings for a set of fields, each distinguished by the MAPPING_NAME field. The field-level
expression contains all the source fields (both file definition/non-relational source) that determine the value of
the target field.
The following table lists expression metadata that you find in the REP_TARG_FLD_MAP view:

Column Name Datatype Description

TARGET_COLUMN_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of target field (table field).

TARG_COL_BUSNAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of target field.

TARGET_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of target (table).

TARG_BUSNAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of target table.

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

MAPPING_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Mapping name.

VERSION_ID INTEGER Folder version ID.

VERSION_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Folder version name.

TRANS_EXPRESSION VARCHAR2 (2000) Compound transformation expression.

USER_COMMENT VARCHAR2 (2000) End user comment.

DBA_COMMENT VARCHAR2 (2000) Administrator comment.

MAPPING_COMMENT VARCHAR2 (2000) Mapping comment.

MAPPING_LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Time the mapping was saved last.

MAPPING_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Mapping version number.

TARGET_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Target version number.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_FLD_MAPPING
This view shows the source fields used by the target fields in a mapping. This is the companion view for the
REP_TBL_MAPPING view. It contains both source and target column names and details.
The following table lists the source and target field metadata in the REP_FLD_MAPPING view:

Column Name Datatype Descriptions

SOURCE_FIELD_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the source field.

SRC_FLD_BUSNAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of the source field.

SOURCE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the source table.

SRC_BUSNAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of the source table.

TARGET_COLUMN_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the target field.

TARG_COL_BUSNAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of the target column.

TARGET_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Target name.

TARG_BUSNAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of the target.

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

Mapping and Mapplet Views 167

 Column Name Datatype Descriptions

MAPPING_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the mapping.

VERSION_ID NUMBER Folder version ID.

VERSION_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Folder version name.

TRANS_EXPRESSION VARCHAR2 (2000) Target field transformation expression.

USER_COMMENT VARCHAR2 (2000) End user comment.

DBA_COMMENT VARCHAR2 (2000) Administrator comment.

MAPPING_COMMENT VARCHAR2 (2000) Mapping comment.

MAPPING_LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (240) Time the mapping was saved last.

MAPPING_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Mapping version number.

SOURCE_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Source version number.

TARGET_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Target version number.

SOURCE_ID NUMBER Source table ID.

TARGET_ID NUMBER Target table ID.

MAPPING_ID NUMBER Mapping ID.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_SRC_MAPPING
This view shows all sources used in a mapping. Query this view by MAPPING_NAME and
VERSION_NAME. A mapping might contain several sources. This view contains the mapping names defined
for an individual source table. It does not contain information about the targets involved in a mapping. The
REP_TBL_MAPPING view contains the entire source and target mapping relationship.
The following table lists mapping source metadata in the REP_SRC_MAPPING view:

Column Name Datatype Description

SOURCE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the source.

SOURCE_ID NUMBER Source ID.

SRC_BUSNAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of source table.

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

MAPPING_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Mapping name.

MAPPING_ID NUMBER Mapping ID.

VERSION_ID INTEGER Folder version ID.

VERSION_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Folder version name.

MAPPING_COMMENT VARCHAR2 (2000) Mapping comment.

MAPPING_LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Time the mapping was last saved.

MAPPING_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Mapping version number.

SOURCE_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Source version number.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

168 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

REP_SRC_FLD_MAP
This view shows all of the source fields used in a mapping. The transformation expression corresponds to the
target fields that get data from a particular source field. This view creates these expressions by pulling
information from all transformation objects that contribute to the target table in a valid mapping.
The following table lists mapping source fields:

Column Name Datatype Description

SOURCE_FIELD_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Source field name.

SRC_FLD_BUSNAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of the field.

SOURCE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the source.

SRC_BUSNAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of the source table.

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

MAPPING_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the mapping.

VERSION_ID INTEGER Folder version ID.

VERSION_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Folder version name.

TRANS_EXPRESSION VARCHAR2 (2000) Compound target. Field transformation

expression.

USER_COMMENT VARCHAR2 (2000) End user comment.

DBA_COMMENT VARCHAR2 (2000) Administrator comment.

MAPPING_COMMENT VARCHAR2 (2000) Mapping comment.

MAPPING_LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Time the mapping was saved last.

SOURCE_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Source version number.

TARGET_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Target version number.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_TBL_MAPPING
This view shows all of the target tables used in a mapping and provides source to target mapping information.
This view pulls information from all transformation objects that contribute to the target table in a valid
mapping to provide the table-level expressions.
The following table lists mapping target metadata in the REP_TBL_MAPPING view:

Column Name Datatype Description

SOURCE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the source object.

SOURCE_ID NUMBER Source ID.

SRC_BUSNAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of the source.

TARGET_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Target name.

TARGET_ID NUMBER Target ID.

TARG_BUSNAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of the target.

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

MAPPING_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the mapping.

MAPPING_ID NUMBER Mapping ID.

VERSION_ID INTEGER Folder version ID.

Mapping and Mapplet Views 169

 Column Name Datatype Description

VERSION_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Folder version name.

SOURCE_FILTER VARCHAR2 (2000) Compound source filter condition.

CONDITIONAL_LOAD VARCHAR2 (2000) Compound conditional load.

GROUP_BY_CLAUSE VARCHAR2 (2000) Compound group by clause.

SQL_OVERRIDE VARCHAR2 (2000) Compound SQL override expression.

DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of transformation.

MAPPING_COMMENT VARCHAR2 (2000) Mapping comment.

MAPPING_LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (240) Time the mapping was saved last.

MAPPING_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Mapping version number.

SOURCE_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Source version number.

TARGET_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Target version number.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_TARG_TBL_JOINS
This view contains join information between target tables. Use this view to query the PowerCenter defined
joins for a target table model. It is populated when you link fields in the Target Designer or through primary
key-foreign key relationships.
The following table lists target table join metadata in the REP_TARG_TBL_JOINS view:

Column Name Datatype Description

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

VERSION_ID NUMBER Folder version ID.

VERSION_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Folder version name.

TABLE1_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of first table in the join.

TABLE1_BUSNAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of first table.

TABLE1_ID NUMBER ID of first table in the join.

COLUMN1_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of column in first table.

COLUMN1_BUSNAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of column in first table.

COLUMN1_NUMBER NUMBER Number of column in first table.

COLUMN1_ID NUMBER ID of column in first table.

TABLE2_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of second table in the join.

TABLE2_BUSNAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of second table.

TABLE2_ID NUMBER ID of second table in the join.

COLUMN2_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of column in second table.

COLUMN2_BUSNAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of column in second table.

COLUMN2_NUMBER VARCHAR2 (240) Number of column in second table.

COLUMN2_ID NUMBER ID of column in second table.

TABLE1_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Table1 version number.

TABLE2_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Table2 version number.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

170 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

REP_MAPPING_CONN_PORTS
This view displays the port-level connections between the objects of a mapping. Objects include sources,
targets, transformations, and mapplets. Unconnected transformations are not included.
The following table lists port-level connection metadata in the REP_MAPPING_CONN_PORTS view:

Column Name Datatype Description

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

MAPPING_ID NUMBER Sequence ID for the mapping (primary

key).

MAPPING_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Mapping name.

MAPPING_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Mapping version number.

FROM_OBJECT_ID NUMBER Source object ID.

FROM_OBJECT_TYPE NUMBER Source object type.

FROM_OBJECT_TYPE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the source object type.

FROM_OBJECT_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Source object name.

FROM_OBJECT_INSTANCE_ID NUMBER Source object instance ID.

FROM_OBJECT_FIELD_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Source object field name.

FROM_OBJECT_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Source object version number.

TO_OBJECT_ID NUMBER Target object ID.

TO_OBJECT_TYPE NUMBER Target object type such as port, target,

mapplet, and transformation.

TO_OBJECT_TYPE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Target object type name.

TO_OBJECT_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Target object name.

TO_OBJECT_INSTANCE_ID NUMBER Target object instance ID.

TO_OBJECT_FIELD_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Target object field name.

TO_OBJECT_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Target object version number.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_MAPPING_UNCONN_PORTS
This view displays the unconnected ports in sources, targets, and transformations in a mapping.
The following table lists unconnected port metadata in the REP_MAPPING_UNCONN_PORTS view:

Column Name Datatype Description

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID (primary key).

MAPPING_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the mapping.

MAPPING_ID NUMBER Sequence ID for the mapping (primary key).

MAPPING_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Mapping version number.

OBJECT_INSTANCE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the instance.

OBJECT_INSTANCE_ID NUMBER Unique ID for the instance in a mapping.

OBJECT_TYPE NUMBER Object type.

Mapping and Mapplet Views 171

 Column Name Datatype Description

OBJECT_TYPE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Object type name.

FIELD_ID NUMBER Source field ID (primary key).

FIELD_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Source field name.

OBJECT_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Version number of the source, target, or

transformation.
Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

Metadata Extension Views

Metadata views allow you to see metadata extension details including reusable metadata extensions defined for
objects in metadata extension domains.
The following table lists the different views that help you analyze metadata extensions metadata:

View Description

REP_METADATA_EXTNS This view displays the details of all metadata extensions in the
repository. For more information, see “REP_METADATA_EXTNS” on
page 172.

REP_METADATA_EXTN_DEFINES This view displays reusable metadata extensions defined for objects in
metadata extension domains. For more information, see
“REP_METADATA_EXTN_DEFINES” on page 173.

REP_METADATA_EXTNS
This view displays the details of all metadata extensions in the repository.
The following table lists metadata extension information in the REP_METADATA_EXTNS view:

Column Name Datatype Description

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

METADATA_EXTN_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Metadata extension name.

METADATA_EXTN_OBJECT_TYPE NUMBER Object type the metadata is associated

with.

METADATA_EXTN_OBJECT_ID NUMBER Object the metadata value is associated

with.

METADATA_EXTN_DATA_TYPE NUMBER Datatype of the metadata extension value.

PERMISSIONS NUMBER Permissions type.

METADATA_EXTN_VALUE VARCHAR2 (2000) Metadata extension value.

LINE_NO NUMBER Line number of the text when there are

multiple lines of text.

METADATA_EXTN_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of the metadata extension.

VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Object version number.

OBJECT_TYPE_NAME NUMBER Name of the object type.

DOMAIN_ID NUMBER Globally unique domain identifier.

DOMAIN_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Unique name for a user-defined metadata

domain.

172 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

 Column Name Datatype Description

DOMAIN_KEY VARCHAR2 (240) Domain key.

DOMAIN_USAGE NUMBER Specifies domain usage.

1= Domain is visible through client tool.
2= Domain is editable through client tool.
4 = Domain has full access without a key.

DOMAIN_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Domain description.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_METADATA_EXTN_DEFINES
This view displays reusable metadata extensions defined for objects in metadata extension domains.
The following table lists information in the REP_METADATA_EXTN_DEFINES view:

Column Name Datatype Description

DOMAIN_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Unique name for a user-defined domain.

DOMAIN_ID NUMBER Globally unique domain identifier.

METAEXT_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Unique name for metadata within a

domain.

OBJECT_TYPE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Object type name.

DATABASE_TYPE VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the database type.

METADATA_EXTN_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of the metadata extension.

VENDOR_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the vendor.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

Transformation Views
Transformation views display details of all reusable and non-reusable transformation instances by folder in a
PowerCenter repository. These views also display properties such as attributes, dependencies, port-level
connections, and field level details of transformations.
The following table lists the different views that help you analyze transformation metadata:

View Description

REP_ALL_TRANSFORMS This view provides a list of the latest version of all transformations and their
properties in each folder of a repository. For more information, see
“REP_ALL_TRANSFORMS” on page 174.

REP_WIDGET_INST This view displays the details of all transformation instances. For more
information, see “REP_WIDGET_INST” on page 175.

REP_WIDGET_DEP This view displays the details of dependencies between transformation

instances in a mapping. For more information, see “REP_WIDGET_DEP” on
page 175.

REP_WIDGET_ATTR This view displays attribute details for transformations, instances, and
sessions. For more information, see “REP_WIDGET_ATTR” on page 175.

REP_WIDGET_FIELD This view displays field level details for transformations. For more information,
see “REP_WIDGET_FIELD” on page 176.

Transformation Views 173

 REP_ALL_TRANSFORMS
This view provides a list of the latest version of all transformations and their properties in each folder of a
repository. This view displays both reusable transformations defined in the Transformation Designer and
transformation instances defined in mapping and mapplets. It also shows all shortcut transformations in a
folder. For local shortcuts, the names of the shortcut and the parent transformation display. For global
shortcuts, the name of the shortcut appears.
The following table lists transformation metadata in the REP_ALL_TRANFORMS view:

Column Name Datatype Description

PARENT_SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Parent folder name.

PARENT_SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Parent folder ID.

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

PARENT_WIDGET_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the parent transformation.

PARENT_WIDGET_ID NUMBER Parent transformation ID (primary

key).

PARENT_WIDGET_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Parent transformation ID.

PARENT_WIDGET_VERSION_STATUS NUMBER Status of the parent transformation

version.

PARENT_WIDGET_UTC_CHECKIN NUMBER UTC time (Coordinated Universal

Time) when the parent transformation
was last checked in.

PARENT_WIDGET_UTC_LAST_SAVED NUMBER UTC time when the parent

transformation was last saved.

PARENT_WIDGET_LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Date and time when transformation

was last saved.

PARENT_WIDGET_IS_REUSABLE NUMBER Specifies whether the transformation

is reusable. 1= reusable; 0 = not
reusable.

PARENT_WIDGET_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Parent transformation description.

WIDGET_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the transformation.

WIDGET_ID NUMBER Transformation ID.

WIDGET_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Version number of the transformation.

WIDGET_VERSION_STATUS NUMBER Status of the transformation version.

WIDGET_UTC_CHECKIN NUMBER UTC time when the transformation

was checked in.

WIDGET_UTC_LAST_SAVED NUMBER UTC time when the transformation

was last saved.

WIDGET_LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Time when the transformation was last

saved.

WIDGET_TYPE_ID NUMBER Transformation type ID.

WIDGET_TYPE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Transformation type name.

WIDGET_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Transformation description.

REPOSITORY_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Repository name.

IS_GLOBAL_SHORTCUT NUMBER Specifies whether the transformation

is a global shortcut.
1 = shortcut; 0 = not a shortcut.

174 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

 Column Name Datatype Description

IS_SHORTCUT NUMBER Specifies whether the transformation

is a shortcut.
1 = shortcut; 0 = not a shortcut.
Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_WIDGET_INST
This view displays the details of all transformation instances.
The following table list transformation metadata in the REP_WIDGET_INST view:

Column Name Datatype Description

MAPPING_ID NUMBER Mapping ID.

WIDGET_ID NUMBER Transformation ID.

WIDGET_TYPE NUMBER Transformation type.

WIDGET_TYPE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Transformation name.

INSTANCE_ID NUMBER ID of the transformation instance.

INSTANCE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the transformation instance.

DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of the transformation instance.

VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Version number of the transformation.

REF_WIDGET_ID NUMBER 0 for mappings. For mapplets, contains a foreign key

which points to a table that has the generated mapplet
widget.

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_WIDGET_DEP
This view displays the details of dependencies between transformation instances in a mapping.
The following table lists transformation dependency information in the REP_WIDGET_DEP view:

Column Name Datatype Description

MAPPING_ID NUMBER Mapping ID.

FROM_INSTANCE_ID NUMBER Source transformation instance ID.

FROM_FIELD_ID NUMBER Field ID of the source transformation instance.

TO_INSTANCE_ID NUMBER Field ID of the target transformation instance.

TO_FIELD_ID NUMBER Target field ID.

VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Version number of the mapping.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_WIDGET_ATTR
This view displays attribute details for transformations, instances, and sessions.

Transformation Views 175

 The following table lists attribute details for transformations, instances, and sessions:

Column Name Datatype Description

WIDGET_ID NUMBER Transformation ID.

WIDGET_TYPE NUMBER Transformation type.

MAPPING_ID NUMBER Mapping ID.

INSTANCE_ID NUMBER Instance ID.

ATTR_ID NUMBER Attribute ID.

ATTR_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of the attribute.

ATTR_DATATYPE NUMBER Attribute data type.

ATTR_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Attribute name.

ATTR_TYPE NUMBER Attribute type.

LINE_NO NUMBER Used to break up long strings into multiple rows.

ATTR_VALUE VARCHAR2 (2000) Attribute value.

PARTITION_ID NUMBER Partition ID.

SESSION_TASK_ID NUMBER Session task ID.

VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Object (session, mapping, or transformation)

version number.
Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_WIDGET_FIELD
This view displays field level details for transformations.
The following table lists transformation field information in the REP_WIDGET_FIELD view:

Column Name Datatype Description

WIDGET_ID NUMBER Transformation ID.

FIELD_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Transformation field name.

FIELD_ID NUMBER Transformation field ID.

WGT_PREC NUMBER Transformation field precision.

WGT_SCALE NUMBER Transformation field scale.

WGT_DATATYPE NUMBER Transformation field data type.

PORTTYPE NUMBER Transformation port type.

FIELD_ORDER NUMBER Transformation order.

DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Comments on the field.

PROPERTY NUMBER Field-level property used by transformations.

DEFAULT_VALUE VARCHAR2 (2000) Default value of the transformation field.

SRC_FIELD_ID NUMBER Source field ID for normalizer transformation.

GROUP_ID NUMBER ID of the corresponding instance in the mapplet's

mapping.

VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Transformation version number.

DATATYPE_NUM NUMBER Datatype number.

DATATYPE VARCHAR2 (40) Transformation datatype of the port.

176 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

 Column Name Datatype Description

DATATYPE_GROUP_CODE CHAR (1) Datatype group code.

DATABASE_TYPE VARCHAR2 (20) External database type.

EXPRESSION VARCHAR2 (2000) Expression name.

EXPR_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Comments on the expression.

EXPR_TYPE NUMBER Expression type.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

Workflow, Worklet, and Task Views

Workflow, worklet, and task views provide both static and run time details about all workflows and worklets
created in each folder in a PowerCenter repository. These views provide information about worklets and
sessions inside a workflow. The views also provide information about events, schedules, tasks, connections, and
metadata extensions associated with a workflow or a worklet; workflow and worklet execution details such as
start time, end time, and the Integration Service on which a workflow or worklet runs and its run status.
Task views provide both static and run time details about tasks such as sessions created in each folder of a
PowerCenter repository. These views provide information such as the validity of a session, creation date,
sources and targets defined in a session, session connections, and metadata extensions associated with a session.
These views also give information about session runtime details like start time, end time, and run status.
The following table lists the different views that help you analyze workflow, worklet, and task metadata:

View Description

REP_WORKFLOWS This view contains information about individual workflows and workflow
scheduling. For more information, see “REP_WORKFLOWS” on page 178.

REP_ALL_TASKS This view provides a list of all reusable and non-reusable tasks that can be
used by a workflow or a worklet. For more information, see
“REP_ALL_TASKS” on page 180.

REP_ALL_SCHEDULERS This view displays a list of schedulers by folder. For more information, see
“REP_ALL_SCHEDULERS” on page 180.

REP_WFLOW_VAR This view displays a list of all variables declared within a workflow or
worklet. For more information, see “REP_WFLOW_VAR” on page 181.

REP_EVENT This view displays the details of events created at the workflow or worklet
level.
For more information, see “REP_EVENT” on page 182.

REP_TASK_INST This view displays all task instances within workflows and worklets. For
more information, see “REP_TASK_INST” on page 182.

REP_WORKFLOW_DEP This view shows how individual tasks and worklets are connected within a
worklet or a workflow. For more information, see “REP_WORKFLOW_DEP”
on page 183.

REP_TASK_INST_RUN This view displays the run statistics and folder reference for tasks within a
workflow or worklet. For more information, see “REP_TASK_INST_RUN” on
page 183.

REP_WFLOW_RUN This view displays the run statistics for all workflows by folder. For more
information, see “REP_WFLOW_RUN” on page 184.

REP_LOAD_SESSIONS This view provides information about sessions in the repository. For more
information, see “REP_LOAD_SESSIONS” on page 185.

REP_SESSION_CNXS This view contains information about connections associated with reusable
sessions. For more information, see “REP_SESSION_CNXS” on page 186.

Workflow, Worklet, and Task Views 177

 View Description

REP_SESSION_INSTANCES This view contains connection information for session instances. For more
information, see “REP_SESSION_INSTANCES” on page 186.

REP_SESSION_FILES This view contains file connections associated with reusable sessions. For
more information, see “REP_SESSION_FILES” on page 187.

REP_SESSION_INST_FILES This view contains file connection information for session instances
associated with workflows. For more information, see
“REP_SESSION_INST_FILES” on page 187.

REP_SESS_WIDGET_CNXS This view contains information about the sources and targets used in a
session. For more information, see “REP_SESS_WIDGET_CNXS” on
page 188.

REP_COMPONENT This view displays the list of tasks such as a command or an email for each
session. For more information, see “REP_COMPONENT” on page 189.

REP_SESS_PARTITION_DEF This view provides partition details of the sources, targets, and
transformations in a session. For more information, see
“REP_SESS_PARTITION_DEF” on page 189.

REP_SESS_CONFIG_PARM This view displays session configuration parameter details. If the session
overrides a parameter in the configured object, the view displays two rows.
For more information, see “REP_SESS_CONFIG_PARM” on page 189.

REP_TASK_ATTR This view displays the attribute values and overridden values for session
and workflow tasks. For more information, see “REP_TASK_ATTR” on
page 190.

REP_SESS_LOG This view provides log information about sessions. For more information,
see “REP_SESS_LOG” on page 190.

REP_SESS_TBL_LOG This view contains information about the status of an individual session run
against a target. For more information, see “REP_SESS_TBL_LOG” on
page 192.

REP_WORKFLOWS
This view contains information about individual workflows and workflow scheduling.
The following table lists workflow and scheduling information in the REP_WORKFLOWS view:

Column Name Datatype Description

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

WORKFLOW_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Workflow name.

SCHEDULER_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Scheduler associated with the workflow.

START_TIME TIMESTAMP Start time configured for the scheduler.

END_TIME TIMESTAMP End time configured for the scheduler.

IS_RUN_ON_LIMIT NUMBER

178 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

Column Name Datatype Description

RUN_OPTIONS INTEGER The workflow schedule type. Records

the following values for each schedule
type:
1 = Run on demand.
2 = Run once.
4 = Run every DELTA_VALUE seconds.
8 = Customized repeat.
16 = Run on Integration Service
initialization.
18 = Run on Integration Service
initialization and run once.
20 = Run on Integration Service
initialization and every DELTA_VALUE
seconds.
24 = Run on Integration Service
initialization and customized repeat.
32 = Run continuously.

END_OPTIONS INTEGER The stop condition option for the

workflow schedule type. Records the
following values for each stop condition
option:
0 = End on a date.
1 = End after the number of runs stored
in RUN_COUNT.
2 = Run forever.

DELTA_VALUE NUMBER Number of seconds the Integration

Service waits between successive
workflow runs.

RUN_COUNT INTEGER Number of times the Integration Service

runs the workflow before stopping the
workflow.

SCHEDULER_ID NUMBER Scheduler ID.

SCHEDULER_IS_REUSABLE NUMBER Specifies if scheduler is reusable.

SCHEDULER_COMMENTS VARCHAR2 (2000) Scheduler description.

SCHEDULER_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Version number of the scheduler.

WORKFLOW_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Workflow version number.

WORKFLOW_ID NUMBER Workflow ID.

WORKFLOW_IS_VALID NUMBER Specifies whether the workflow is valid

or not.
1 = valid; 0 = invalid.

WORFLOW_IS_SERVICE NUMBER Specifies whether the workflow is a

service.
1 = service; 0 = not a service.

WORKFLOW_IS_RUNNABLE_SERVICE NUMBER Specifies whether the workflow is a

runnable service.
1 = runnable service; 0 = not a runnable
service.

WORKFLOW_LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Date and time when the workflow was
last saved.

WORKFLOW_COMMENTS VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of the workflow.

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

SERVER_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the Integration Service

registered with the repository.

SERVER_ID NUMBER Integration Service ID.

Workflow, Worklet, and Task Views 179

 Column Name Datatype Description

WORKFLOW_IS_IMPACTED NUMBER Specifies whether the workflow is

impacted by a change to dependent
objects that may require the workflow to
be revalidated.
0 = not impacted; 1 = impacted.
Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_ALL_TASKS
This view provides a list of all reusable and non-reusable tasks that can be used by a workflow or a worklet.
The following table lists reusable and non-reusable task information in the REP_ALL_TASKS view:

Column Name Datatype Description

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

TASK_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Task name.

TASK_ID NUMBER Task ID.

IS_VALID NUMBER Specifies whether a workflow, worklet, or

session is valid. 1 = valid; 0 = invalid.

LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Time when task was last saved.

DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of the task.

VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Version number of the task.

IS_ENABLED NUMBER Specifies whether the task is enabled or not.

1 = enabled; 0 = disabled.

UTC_CHECKIN NUMBER UTC checkin time.

UTC_LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) UTC time when task was last saved.

IS_REUSABLE NUMBER Specifies whether the task is reusable or not.

Values are: 1 = reusable; 0 = not reusable.

TASK_TYPE NUMBER Task type.

TASK_TYPE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Task type name.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_ALL_SCHEDULERS
This view displays a list of schedulers by folder.

180 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

 The following table lists information in the REP_ALL_SCHEDULERS view:

Column Name Datatype Description

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

SCHEDULER_ID NUMBER Scheduler ID (primary key).

SCHEDULER_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the scheduler.

START_TIME VARCHAR2 (30) Start time configured for the object associated with the
scheduler.

END_TIME VARCHAR2 (30) End time configured for the object associated with the
scheduler.

RUN_OPTIONS NUMBER The scheduler type. Records the following values for
each schedule type:
1 = Run on demand.
2 = Run once schedule.
3 = Run on demand and Run once schedule.
5 = Run on demand and Delta schedule.
9 = Run on demand and Custom repeat.
18 = Run on server init and Run once schedule.
20 = Run on server init and Delta schedule.
24 = Run on server init and Custom repeat.
34 = Run continuously and Run once schedule.
36 = Run continuously and Delta schedule.
40 = Run continuously and Custom repeat.

END_OPTIONS NUMBER Specifies when the task must stop running.

DELTA_VALUE NUMBER Delta between successive runs (stored as seconds).

RUN_COUNT NUMBER Number of workflow runs. Used by END_OPTIONS

column.

DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of the scheduler.

IS_REUSABLE NUMBER Specifies whether the scheduler is reusable or not.

LAST_SAVED NUMBER Date and time when this task was last saved.

VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Version number of the scheduler.

UTC_LAST_SAVED NUMBER UTC time (Coordinated Universal Time) when the

scheduler was last saved.

UTC_CHECKIN NUMBER UTC checkin time.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_WFLOW_VAR
This view displays a list of all variables declared within a workflow or worklet.
The following table lists variable information in the REP_WFLOW_VAR view:

Column Name Datatype Description

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

WORKFLOW_ID NUMBER Workflow ID (primary key).

VARIABLE_ID NUMBER Unique ID for a variable within a workflow

(primary key).

VARIABLE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the variable.

VARIABLE_TYPE NUMBER Variable type. 0 = built in; 1 = user-defined.

VARIABLE_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Comments on the variable.

Workflow, Worklet, and Task Views 181

 Column Name Datatype Description

VARIABLE_DATATYPE NUMBER Datatype of a workflow variable.

3 = decimal
4 = integer
5 = small integer
7 = real
8 = double
11 = date/time
12 = string

VARIABLE_DEFAULT_VALUE VARCHAR2 (2000) Default value of a variable.

LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Date and time that this task was last saved.

TASK_INST_ID NUMBER ID of the instance where the variable is defined.

TASK_INST_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the task instance.

BIT_OPTIONS NUMBER Specifies whether the workflow variable is null or

persistent. 1 = workflow variable is persistent;
2 = workflow variable is NULL.

VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Workflow version number.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_EVENT
This view displays the details of events created at the workflow or worklet level.
The following table lists event information in the REP_EVENT view:

Column Name Datatype Description

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

WORKFLOW_ID NUMBER Workflow ID (primary key).

EVENT_ID NUMBER Event ID (primary key).

EVENT_NAME VARCHAR2 (30) Name of the event.

EVENT_TYPE NUMBER Event type. 0 = built in; 1 = user-defined.

EVENT_SCOPE NUMBER Event scope.

EVENT_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Event description.

LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Date and time that this event was last saved.

VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Workflow version number.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_TASK_INST
This view displays all task instances within workflows and worklets.
The following table lists task instance information in the REP_TASK_INST view:

Column Name Datatype Description

WORKFLOW_ID NUMBER Workflow ID (primary key).

INSTANCE_ID NUMBER Instance ID (primary key).

TASK_ID NUMBER Task ID.

TASK_TYPE NUMBER Task type.

TASK_TYPE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the object.

182 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

 Column Name Datatype Description

INSTANCE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the instance.

IS_ENABLED NUMBER Specifies whether the task instance is enabled.

DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of the task.

IS_VALID NUMBER Specifies whether the task is valid. 0 = invalid;

1 = valid.

VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Workflow version number.

SERVER_ID NUMBER Server ID associated with the workflow.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_WORKFLOW_DEP
This view shows how individual tasks and worklets are connected within a worklet or a workflow.
The following table lists task and worklet connection information in the REP_WORKFLOW_DEP view:

Column Name Datatype Description

WORKFLOW_ID NUMBER Workflow ID.

FROM_INSTANCE_ID NUMBER ID of the source task instance.

TO_INSTANCE_ID NUMBER ID of the target task instance.

CONDITION_ID NUMBER Condition ID.

VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Version number.

CONDITION VARCHAR2 (2000) The value that identifies the condition associated
with the link.
Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_TASK_INST_RUN
This view displays the run statistics and folder reference for tasks within a workflow or worklet.
The following table lists run statistics and folder reference information in the REP_TASK_INST_RUN view:

Column Name Datatype Description

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

WORKFLOW_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Workflow name.

VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Version number.

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

WORKFLOW_ID NUMBER ID of the parent workflow.

WORKFLOW_RUN_ID NUMBER Run ID of the parent workflow.

WORKLET_RUN_ID NUMBER Run ID of a worklet in a workflow.

CHILD_RUN_ID NUMBER Run ID of a child task in a worklet.

INSTANCE_ID NUMBER ID of an instance within a workflow or a

worklet.

INSTANCE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the task instance.

TASK_ID NUMBER Task ID.

TASK_TYPE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Object name.

Workflow, Worklet, and Task Views 183

 Column Name Datatype Description

TASK_TYPE NUMBER Task type.

START_TIME DATE Start time configured for task execution.

END_TIME DATE End time configured for task execution.

RUN_ERR_CODE NUMBER Task error code.

RUN_ERR_MSG VARCHAR2 (2000) Task error message.

RUN_STATUS_CODE NUMBER Status code of the task.

1 = Succeeded
2 = Disabled
3 = Failed
4 = Stopped
5 = Aborted
6 = Running
15 = Terminated
Note: MX views do not provide information
about transient session and workflow status,
such as suspending, stopping, scheduling,
and aborting. You can view all statuses,
including transient status, using pmcmd
getservicedetails.

TASK_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Task name.

TASK_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Task version number.

SERVER_ID NUMBER ID of the Integration Service.

SERVER_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the server.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_WFLOW_RUN
This view displays the run statistics for all workflows by folder.
The following table lists workflow run statistic information in the REP_WFLOW_RUN view:

Column Name Datatype Description

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

WORKFLOW_ID NUMBER Workflow ID.

WORFLOW_RUN_ID NUMBER Workflow run ID.

WORKFLOW_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Workflow name.

SERVER_ID NUMBER Integration Service ID.

SERVER_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Integration Service name.

START_TIME DATE Start time configured for the workflow.

END_TIME DATE End time configured for the workflow.

LOG_FILE VARCHAR2 (2000) Full path and name of the log file.

RUN_ERR_CODE NUMBER Error message code.

RUN_ERR_MSG VARCHAR2 (2000) Error message.

184 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

 Column Name Datatype Description

RUN_STATUS_CODE NUMBER Status code of the task.

1 = Succeeded
2 = Disabled
3 = Failed
4 = Stopped
5 = Aborted
6 = Running
15 = Terminated
Note: MX views do not provide information
about transient session and workflow status,
such as suspending, stopping, scheduling,
and aborting. You can view all statuses,
including transient status, using pmcmd
getservicedetails.

USER_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the user who ran the workflow.

RUN_TYPE NUMBER Specifies how the workflow was run.

1 = Scheduler
2 = User request
3 = Debug session
4 = Server initialization
5 = Remote task
6 = Data profiling session
7 = Remote debug session
8 = Remote data profiling session

VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Workflow version number.

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_LOAD_SESSIONS
This view provides information about sessions in the repository.
The following table lists session information in the REP_LOAD_SESSIONS view:

Column Name Datatype Description

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

SESSION_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the session.

LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (240) Time the session was last saved.

SESSION_ID NUMBER Session ID.

MAPPING_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the mapping this session uses.

VERSION_ID NUMBER Folder version ID.

VERSION_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Folder version name.

IS_ACTIVE NUMBER Specifies whether the session is active.

STARTTIME VARCHAR2 (240) Session start time.

SESS_INTERVAL NUMBER Session interval.

REPEAT_COUNT NUMBER Repeat count.

SESSION_LOG_FILE VARCHAR2 (240) Session log file name.

BAD_FILE_LOCATION VARCHAR2 (240) Location of the reject file.

TARGET_ID NUMBER Target ID.

SOURCE_ID NUMBER Source ID.

Workflow, Worklet, and Task Views 185

 Column Name Datatype Description

SESSION_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Version number of the session.

MAPPING_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Version number of the mapping.

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

IS_VALID NUMBER Specifies whether the session is valid or

not.
0 = invalid; 1 = valid.

IS_REUSABLE NUMBER Specifies whether the session is reusable or

not.
0 = not reusable; 1= reusable.

COMMENTS VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of the session.

MAPPING_ID NUMBER Sequence ID for the mapping associated

with the session.

IS_IMPACTED NUMBER Specifies whether the session is impacted

by a change to dependent objects that may
require the session to be revalidated.
0 = not impacted; 1 = impacted.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_SESSION_CNXS
This view contains information about connections associated with reusable sessions.
The following table lists reusable session connection information in the REP_SESSION_CNXS view:

Column Name Datatype Description

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name in which the session is stored.

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

SESSION_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the session.

SESSION_ID NUMBER Session ID.

IS_TARGET INTEGER Specifies whether the connection is the target

or the source.
0 = source connection; 1 = target connection;
22 = multi-group external procedure template
extension; 25 = flat file lookup extension.

CONNECTION_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the connection.

CONNECTION_ID INTEGER Connection ID.

SESSION_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Version number of the session.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_SESSION_INSTANCES
This view contains connection information for session instances. If a session instance overrides the connection
information in a reusable session, this view shows the connection in the session instance and the connection
information in the reusable session. This view does not show connection information for reusable sessions that
are not associated with any workflows.

186 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

 The following table lists session instance connection information in the REP_SESSION_INSTANCES view:

Column Name Datatype Description

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

WORKFLOW_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the workflow the session

instance belongs to.

WORKFLOW_ID NUMBER Workflow ID.

SESSION_INSTANCE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Session instance name.

SESSION_INSTANCE_ID NUMBER Session instance ID.

SESSION_ID NUMBER Session ID.

IS_TARGET INTEGER Specifies the connection type.

1 = target connection; 0 = source
connection.

CONNECTION_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the connection associated

with the session instance.

CONNECTION_ID INTEGER Connection ID associated with the

session instance.

WORKFLOW_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Workflow version number.

SESSION_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Version number of the session.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_SESSION_FILES
This view contains file connections associated with reusable sessions.
The following table lists reusable session file connection information in the REP_SESSION_FILES view:

Column Datatype Description

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the folder containing the session.

SESSION_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the session.

IS_TARGET INTEGER Specifies the connection type.

1 = target file connection; 0 =source file
connection.

FILE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the source or target file.

DIR_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Directory where the source or target file is stored.

CODE_PAGE NUMBER Code page associated with the source or target

file.
Values correspond to the code page IDs listed in
the PowerCenter Administrator Guide.

SESSION_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Session version number.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_SESSION_INST_FILES
This view contains file connection information for session instances associated with workflows. If a reusable
session is not associated with a workflow, this view does not show file connection information for the session.

Workflow, Worklet, and Task Views 187

 The following table lists session instance file connection information in the REP_SESSION_INST_FILES
view:

Column Datatype Description

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the folder containing the session.

WORKFLOW_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the workflow to which the session

instance belongs.

WORKFLOW_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Workflow version number.

SESSION_INSTANCE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the session instance.

IS_TARGET INTEGER Specifies the connection type.

1 = target file connection; 0 = source file
connection.

FILE_NAME VARCHAR2 (2000) Name of the source or target file.

DIR_NAME VARCHAR2 (2000) Directory where the source or target file is

stored.

CODE_PAGE NUMBER Code page associated with the source or

target file.
Values correspond to the code page IDs listed
in the PowerCenter Administrator Guide.
Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_SESS_WIDGET_CNXS
This view contains information about the sources and targets used in a session. The reader and writer types and
the connection name also display.
The following table lists connection information in the REP_SESS_WIDGET_CNXS view:

Column Datatype Description

WIDGET_INSTANCE_ID NUMBER Instance ID of a source, target, or

transformation.

WIDGET_TYPE NUMBER Identifies a source, target, or

transformation.

INSTANCE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Instance name.

READER_WRITER_TYPE VARCHAR2 (240) Type of reader or writer used.

CNX_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Connection name.

SESSION_ID NUMBER Session ID.

SESSION_WIDG_INST_ID NUMBER Transformation instance ID referenced by a

session (primary key).

SESS_EXTN_OBJECT_TYPE NUMBER Indicates whether the object is a reader or

a writer. 78 = reader; 79 = writer.

SESS_EXTN_OBJECT_SUBTYPE NUMBER Indicates a specific reader or writer.

SESS_CNX_REFS_OBJECT_TYPE NUMBER Type of referenced object.

SESS_CNX_REFS_OBJECT_SUBTYPE NUMBER Indicates a specific object.

SESS_CNX_REFS_OBJECT_ID NUMBER ID of the referenced object.

WORKFLOW_ID NUMBER Workflow ID.

SESSION_INSTANCE_ID NUMBER Session instance ID.

SESSION_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Session version number.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

188 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

REP_COMPONENT
This view displays the list of tasks such as a command or an email for each session.
The following figure lists session component information in the REP_COMPONENT view:

Column Datatype Description

WORKFLOW_ID NUMBER ID of the workflow to which the session belongs.

TASK_ID NUMBER Session ID.

TASK_INST_ID NUMBER Session instance ID.

REF_OBJ_ID NUMBER ID of the referred object within a session.

REF_OBJ_TYPE NUMBER Referred object type.

OBJECT_TYPE NUMBER Object type.

OBJECT_SEQ_TYPE NUMBER Identifies the referred object's sequence type.

VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Object version number.

PM_VALUE VARCHAR2 (2000) Component value.

VAL_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the value.

DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of the value.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_SESS_PARTITION_DEF
This view provides partition details of the sources, targets, and transformations in a session.
The following table lists partition information in the REP_SESS_PARTITION_DEF view:

Column Datatype Description

SESSION_ID NUMBER Session ID.

SESS_WIDG_INST_ID NUMBER Session instance ID.

PARTITION_ID NUMBER Partition ID.

PARTITION_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Partition name.

DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of the partition.

LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Time when the partition was last modified.

VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Session version number.

MAPPING_ID NUMBER ID of the mapping used by the session.

WIDGET_ID NUMBER ID of a source, target, or transformation in a

session.

WIDGET_TYPE NUMBER Identifies a source, target, or transformation.

INSTANCE_ID NUMBER Instance ID of a source, target, or transformation.

INSTANCE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Instance name.

TYPE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Object type name.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_SESS_CONFIG_PARM
This view displays session configuration parameter details. If the session overrides a parameter in the configured
object, the view displays two rows. Select the row which contains the session ID reference.

Workflow, Worklet, and Task Views 189

 The following table lists session configuration information in the REP_SESS_CONFIG_PARM view:

Column Datatype Description

SESSION_ID NUMBER Session ID.

SESSION_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Session version number.

CONFIG_ID NUMBER Session configuration ID.

ATTR_ID NUMBER Session configuration attribute ID.

ATTR_TYPE NUMBER Session configuration attribute type.

ATTR_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Session configuration attribute name.

ATTR_VALUE VARCHAR2 (2000) Attribute value.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_TASK_ATTR
This view displays the attribute values and overridden values for session and workflow tasks.
The following table lists attribute information in the REP_TASK_ATTR view:

Column Datatype Description

WORKFLOW_ID NUMBER Workflow ID.

INSTANCE_ID NUMBER Task instance ID.

TASK_ID NUMBER Task ID.

TASK_TYPE NUMBER Task type.

REF_SESSION_ID NUMBER Session ID.

TASK_TYPE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Task type name.

ATTR_ID NUMBER Task attribute ID.

ATTR_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Task attribute name.

ATTR_VALUE VARCHAR2 (2000) Attribute value.

LINE_NO NUMBER Line number of attribute values. Used for storing

multiple lines of attribute values.

GROUP_ID NUMBER Group ID.

VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Workflow version number if task attribute is

overridden at workflow level. Session version number
if task attribute is overridden at session level.
Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_SESS_LOG
This view provides log information about sessions. This view supplies the status of the last session, which might
contain one or many target tables.
The following table lists session log information in the REP_SESS_LOG view:

Column Datatype Description

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

SESSION_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Session name.

190 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

Column Datatype Description

SESSION_ID NUMBER Session ID.

SESSION_INSTANCE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Session instance name.

SUCCESSFUL_ROWS NUMBER Number of successfully loaded target rows.

FAILED_ROWS NUMBER Number of failed target rows.

SUCCESSFUL_SOURCE_ROWS NUMBER Number of successfully read source rows.

FAILED_SOURCE_ROWS NUMBER Number of failed source rows.

FIRST_ERROR_CODE NUMBER First error code.

FIRST_ERROR_MSG VARCHAR2 (2000) First error message.

LAST_ERROR_CODE NUMBER Last error code.

LAST_ERROR VARCHAR2 (2000) Last error message.

RUN_STATUS_CODE NUMBER Run status code.

1 = Suceeded
2 = Disabled
3 = Failed
4 = Stopped
5 = Aborted
6 = Running
7 = Suspending
8 = Suspended
9 = Stopping
10 = Aborting
11 = Waiting
12 = Scheduled
13 = Unscheduled
14 = Unknown
15 = Terminated
Note: MX views may not provide up-to-the-
minute information about transient session
and workflow status, such as suspending,
stopping, and aborting.

ACTUAL_START DATE (DB SPECIFIC) Actual time session started.

SESSION_TIMESTAMP DATE (DB SPECIFIC) Time completed.

SESSION_LOG_FILE VARCHAR2 (2000) Session log file name.

BAD_FILE_LOCATION VARCHAR2 (4000) Location of the reject file.

TASK_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Version number of the task.

WORKFLOW_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Workflow version number.

WORKFLOW_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the workflow that contains the

session instance.

MAPPING_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Mapping name.

TOTAL_ERR NUMBER Total error code.

WORKFLOW_ID NUMBER Workflow ID.

WORKFLOW_RUN_ID NUMBER Workflow run ID.

WORKLET_RUN_ID NUMBER Run ID of a worklet in a workflow.

INSTANCE_ID NUMBER Instance ID.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

Workflow, Worklet, and Task Views 191

 REP_SESS_TBL_LOG
This view contains information about the status of an individual session run against a target. It provides the last
update time, row counts, and error status based on a last update timestamp on a per target basis.
The following table lists individual session information in the REP_SESS_TBL_LOG view:

Column Name Datatype Description

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

SESSION_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Session name.

SESSION_ID NUMBER Session ID.

SESSION_INSTANCE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the session instance.

SESSION_INSTANCE_ID NUMBER Session instance ID.

WORKFLOW_ID NUMBER Workflow ID.

WORKFLOW_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Workflow version number.

TABLE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the table for this log.

TABLE_ID NUMBER Target table ID.

TABLE_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Version number of the target.

TABLE_BUSNAME VARCHAR2 (240) Business name of the target.

TABLE_INSTANCE _NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Target instance name for the session.

SUCCESSFUL_ROWS NUMBER Number of successfully loaded target rows.

SUCCESSFUL_AFFECTED_ROWS NUMBER Number of affected target rows

FAILED_ROWS NUMBER Number of failed target rows.

LAST_ERROR VARCHAR2 (2000) Last error message.

LAST_ERROR_CODE NUMBER Last error code.

START_TIME DATE Time the target load started.

END_TIME DATE Time the target load ended.

SESSION_TIMESTAMP NUMBER Session timestamp.

BAD_FILE_LOCATION VARCHAR2 (4000) Location of the reject file.

SESSION_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Version number of the session.

PARTITION_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the partition.

MAPPLET_INSTANCE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Mapplet instance name.

WIDGET_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Transformation name.

TYPE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Object name.

GROUP_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Group name.

THROUGHPUT NUMBER Performance numbers for the target.

TYPE_ID NUMBER Object unique type ID.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

192 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

Security Views
Security views allow you to see user information. The REP_USERS view provides a list of all PowerCenter
users.
The following table lists user information in the REP_USERS view:

Column Datatype Description

USER_ID NUMBER User ID (primary key).

NAME_SPACE VARCHAR2 (240) Security domain the user belongs to.

USER_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) User name.

STATUS NUMBER n/a. Reserved for future use.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

Deployment Views
Deployment views allow you to see deployment information such as deployment groups, deployment date,
source and target repository names associated with deployment, and objects which were deployed from one
repository to another.
The following table lists the different views that help you analyze deployment metadata:

View Description

REP_DEPLOY_GROUP This view provides information about deployment groups in Change Management.
For more information, see “REP_DEPLOY_GROUP” on page 193.

REP_DEPLOY_GROUP_DETAIL This view provides Change Management deployment details. For more
information, see “REP_DEPLOY_GROUP_DETAIL” on page 194.

REP_DEPLOY_GROUP
This view provides information about deployment groups.
The following table lists deployment group information in the REP_DEPLOY_GROUP view:

Column Datatype Description

DEP_GROUP_ID NUMBER Deployment group ID.

DEP_GROUP_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Deployment group name.

DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of the group.

CREATED_BY VARCHAR2 (240) Name of user who created the deployment group.

OWNER_ID NUMBER User ID.

GROUP_ID NUMBER Group ID.

CREATION_TIME VARCHAR2 (30) Creation time.

LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Last saved time.

GROUP_TYPE NUMBER Deployment group type. 0 = static; 1 = dynamic.

QUERY_ID NUMBER Query ID associated with a dynamic group.

QUERY_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Query name associated with a dynamic group.

Security Views 193

 Column Datatype Description

QUERY_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Query description.

QUERY_CREATED_BY VARCHAR2 (240) Name of user who created the query.

QUERY_OWNER_ID NUMBER Query user.

QUERY_GROUP_ID NUMBER Query group ID.

QUERY_CREATION_TIME VARCHAR2 (30) Query creation time.

QUERY_LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Query last saved time.

QUERY_TYPE NUMBER Query type. 1 = public; 2 = personal.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_DEPLOY_GROUP_DETAIL
This view provides deployment details.
The following table lists deployment information in the REP_DEPLOY_GROUP_DETAIL view:

Column Datatype Description

DEP_RUN_ID NUMBER Unique deployment run ID.

OBJECT_ID NUMBER Object ID.

OBJECT_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the object.

OBJECT_TYPE NUMBER Object type.

OBJECT_TYPE_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Object type name.

SRC_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Object version number in the source repository.

TARG_VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Object version number in the target repository.

SRC_SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID in the source repository.

TARG_SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID in the target repository.

SRC_SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name in the source repository.

TARG_SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name in the target repository.

IS_SHORTCUT NUMBER Specifies whether the object is a shortcut.

1 = shortcut; 0 = not a shortcut.

DEP_GROUP_ID NUMBER Deployment group ID.

DEP_GROUP_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Deployment group name.

DEPLOY_TIME NUMBER Deployment start time.

DEPLOY_TYPE NUMBER Deployment type.

0 = invalid.
1 = deploy to.
2 = deploy from.

TARGET_REP_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Target repository name.

REP_GID VARCHAR2 (240) Global ID of the repository.

USER_ID NUMBER Deployment user ID.

GROUP_ID NUMBER Group ID.

USER_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Deployment user name.

UTC_DEPLOY_TIME NUMBER UTC deployment time.

194 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

 Column Datatype Description

DEPLOY_STATUS NUMBER Deployment status.

0 = deployed.
1 = rollback.
2 = rollback failed.

ROLLBACK_TIME VARCHAR2 (30) Deployment rollback time.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

Repository View
In the repository view you can see repository name, database type, connection information on which the
repository is created, and whether the repository is local or global.
MX provides the REP_REPOSIT_INFO view to help you analyze repository metadata.

REP_REPOSIT_INFO
This view provides repository information such as repository name and type, domain name, and database type.
The following table lists repository information in the REP_REPOSIT_INFO view:

Column Datatype Description

RECID NUMBER Repository record ID.

REPOSITORY_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Repository name.

REPOSITORY_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of the repository.

REPOSITORY_ID NUMBER Repository ID.

REPOSITORY_TYPE NUMBER Repository type.

1 = global.
2 = standalone.
3 = local.

DOMAIN_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Global domain name.

DATABASE_USER VARCHAR2 (240) Database user name used to connect to the

repository.

DATABASE_TYPE NUMBER Repository type.

HOSTNAME CHAR(3) Returns value ‘n/a’. The column refers to

PowerCenter versions earlier than 8.0.

PORTNUM CHAR(3) Returns value ‘n/a’. The column refers to

PowerCenter versions earlier than 8.0.
Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

Integration Service Views

The Integration Service views allow you to see information about Integration Service resources, such as the
Integration Service name that can be used to run workflows in PowerCenter. The views allow you to see
information about the grid, such as service locations, descriptions, and recent activity.

Repository View 195

 The following table lists the different views that help you analyze server resources and their access rights:

View Description

REP_SERVER_INFO This view is not used.

REP_SERVER_NET This view provides information about Integration Service description, location,
and usage. For more information, see “REP_SERVER_NET” on page 196.

REP_SERVER_NET_REF This view provides information about Integration Service identification and
usage. For more information, see “REP_SERVER_NET_REF” on page 196.

REP_SERVER_NET
This view provides Integration Service grid information and provides description and usage information.
The following table lists Integration Service information in the REP_SERVER_NET view:

Column Datatype Description

SERVER_NET_ID NUMBER Integration Service ID within the grid (primary

key).

SERVER_NET_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Integration Service name.

SERVER_NET_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of the Integration Service.

LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Time when object was last saved.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_SERVER_NET_REF
This view provides Integration Service identification within the grid and usage information.
The following table lists Integration Service identification and usage information within the grid in the
REP_SERVER_NET_REF view:

Column Datatype Description

SERVER_NET_ID NUMBER Integration Service ID within the grid (primary key).

SERVER_ID NUMBER Integration Service ID (primary key).

BIT_OPTIONS NUMBER Integration Service job distribution options.

1 = use network; 3 = use network and used by network
Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

Change Management Views

Change Management views allow you to see the version history of all objects in a PowerCenter repository and
label metadata. Objects can be defined as tables, mappings, mapplets, transformations, sessions, workflows,
worklets, and tasks. Labels can be defined on all objects.

196 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

 The following table lists the different views that help you analyze version history of objects and label metadata:

View Description

REP_VERSION_P Provides information about the version history of all objects in a PowerCenter
ROPS repository. For more information, see “REP_VERSION_PROPS” on page 197.

REP_LABEL Provides information about labels in Change Management. For more information, see
“REP_LABEL” on page 197.

REP_LABEL_REF Provides information about label details in Change Management. For more information,
see “REP_LABEL_REF” on page 198.

REP_VERSION_PROPS
This view provides the version history of all objects in a PowerCenter repository.
The following figure lists label information in the REP_VERSION_PROPS view:

Column Datatype Description

OBJECT_ID NUMBER Object ID.

OBJECT_TYPE NUMBER Object type ID (primary key).

OBJECT_SUBTYPE NUMBER Object subtype ID.

IS_SHORTCUT NUMBER Specifies whether the object is a shortcut.

1 = shortcut; 0 = not a shortcut.

VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Object version number.

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

USER_ID NUMBER User who last modified this version of the object.

OBJECT_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Name of the object.

GROUP_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Database name used by source objects.

LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Time when object was last saved.

UTC_LAST_SAVED NUMBER UTC time when the object was last modified.

COMMENTS VARCHAR2 (2000) Description of the object.

SAVED_FROM VARCHAR2(240) Host machine name from which the version of the
object is saved.

PURGED_BY_USERID NUMBER User ID who purged the object from the repository.
Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_LABEL
This view provides label information.
The following table lists label information in the REP_LABEL view:

Column Datatype Description

LABEL_ID NUMBER Label ID.

LABEL_NAME VARCHAR2 (240) Label name.

DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Label description.

CREATED_BY VARCHAR2 (240) Name of user who created the label.

OWNER_ID NUMBER User ID.

GROUP_ID NUMBER Group ID.

Change Management Views 197

 Column Datatype Description

CREATION_TIME VARCHAR2 (30) Label creation time.

LAST_SAVED VARCHAR2 (30) Time when label was last saved.

LABEL_TYPE NUMBER Label type.

2 = Can apply label to one version of the object.

LABEL_STATUS NUMBER Label status. 1 = label unlocked; 2 = label locked.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

REP_LABEL_REF
This view provides information about label details.
The following figure lists label information in the REP_LABEL_REF view:

Column Datatype Description

LABEL_ID NUMBER Label ID.

OBJECT_ID NUMBER Object ID.

OBJECT_TYPE NUMBER Object type ID.

VERSION_NUMBER NUMBER Object version number.

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

USER_ID NUMBER User ID.

DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Label description.

APPLY_TIME VARCHAR2 (30) Time when label was applied to the object.
Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

Folder View
In the folder view, you can see all the folders defined in the PowerCenter repository. It describes the name, ID,
and description of each folder.
MX provides the REP_SUBJECT view to help you analyze folder metadata:

REP_SUBJECT
This view displays folder information such as folder name and description.
The following figure lists folder information in the REP_SUBJECT view:

Column Datatype Description

SUBJECT_AREA VARCHAR2 (240) Folder name.

SUBJECT_ID NUMBER Folder ID.

DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 (2000) Folder description.

Note: Use the fields in bold to join views.

198 Chapter 15: Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views

INDEX

A comparing
See also PowerCenter Designer Guide
active objects See also PowerCenter Workflow Basics Guide
See object status folders 35
advanced mode Repository objects 29
copying deployment groups 107 Workflow Manager objects 12, 29
copying folders 95 compatible dependent objects
Advanced Purge window rules and guidelines 7
description 66 composite objects
options 67 checking in 64
advanced purges checking out 64
description 66 in deployment groups 104
auto-reconnect purging 68
description 20 configurations
See also session config objects
node in the Navigator 14
B configuring
Business name query conditions 76
query parameter 78 conflicts
Business Objects Designer copying Designer objects 144
exchanging metadata 134 copying workflow segments 143
database connections 142
mapping 142
C resolving in Copy Wizard 137, 139
resolving in Import Wizard 123
Check-in Time resolving when importing 122
query parameter 78 connection objects
checking in definition 5
description 63 permissions and privileges 95
when importing objects 122 Copy Wizard
checking out copying objects 140
description 62 resolving conflicts 139
non-reusable objects 64 viewing object dependencies 141
undoing a checkout 63 copying
versioned objects 62 See also copying deployment groups
Check-out Time See also copying folders
query parameter 78 Copy Wizard procedure 140
checkouts Designer objects 144
searching for checked out objects 62 folders and associated Integration Services 95
viewing 62 in Workflow Manager 141
child object mapping segments 144
invalidation 6 mapping variables 143
code pages mapplet segments 144
exporting objects 113 resolving conflicts 139
importing objects 113 sessions 142
comments shortcuts 53
accessing metadata 150 workflow segments 143
Comments parameter workflows 141
setting for query 78 worklets 141

199
copying deployment groups deployment groups
copying composite objects 104 copying 102, 106
copying shortcuts 105 copying composite objects 104
in advanced mode 95 copying object types 103
in typical mode 95 copying shortcuts 105
overview 102 copying to repository types 103
steps 106 creating 91
copying folders definition 87
from local repositories 100 displaying dependency options 17
in advanced mode 95 dynamic 88
in typical mode 95 editing 91
owners 99 permissions 88
permissions 99 privileges 88
shortcuts in folders 98 rolling back a deployment 90
steps 100 static 88
within a repository 99 Deployment receive history
CRCVALUE codes query parameter 78
overview 113 Designer
creating copying objects 144
global shortcuts 50 domain connections
local shortcuts 48 adding 18
metadata extensions 146 editing 21
MX views 151 removing 21
domains
See PowerCenter domains
D See also repository domains
dropping
database connections
MX views 151
See also PowerCenter Workflow Basics Guide
DTD file
during folder or deployment group copy 95
exporting and importing objects 113
permissions and privileges 95
dynamic deployment groups
database definitions
associating with a query 88
MX view 152
definition 90
Decision Support Systems (DSS)
editing 88
working with Informatica metadata 150
default object group
description 39
default permissions
E
description 39 editing
deleting folder permissions 40
domain connections 21 folders 35
folders 35 metadata extensions 148
metadata extensions 148 exchanging
recovering deleted objects 65 metadata 129
repositories 22 exporting
versioned objects 64 metadata 129
dependencies repository connections 22
including in deployment groups 88 sources and targets 129
source-target 16 exporting objects
viewing 16, 24 code pages 113
dependent objects dependent objects 115
copying 141 multiple objects 114
deploying 88 overview 111, 118
description 5 parent objects 115
exporting and importing 115 powrmart.dtd 113
modifying 6 sessions 116
overview 5 shortcuts 115, 117
validating 6 steps for 124
viewing 24, 141 versioned objects 117
deploying objects external loader connections
rolling back a deployment 90 during folder or deployment group copy 95
Deployment dispatch history permissions and privileges 95
query parameter 78

200 Index
F impacted status
query parameter 79
flat files Import Wizard
MX view of repository file definitions 156 importing objects 124
view of fields 157 resolving object conflicts 122
Folder importing
query parameter 78 See also importing objects
folder permissions metadata 129
editing 40 objects 121
overview 40 repository connections 22
folder status sources and targets 129
changing 60 importing objects
description 60 code pages 113
folders CRCVALUE codes 113
associated Integration Services when copying 95 dependent objects 115
comparing 35 DTD file 113
copying 98 Import Wizard 124
copying between local repositories 100 multiple objects 114
copying or replacing 100 overview 111
copying shortcuts 98 parent objects 115
creating 34 powrmart.dtd 113
deleting 35 resolving conflicts 122
editing 35 sessions 116
editing permissions 40 shortcuts 117
locking during folder copy 98 steps for 124
maintaining connections during copy 95 validating objects 122
naming copies 98 validating XML file 122
operating system profile, assigning 34 XML file 113
overview 33, 39 Include children
properties 33 query parameter 78
renaming 35 Include children and parents
replacing 97 query parameter 79
shared 9, 34 Include parents
shortcuts 98 query parameter 79
FTP connections Include primary/foreign key dependencies
during folder or deployment group copy 95 query parameter 79
permissions and privileges 95 Integration Service
association with workflows during copy 95
invalid objects
G finding 84
global objects validation status 6
See Workflow Administration Guide invalidation
description 5 dependent objects 6
version control 10
global repositories
shared folders 34 K
global shortcuts keywords
behavior when copying folders 99 searching for target definitions 23
creating 50
definition 46, 98
tips 54 L
updating views 52
Label
query parameter 79
I labels
applying 56, 72
impacted objects applying when importing 122
finding 83 creating 71
icon 6 definition 71
status 6 editing 71
impacted sessions Last saved time
running 6 query parameter 79

Index 201
Latest Status description 145
query parameter 79 editing 148
local shortcuts non-reusable 146
behavior when copying folders 98 overview 145
creating 48 reusable 146
definition 46, 98 MQ connections
tips 54 See PowerExchange for WebSphere MQ User Guide
updating views 52 MX (Metadata Exchange)
locking Change Management views 196
during deployment group copy 103 database definition views 152
during folder copy 98 deployment views 193, 196
log entries folder view 198
truncating 31 integrating views with third-party software 152
Integration Service views 195
label views 197
M mapping views 163
mapplet views 163
main window
metadata extension views 172
sorting and organizing 15
overview 149
mapping segments
performance 17
copying 144
repository view 195
mappings
saving data 17
See also PowerCenter Designer Guide
security views 193
conflicts 142
source views 152
copying mapping variables 143
target views 159
copying segments 144
task views 177
dependencies 16
transformation views 173
description 4
workflow views 177
metadata extensions in 145
worklet views 177
view of source fields 169
MX views
view of source fields used by targets 167
categories 150
view of sources 168
creating 151
view of target tables 169
dropping 151
mapplets
field-level summary 152
See also PowerCenter Designer Guide
integrating with third-party software 152
copying segments 144
REP_ALL_MAPPINGS 164
description 4
REP_ALL_MAPPLETS 165
metadata extensions in 145
REP_ALL_SCHEDULERS 180
user-defined functions
REP_ALL_SOURCE_FLDS 154
See PowerCenter Designer Guide
REP_ALL_SOURCES 153
metadata
REP_ALL_TARGET_FIELDS 160
adding to repository 3
REP_ALL_TARGETS 159
analyzing 151
REP_ALL_TASKS 180
exchanging 129
REP_ALL_TRANSFORMS 174
exchanging with Business Objects 134
REP_COMPONENT 189
exporting 129
REP_DATABASE_DEFS 152
exporting to Business Objects 134
REP_DEPLOY_GROUP 193
importing 129
REP_DEPLOY_GROUP_DETAIL 194
importing from Business Objects 134
REP_EVENT 182
multi-dimensional 4
REP_FLD_MAPPING 167
overview 3
REP_LABEL 197
reusing 9
REP_LABEL_REF 198
reusing across folders 45
REP_LOAD_SESSIONS 185
sharing 9
REP_MAPPING_CONN_PORTS 171
viewing 149
REP_MAPPING_UNCONN_PORTS 171
metadata exchange
REP_METADATA_EXTN_DEFINES 173
See MX (Metadata Exchange)
REP_METADATA_EXTNS 172
Metadata Extension
REP_REPOSIT_INFO 195
query parameter 80
REP_SEG_FLDS 157
metadata extensions
REP_SERVER_NET 196
copying 96
REP_SERVER_NET_REF 196
creating 146
REP_SESS_CONFIG_PARM 189
deleting 148
REP_SESS_LOG 190

202 Index
 REP_SESS_PARTITION_DEP 189 running 82
REP_SESS_TBL_LOG 192 samples 83
REP_SESS_WIDGET_CNXS 188 searching for dependent objects 76
REP_SESSION_CNXS 186 validating 81
REP_SESSION_FILES 187 versioned objects 75, 82
REP_SESSION_INST_FILES 187 viewing results 83
REP_SESSION_INSTANCES 186 object status
REP_SRC_FILE_FLDS 157 active 64
REP_SRC_FILES 156 changing 59
REP_SRC_FLD_MAP 169 deleted 64
REP_SRC_MAPPING 168 description 59
REP_SRC_TBL_FLDS 158 impacted 6
REP_SRC_TBLS 156 invalid 6
REP_SUBJECT 198 valid 6
REP_TARG_FLD_MAP 167 Object type
REP_TARG_MAPPING 166 query parameter 80
REP_TARG_TBL_COLS 162 Object used status
REP_TARG_TBL_JOINS 170 query parameter 80
REP_TARG_TBLS 162 objects
REP_TASK_ATTR 190 See also versioned objects
REP_TASK_INST 182 checking in 63
REP_TASK_INST_RUN 183 comparing versions 61
REP_TBL_MAPPING 169 copying 137, 140
REP_USERS 193 deleting 89
REP_VERSION_PROPS 197 deploying 56
REP_WFLOW_RUN 184 deployment groups 87
REP_WFLOW_VAR 181 exporting 118
REP_WIDGET_ATTR 175 importing 121
REP_WIDGET_DEP 175 labels 71
REP_WIDGET_FIELD 176 modifying in XML file 119
REP_WIDGET_INST 175 purging versions 65
REP_WORKFLOW_DEP 183 recovering deleted objects 89
REP_WORKFLOWS 178 status following deployment 106
SQL scripts 151 undoing a checkout 63
validating for import 122
validating multiple 28
N viewing dependencies 24
viewing properties 14
naming
viewing version properties 59
copied folders 98
repository objects
replaced folders 98
See also objects
Navigator
operating system profile
Repository Manager 14
folders, assigning to 34
non-versioned objects
options
object queries 75, 82
configuring Repository Manager 17
Others group
O default object group 39
Output window
object conflicts Repository Manager 17
resolving 122
object dependencies
viewing from the Copy Wizard 141 P
object history
parent objects
viewing 60
exporting and importing 115
Object name
invalid 6
query parameter 80
passwords
object queries
changing in Repository Manager 22
associating with a deployment group 88
permissions
configuring multiple conditions 76
See also PowerCenter Administrator Guide
configuring query conditions 76
assigning 39
creating 76
configuring for folders 40
definition 75
editing folder 40
non-versioned objects 75, 82

Index 203
 folder and global object 39 overview 1
managing for objects 39 referencing objects with shortcuts 46
plug-ins removing from the Navigator 22
copying plug-in information 97 security 8
PowerCenter version control 10
building repository domains 9 view of associated target tables 162
copying from local repositories 100 view of target table properties 162
shared folders 34 viewing details 15
PowerCenter domains viewing metadata 149
See also PowerCenter Administrator Guide repository client
domain connections, adding 19 description 2
domain connections, configuring 18 repository domains
domain connections, removing 21 description 9
host name, editing 21 reusing data 9
port number, editing 21 Repository Manager
PowerCenter Repository Reports components 12
using 151 dependency window 16
powrmart.dtd folders 14
overview 113 main window 15
purging Navigator 14
active objects 67 options 17
advanced purges, performing 66 Output window 17
composite objects 68 overview 11
deleted objects 66 repository details 15
purge criteria, using 66 searching 23
purge results, previewing 68 sessions node details 15
versioned objects 65 windows 13
repository objects
metadata extensions in 145
Q Repository Service
See also PowerCenter Administrator Guide
queries
client connections 2
See also object queries
connectivity 2
query conditions
user synchronization 8
configuring 76
resilience
processing multiple conditions 77
PowerCenter Client 20
query parameters
resolving object conflicts
description 77
importing objects 122
query types
results view windows
description 76
customizing 57
question mark
viewing 57
impacted objects, denoting 6
Reusable status (parameter)
query parameter 80
R reusable transformations
description 4
recovering roles
deleted objects 65 See PowerCenter Administrator Guide
replacing rules and guidelines
folders 100 compatibility 7
reports
metadata 150
repositories S
adding 19
searching
adding metadata 3
See also PowerCenter Designer Guide
adding to the Navigator 18
keywords 23
administration overview 7
session logs
architecture 2
truncating 31
auto-reconnect 20
sessions
connecting to 20
copying 142
connectivity 2
copying mapping variables 143
copying folders between local 100
database connection conflicts 142
database definition views 152
description 4
exporting/importing connections 22

204 Index
 exporting 116
importing 116
T
metadata extensions in 146 target definitions
view of current logs 190 description 4
view of current scheduled 185 keyword searches 23
view of individual session 192 metadata extensions in 145
sessions nodes details view of associated transformations 167
viewing 15 view of joins between target tables 170
shared folders view of table-level transformations 166
See also folders targets
description 9 exporting to BI tools 129
Shortcut status (parameter) importing from BI tools 129
query parameter 80 tasks
shortcuts metadata extensions in 146
See also PowerCenter Designer Guide team-based development
advantages 46 See versioned objects
behavior when copying folders 98, 99 tips
copying 53 shortcuts 54
default names 46 transformations
dependencies 16 description 4
description 4 metadata extensions in 145
descriptions inherited 47 troubleshooting
exporting 115, 117 exporting objects 127
exporting objects referenced by 115 importing objects 127
global 46, 50 shortcuts 54
importing 117 typical mode
local 46, 48 copying folders 95
overview 45
properties 46
referenced objects 46, 47 U
refreshing properties 52 updating
renaming source qualifiers 53 shortcuts 52
tips 54 User (parameter)
to folders 98 query parameter 80
troubleshooting 54 user list
updating views 52 folders and global objects 40
using 51 user-defined functions
using queries to locate 80 description 4
source databases
view of analyzed or imported sources 156
view of fields 158
source definitions
V
description 4 valid status
metadata extensions in 145 objects 6
source file connections node Valid Status (parameter)
viewing details 16 query parameter 81
sources validating
exporting to BI tools 129 objects 28
importing from BI tools 129 variables
source-target dependencies copying mapping variables 143
description 16 version control
SQL scripts See also versioned objects
for creating/dropping MX views 151 overview 10
static deployment groups Version Status (parameter)
description 90 query parameter 81
editing 88 versioned objects
status checking in 62, 63
object 64 checking out 62
status bar comparing 61
progress indicator 13 definition 55
synchronization deleting 64
users 8 deployment groups 87
exporting 117

Index 205
 labels 71
object queries 75, 82
object status 59
overview 55
purging 65
recovering a deleted object 65
sample scenario 56
team-based development 55
undoing a checkout 63
using older versions 65
viewing applied labels 59
viewing history 60
viewing object properties 59
viewing object version history 60
viewing version properties 59

W
windows
displaying Repository Manager 13
workflow logs
truncating 31
Workflow Manager
copying in 141
workflow segments
copying 143
workflow tasks
See also PowerCenter Workflow Basics Guide
description 4
workflows
See also PowerCenter Workflow Basics Guide
copying 141
description 4
metadata extensions in 146
worklets
See also PowerCenter Workflow Basics Guide
copying 141
description 4
metadata extensions in 146

X
XML file
CRCVALUE codes 113
exporting and importing objects 113
modifying an exported file 119
modifying objects 119
validating for object import 122
validating objects 122

206 Index
NOTICES
This Informatica product (the “Software”) includes certain drivers (the “DataDirect Drivers”) from DataDirect Technologies, an operating company of Progress Software Corporation (“DataDirect”)
which are subject to the following terms and conditions:

1. THE DATADIRECT DRIVERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.

2. IN NO EVENT WILL DATADIRECT OR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO THE END-USER CUSTOMER FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THE ODBC DRIVERS, WHETHER OR NOT INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITIES OF DAMAGES IN
ADVANCE. THESE LIMITATIONS APPLY TO ALL CAUSES OF ACTION, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY,
NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, MISREPRESENTATION AND OTHER TORTS.